JP7032264B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, various types of gaming machines such as bullet-ball gaming machines, spinning-type gaming machines, arrange balls, and sparrow-ball gaming machines are widely known. Among these gaming machines, those equipped with a so-called "setting function" capable of setting an expected value of profit given to a player in a plurality of stages are known (for example, Patent Document 1 below). Therefore, what kind of value the set value is is one of the major concerns of the player. Therefore, it is known that a model equipped with a setting function can execute an effect suggesting a current setting value when a predetermined condition is satisfied during a game (for example, Patent Document 2 below).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-26756 JP-A-2018-68586

Not limited to the above-mentioned set value information, information that leads to a big hit (first advantageous information), information that can expand the range of playability even if it does not lead to a big hit (second advantageous information), personal observation even if it does not lead to a big hit (second advantageous information) Information that is important according to the rule of thumb (third advantageous information) is important information for the player. In particular, it is preferable for the player who is selecting the game table to be played from now on to be able to confirm such information as soon as possible. However, when a predetermined step is required to confirm the advantageous information, for example, it is advantageous only after selecting a predetermined menu item on the menu screen (for example, selecting "Today's game history 102d" shown in FIG. 43). If the information cannot be confirmed, not only will the player who is selecting the game table be stressed, but also the player who is playing next to the vacant table will be stressed by the frequent button operations on the next table, and the game will be played. There is a risk of diminished motivation .

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately expressing information that the player feels useful and preventing the player's interest in playing games from diminishing .

(1) The present invention
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
A game setting changing means capable of changing the game setting when the operating means is operated, and a game setting changing means.
A display means capable of displaying an effect related to a game, a display control means for controlling the display means, and a display means.
A counting means that can count the counting targets that are established according to the progress of the game,
A privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege to a player when the count value by the counting means reaches a predetermined value,
It is provided with a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of types of setting values having different advantages to the player .
In a gaming machine that can grant a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the granting conditions according to the set value are satisfied.
The setting means can change the set value when a predetermined change operation is performed.
The display control means is
Advantageous information display control means capable of displaying advantageous information according to the count value by the counting means, and
A demo effect display control means that can display a demo effect when the judgment condition that the game is stopped is satisfied, and
A change information display control means capable of displaying change information related to a game when the operation means is operated, and a change information display control means.
In the display means, a suggestion display control means capable of individually displaying a first suggestion display that can suggest that the set value has been changed and a second suggestion display that can suggest the set value. , Equipped with
The advantageous information display control means is
When the advantageous information is displayed during the game, the advantageous information can be continuously visually recognized even after the progress of the game is stopped, and further, at least one of the advantageous information even after the demonstration effect is started in that state. Make the part visible ,
The first suggestion display can be displayed at any timing from the time when the power is turned on until the predetermined condition is satisfied.
The second suggestion display can be displayed at a predetermined timing after the power is turned on, and can be redisplayed even after the predetermined condition is satisfied.
When the execution lottery of the first suggestion display is performed, regardless of the result of the execution lottery, the execution lottery is not performed again at least until a power failure occurs and the power is turned on again. ,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent a player's interest in playing games from diminishing .

It is a front view which shows the appearance of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of a game board and a production button. It is a block diagram which shows the control device. It is a figure which provides the explanation of the game state transition. It is explanatory drawing which provides the explanation of the screen display of the liquid crystal display device. It is a flowchart which shows the first half part of the main processing on the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the latter half of the main processing on the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the initial setting process in FIG. 6A. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st power source abnormality check process in FIG. 6A. 6 is a flowchart showing a command transmission process in FIG. 6A. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change management process in FIG. 6A. It is a flowchart which shows the transmission command table selection process in FIG. 6B. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st command data creation process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation process in FIG. 6B. It is a flowchart which shows the backup restoration process in FIG. 6B. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd command data creation process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process of a main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd power source abnormality check process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the setting abnormality check process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol management process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 start opening check process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start processing in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the processing front part during the special symbol confirmation time in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the processing post part during the special symbol confirmation time in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric accessory management process in FIG. It is an address map related to the memory space. It is a figure which shows the correspondence | correspondence of the signal input state, the value of the W register, and the migration destination processing route in the processing which concerns on the power-on of FIGS. 6A to 6B. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the source code (the first half part) corresponding to a part of the processing of the main control side main processing, and the processing order for each processing state. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the source code (the latter half part) corresponding to a part of the processing of the main control side main processing, and the processing order for each processing state. It is a figure which shows the source code which concerns a part of the setting confirmation processing. It is a figure which shows the command transmission address table etc. at the time of setting change. It is a figure which shows the command transmission address table and the like at the time of RAM clear. It is a figure which shows the command transmission address table etc. at the time of backup restoration. It is explanatory drawing which provides the explanation of the effect control command in each processing route. It is a flowchart which shows the production control side main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process on the effect control side. It is a flowchart which shows the setting completion command reception processing. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration symbol designation command reception process. It is a flowchart which shows the advance notice effect lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the morning one Gakkun notice lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the background change notice lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the customer waiting command reception processing. It is a flowchart which shows the demo / power saving mode processing. It is a flowchart which shows the menu management process. It is a flowchart which shows the operation management process during menu display. It is a flowchart which shows the payout ranking display process. It is explanatory drawing used for the explanation of the setting change suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing used for the explanation of a menu screen. It is explanatory drawing used for the explanation of the payout ranking display. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the type of setting suggestion effect and the execution timing. It is a figure which shows the left side part of FIG. 45. It is a figure which shows the right side part of FIG. 45. It is a figure which shows the schematic control example of the setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the lottery table by the set value for the notice of a tenpai symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening prize command reception processing. It is a figure which shows the big prize opening prize sound selection table. It is a figure which shows the lottery table of the setting suggestion effect 07. It is explanatory drawing used for the explanation of setting suggestion effect 07. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting guess element variable lottery form. It is a flowchart which shows the out ball number command reception processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variable lottery mode management process 1 in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the variable lottery mode management process 2 in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot start command reception processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variable lottery mode management process 3 in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the variable lottery mode management process 4 in FIG. It is a figure which shows the table for exclusive use of a variable lottery mode (change pattern 1). It is a figure which shows the table for exclusive use of a variable lottery mode (change pattern 2). It is a figure which shows the production example of the setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the production example (during symbol change-demo screen display) of setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the production example (the production example during reach) of the setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the production example (medium big hit-the start of a symbol change) of a setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the effect example (time saving state-normal state) of a setting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which provides the explanation of the production example of the setting suggestion effect in FIG. 64A. It is a figure which shows the production example of advantageous information notification.

Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In the embodiment described below, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of the gaming machine according to the present invention.

<1. Configuration overview: Figure 1 and Figure 2>
An outline of the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 2 is a view showing the front side of the gaming board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 (hereinafter abbreviated as “gaming machine 1”), a frame-shaped front frame 2 is attached to the front surface of a wooden outer frame 4 so as to be openable and closable, and the gaming machine is attached to the back surface of the front frame 2. A game board 3 (see FIG. 2) is mounted in a board storage frame (not shown), and the game area 3a formed on the surface of the game board 3 faces the opening of the front frame 2. A glass door 6 supporting transparent glass is provided on the front side of the game area 3a. Further, on the back side of the game board 3, various control boards (see FIG. 3) for controlling the game operation are arranged.

A key cylinder (not shown) for unlocking the door is provided on the front side of the glass door 6, and if a key is inserted into this key cylinder and operated on one side, the locked state of the glass door 6 with respect to the front frame 2 can be obtained. By operating the other side, the locked state of the front frame 2 with respect to the outer frame 4 can be released and the front frame 2 can be opened to the front side.

Below the glass door 6, a front operation panel 7 that is pivotally supported by a hinge (not shown) on the front frame 2 is arranged. The front operation panel 7 is provided with an upper saucer unit 8, and the upper saucer unit 8 is formed with an upper saucer 9 for storing the discharged game balls.

Further, the upper saucer unit 8 has a ball removal button 14 for pulling out the game balls stored in the upper saucer 9 below the game machine 1, and a game ball lending device (not shown) on the island equipment side. A ball lending button 11 for requesting the payout of balls and a card return button 12 for requesting the return of the valuable value medium inserted in the game ball lending device are provided.

Further, the upper tray unit 8 has a push button type effect button 13 (a first operating means (also functions as a refreshing button 70 (rolling button) described later), a button 75a pointing upward, and a button pointing to the right. It is composed of 75b, a button 75c pointing downward, and a button 75d pointing left, and is provided with a cross-shaped direction key 75 (second operating means) that can be operated in the up, down, left, and right directions. The direction key 75 functions as an operating means that can be operated by the player, and the operation is input during a predetermined operation valid acceptance period (button valid period) in a specific advance notice effect (for example, a so-called “player participation type effect”). The reception is activated, and if a predetermined operation (for example, one press, long press, repeated hits, etc.) is performed during this validity period, it is possible to bring about a change in the production before and after the operation. In addition, these operation means include the "game setting screen (volume setting, light amount setting, production mode setting, etc.)" related to the "demo start waiting effect" and "customer waiting effect (demo screen)" described later. It is also used when the player sets his / her favorite game on the “possible menu screen)”. The effect button 13 is provided with a built-in lamp (button LED 13b) inside the effect button 13, and the button LED 13b has a built-in lamp (button LED 13b). Due to the difference in light emission mode, it is possible to notify the operation reception valid period (for example, lighting or blinking in a predetermined color) and the operation reception invalid period (for example, turning off).

Further, on the right end side of the front operation panel 7, a launch operation handle 15 for operating the launch device 32 (see FIG. 3) is provided. The launching performance of the launching device 32 is such that it can launch a game ball of about 100 shots per minute.

Further, speakers 46 that exert a sound effect (sound effect) by sound are provided on both sides of the upper part of the front frame 2 and on the upper side of the firing operation handle 15. In addition, a plurality of decorative lamps 45 (LEDs for directing) that exert a light effect by decorating light are provided in appropriate places of the gaming machine, for example, in the circumferential direction around the periphery of the front frame of the glass door 6 or inside the center decorative body 48 described later. It is provided.

(Game board: Fig. 2)
Next, the configuration of the game board 3 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, a ball guide rail 5 for guiding the launched game ball is annularly mounted on the game board 3 as a board surface partition member, and a substantially circular region surrounded by the ball guide rail 5 is formed on the game board 3. The game area 3a and the four corners are non-game areas.

A liquid crystal display device (LCD) 36 is provided in a substantially central portion of the game area 3a. Under the control of the effect control unit 24, which will be described later, the liquid crystal display device 36 independently has a plurality of types of decorative symbols (for example, a left symbol) in a predetermined display area (symbol variation display area), such as numbers, characters, and symbols. , Middle symbol, right symbol (see FIG. 5)), including variable display operation (variable display and stop display), various effects are displayed by images.

Further, in the game area 3a, a center decorative body 48 is provided so as to surround the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 in a long-winding manner. The center decorative body 48 is provided along the front side of the game board 3, forms the outer periphery of the front mounting plate 48a fixed to the game board 3 and the center decorative body 48, and surrounds the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. The armor frame portion 48b is integrally provided to protect the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 from the surrounding game balls, and the flow path of the game balls is distributed to the left and right depending on the launch strength or stroke length of the game balls. It works as a flow path distribution means that enables this. In the present embodiment, a floating region through which the game ball can pass is formed between the upper surface of the center decorative body 48 and the ball guide rail 5, and the game ball driven into the upper side of the game area 3a by the launching device 32. Is distributed to the left and right on the upper side of the armor frame portion 48b, and flows down either the left flow path 3b on the left side of the center ornament 48 or the right flow path 3c on the right side.

In addition, the non-game area near the upper right edge (upper right corner) of the game board 3 is a various function display unit, and the 7-segment display (with dots) is the upper start port 34 (for the first special symbol) and the lower. A special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device: first special symbol display means) and a special symbol display device 38b (first special symbol display device: first special symbol display means) configured side by side corresponding to the starting port 35 (for the second special symbol). A second special symbol display device: a second special symbol display means) is provided. In the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, a "special symbol variation display game" is executed by the variation display operation (variation display and stop display) of the "special symbol" represented by the 7-segment display. In the liquid crystal display device 36 described above, the decorative symbol by the image is variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and various warning effects (effect images) are displayed. At the same time, a'decorative pattern variable display game'is being executed. The details of the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game will be described later.

Further, in the various function display units, a composite display device (LED display for holding composite display) 38c composed of a 7-segment display (with dots) is arranged next to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. The compound is called the display of the number of balls on hold for each of the special symbol 1, special symbol 2, and normal symbol, and the status notification during the operation of the variable time shortening function (during time reduction) and during the high probability state (during high probability). This is because it is a hold / time saving / high-accuracy composite display device (hereinafter, referred to as “composite display device”) having five display functions.

Further, the various function display units are provided with a normal symbol display device 39a (normal symbol display means) in which a plurality of (two in this embodiment) LEDs are arranged next to the composite display device 38c. In the ordinary symbol display device 39a according to the present embodiment, the ordinary symbol variation display game is executed by the variation display operation of the ordinary symbol represented by the two LEDs. For example, as a variable display operation, the normal symbol on the LED repeatedly turns on and off in a seesaw manner, and stops with either side lit, so that the success or failure of the normal symbol fluctuation display game can be determined. There is.

Further, a right-handed display device 39b is provided adjacent to the normal symbol display device 39a. The right-handed display device 39b is advantageous for "right-handed" in which the game ball aims to pass through the right-hand flow path 3c by combining the lighting and extinguishing states of the LED, or the game ball is left-handed flow path 3b. Notify whether "left-handed" aiming to pass through is advantageous. For example, when the light emitting state of the LED is lit, it is advantageous to hit right, and when it is turned off, it is advantageous to hit left.

Further, a round number display device 39c is provided in which two LEDs (round display LEDs) are arranged adjacent to the right-handed display device 39b. The round number display device 39c notifies the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds) related to the jackpot by combining the lighting / extinguishing states of the plurality of LEDs.

Below the center decoration 48, an upper starting port 34 (first special symbol starting port: first starting means) and a lower starting port 35 (second special symbol starting port: second starting means) are provided. A normal variable winning device 41 is provided above and below, and detection sensors 34a and 35a (upper start port sensor 34a, lower start port sensor 35a: see FIG. 3) for detecting the passage of a game ball are formed inside each of the devices. Has been done.

The upper starting port 34, which is the first special symbol starting port, is the first special symbol in the special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device) (hereinafter, the first special symbol is referred to as "special symbol 1". It is a winning opening related to the starting conditions of the variable display operation (referred to as "Special Figure 1" in some cases), and is a "fixed winning rate type" that does not have a "starting opening opening / closing means" that allows the starting opening to be opened or expanded. It is configured as a "winning device". In the present embodiment, a left flow path to the upper start port 34 due to the action of a game ball falling direction changing member (for example, a game nail (not shown), a windmill 44, a center decoration body 48, etc.) in the game area 3a. The game ball that has flowed down 3b has a structure that makes it easy to enter (win), while the game ball that has flowed down the right flow path 3c has a structure that is difficult or impossible to enter.

The ordinary variable winning device 41 is configured as a "winning rate variable winning device" in which the winning rate of the game ball at the starting opening can be changed by the starting opening opening / closing means. In the present embodiment, a pair of left and right movable wing pieces (movable members) 47 are provided as a starting port opening / closing means, and the movable wing pieces 47 perform an opening / closing operation to open and close the lower starting port 35, which is a second special symbol starting port. Can be opened or expanded.

Further, the lower starting port 35 of the normal variable winning device 41 is referred to as a second special symbol (hereinafter, the second special symbol is referred to as "special symbol 2" in the special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display device). (In some cases, abbreviated as "Special Figure 2"), it is a winning opening related to the starting condition of the variable display operation, and the winning area of the lower starting opening 35 depends on the operating state (operated or non-operating) of the movable wing piece 47. Then, it is converted into an open state that facilitates winning (easy winning state) and a closed state that makes it more difficult to win or makes it impossible to win than the open state (difficult to win). In the present embodiment, when the movable wing piece 47 is inactive, it holds a closed state (a winning impossible state) that makes it impossible to win a prize in the lower starting port 35.

Further, on both sides of the normal variable winning device 41, three general winning openings 43 are arranged on the left side and one on the right side, for a total of four, and inside each of them, a general winning opening for detecting the passage of a game ball is provided. A mouth sensor 43a (see FIG. 3) is formed.

Further, on the diagonally upper right side of the normal variable winning device 41, that is, on the upper side of the middle portion of the right flow path 3c, a normal symbol starting port 37 (third third) consisting of a passing gate (specific passing area) through which a game ball can pass. A special symbol starting port: a third starting means) is provided. The normal symbol start port 37 is a winning opening related to the fluctuation display operation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display device 39a, and inside the normal symbol start port sensor 37a (see FIG. 3), which detects a passing game ball. Is formed. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol start port 37 is formed only on the right flow path 3c side and not on the left flow path 3b side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and both flow paths may be formed. ..

In the middle of the route from the normal symbol start port 37 in the right flow path 3c to the normal variable winning device 41, the large winning opening 50 can be opened or expanded by the retractable open door 52b. A device 52 (special electric accessory) is provided, and a large winning opening sensor 52a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has entered the large winning opening 50 is formed inside the device 52 (special electric accessory).

The periphery of the large winning opening 50 is a bulging portion (decorative member) 55 that bulges from the surface of the game board 3, and the upper side 55a of this bulging portion 55 forms a downstream guide portion of the right flow path 3c. There is. If the large winning opening 50 is closed by the open door 52b (the large winning opening is closed), the downstream guide portion of the right flow path 3c (by forming a surface continuous with the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55). It is designed to form a part of the upper side 55a). Further, in the downstream area of the right flow path 3c, in the area above the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55, to be exact, in the game area above the large winning opening 50, the flow path correction plate is substantially parallel to the flow direction of the game ball. The 51d is projected so as to move the flowing game ball toward the large winning opening 50.

The process of entering the game ball into the large winning opening 50 is as follows. The game ball that has passed through the floating area between the upper surface of the center decorative body 48 and the ball guide rail 5 is on the top surface (upper side) 55a of the bulging portion 55 that protrudes from the game board 3 and functions as a guide for the game ball. It flows down along. Then, the game ball comes into contact with the right end of the flow path correction plate 51d protruding from the third surface of the game board, whereby the flow direction of the game ball is corrected to the direction (downward) of the large winning opening 50. At this time, if the large winning opening 50 is covered by the retractable open door 52b (the large winning opening is closed), the game ball rolls on the large winning opening 50, and a gauge configuration (not shown) is further formed. (Arrangement of game nails) leads to the direction of the tulip-type normal variable winning device 41 (lower starting port 35). At this time, if the lower start opening 35 is in a winning state (starting opening open state), the game ball can win in the lower starting opening 35, but the open door 52b is retracted into the game board surface and the large winning opening 50 is used. If is open (large winning opening open state), the game ball is guided into the large winning opening 50.

(Right-handed advantageous configuration under specific conditions)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player aims at the launch position on the special variable winning device 52 side (when the gaming ball is aimed so as to pass through the right flow path 3c), the normal symbol start port Although the game ball is easy to win in 37, the game ball is difficult or not guided to the upper starting port 34 side. Therefore, in the "large winning opening closed state", it is difficult or impossible to win a prize in each of the starting openings 34 and 35 unless the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 operates. However, the movable wing piece 47 operates in an opening / closing pattern that is at least more advantageous than the normal state in the gaming state accompanied by the "state with electric support" described later. Therefore, in the case of this electric support state, instead of "left-handed" aiming at the game ball to pass through the left flow path 3b, aiming at the game ball passing through the right flow path 3c ". "Right-handed" is considered to be advantageous. In other words, whether to hit "left-handed" or "right-handed" will be advantageous for the player, depending on the game state, and under the state without electric support (for example, the normal state or "Left-handed" is advantageous in the latent probability state described later), and "right-handed" is advantageous in the state with electric support (for example, time saving state or probability change state).

Each of the winning openings such as the upper starting opening 34, the lower starting opening 35, the normal symbol starting opening 37, the large winning opening 50, or the general winning opening 43 functions as a winning means arranged in the game area 3a, and also , The detection switch (winning detection switch) such as the upper start opening sensor 34a, the lower starting opening sensor 35a, the normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a, the large winning opening sensor 52a, or the general winning opening sensor 43a is a game in which the ball is entered into the winning means. It functions as a winning detection means for detecting a ball. The winning detection switch can be composed of a non-contact switch such as a photo switch or a proximity switch, or a contact switch such as a micro switch. The number, shape, formation position, etc. of each of the above-mentioned winning means can be appropriately changed according to the playability. Further, for each winning means, whether the game ball flowing down the left flow path 3b and / or the right flow path 3c is difficult to win, cannot be won, or can be won is appropriately changed according to the playability. be able to.

When a game ball is won in each winning opening, the number of winning balls per winning ball promised for each winning opening is paid out from the game ball payout device 19 (see FIG. 5). For example, 3 upper starting openings 34, 1 lower starting opening 35, 0 normal symbol starting openings 37 (without prize balls), 15 large winning openings 50, and 6 general winning openings 43 are paid out. Is done. The game balls that do not win in each of the above winning openings are discharged from the gaming area 3a via the out opening 49. Here, the "winning" is not a structure in which the winning opening takes in the game ball inside, or the winning opening takes in the game ball inside, but a winning opening consisting of a passing gate (for example, a normal symbol start opening 37). ), It means that the game ball passes through the gate, and when the game ball is actually detected by each winning detection switch formed for each winning opening, "winning" is made in the winning opening. Is treated as if it occurred. The game ball related to this prize is also referred to as a "winning ball".

<Movable body>
Further, in the game area 3a, a plurality of movable body accessories are arranged at positions that do not interfere with the flow of the game ball. In the present embodiment, the first movable body accessory (clock-shaped accessory) 80 is arranged on the upper right side of the center decoration body 48, and the second movable body accessory (flower-shaped accessory) is arranged on the diagonally lower right side thereof. Object) 90 is arranged. The clock-type accessory 80, which is the first movable accessory, has a clock face portion 81 composed of a number display unit divided into a number sector (I "to XII) and rotatably on the clock face portion 81. It has a clock hand 82 composed of a formed short hand and a long hand, and is configured as a clock-type accessory 80 as a whole. Further, in the flower-shaped accessory 90, which is the second movable object, a corolla A2 composed of a plurality of petals is arranged around the flower center A1, and the corolla A1 and the corolla A2 are moved vertically (falling) or in the left-right direction. The first movable body 91 configured to be movable (protruding movement) and the calyx B1 located around the outside of the corolla A2 are attached to the tip of the stem B2, and the calyx B1 and the calyx B2 can be moved vertically (falling). It is composed of the second movable body 92 configured in the above. The clock-shaped accessory 80 (clock hand 82) and the flower-shaped accessory 90 (first movable body 91, second movable body 92) serve to indicate the degree of expectation for hitting (winning expectation) depending on the operation mode. It is also used when the setting suggestion effect described later is displayed (the same applies to the third movable body accessory described later).

<Normal button 13A, rotary light button 66, exhilarating button 70: Fig. 2>
Further, a third movable body accessory (a semi-transparent spherical movable body 73 containing a rotating light 62 and a light emitting device) is integrally incorporated in the effect button 13 so as to be swingable and rotatable. The effect button 13 is a normal button 13A (first effect button: chance button) or a rotary light button 66 (second effect button) depending on the stationary orientation (position of the surface seen by the player) of the built-in movable body 73. When the movable body 73 is in a state of rotating forward, it functions as an exhilarating button 70 (third effect button: rolling button).

As outlined in FIG. 2, the effect button 13 has a transparent press button type cylinder 72 having a relatively large surface area up and down in a transparent frame 71 configured so that the saucer unit 8 and the surface are integrated. The movable body 73 as a third movable body accessory can be rolled, that is, rotated in or below the pressure button type cylinder 72 (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as the inside of the pressure button type cylinder 72). It has a structure that is possible and swingable in multiple directions.

The movable body 73 is arranged in the push button type cylinder 72, and is a semi-transparent spherical empty frame that is configured to be rotatable around the horizontal axis and swing in the left-right direction when viewed from the player, and the sky. It is composed of a rotating lamp 62 housed in a frame and a light emitting device. When the press button type cylinder 72 is pressed, or at a predetermined timing before and after that, the movable body 73 rolls (rotates and swings), and the movement is illuminated with colored light from inside or around the empty frame. The structure is such that the player can visually recognize it from the outside.

The effect button 13 having the above structure is a "normal button 13A" depending on whether the operation mode of the movable body 73 at the time of its operation is "normally stationary", "waiting for a rotating light", or "rolling operation". (1st effect button) ”,“ Rotating light button 66 (2nd effect button) ”,“ Exhilarating button 70 (3rd effect button: Rolling button) ”. Here, "normally stationary" means that the rotation angle position of the movable body 73 in the stationary state is 0 degrees, and the light emitting body (top surface of the surrounding body 64) of the rotating lamp 62 is moved up through the pressing button type cylinder 72. A state of being in a position not seen from the player (a position hidden from the player), and when the pressing button type cylinder 72 is pressed in this state, the effect button 13 functions as a normal button 13A (first effect button). When the term "normal button 13A" is used in the present specification, it refers to the effect button 13 when operating in this "normally stationary" state.

Further, "waiting for rotating light" means that the rotation angle position of the movable body 73 in the stationary state is switched from the above-mentioned normally stationary position (0 degree) to the position rotated 90 degrees toward you (90 degrees) and rotated. The light emitting state of the light 62 (the top surface of the surrounding body 64) is in a position that can be seen from above (a position that can be seen by the player) through the pressing button type cylinder 72, and the pressing button type cylinder 72 is in this state. When pressed, the effect button 13 acts as a rotary light button 66 (second effect button). When working as a basal light button 66 (second effect button), the basal light 62 can be seen from above through the pressing button type cylinder 72, so that it can be urged to operate, and for example, the basal light 62 is operated at the moment of operation. The operation can be visually recognized through the push button type cylinder 72. Therefore, it is suitable for making a one-shot notice effect appear, and it is possible to make a very tense moment appear. After the period of "standby for rotating light" elapses, the movable body 73 rotates 90 degrees to the back side and returns to the position (0 degree) of "normally stationary".

Further, "rolling operation" means a state in which the movable body 73 continues to rotate forward, that is, a state in which the movable body 73 is rotating with the horizontal axis as the rotation center axis as shown in FIG. When the pressing button type cylinder 72 is pressed while the movable body 73 is rotating, the effect button 13 acts as an exhilarating button 70 (third effect button). When working as an exhilarating button 70, the player operates the rolling button 70 because the rolling operation (high-speed rotation) of the spherical movable body 73 can be seen from the outside through the transparent frame 71 and the pressing button type cylinder 72. At that time, a very satisfying pleasure can be obtained, which is different from when the normal button 13A or the rotary light button 66 is pressed. After the period of "rolling operation" elapses, the movable body 73 comes to rest and returns to the position of "normally resting".

In the lower part of FIG. 2, among the three types of button functions used properly as described above, the functional parts of the rotary light button 66 and the refreshing button 70 are shown separately. Here, for the sake of ease of understanding, it is drawn as if there is a switch 65 dedicated to the rotary light button 66 and a switch 74 dedicated to the exhilarating button 70, but in reality, only one switch is used properly. ..

The beacon button 66 includes a lamp (or LED) 62a as a light source and a reflector 62b as a reflector for reflecting light from the lamp 62a in a red translucent enclosure 64. By rotating the reflector 62b, the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light source is changed.

Further, in the left side view of FIG. 2, the rotating light 62 is drawn as having a rotating light switch 65 when the rotating light 62 acts as a push button type rotating light button 66, and the surrounding body 64 of the rotating light 62 is drawn at a predetermined timing. When the button is pressed, the rotary light switch 65 is turned on, a hit notification sound is generated, and the rotary light 62 is activated. However, in reality, since the beacon 62 is housed in the empty frame (shell portion of the movable body 73) in the right side of FIG. 2, it is not the enclosure 64 that functions as the operation unit of the beacon 62. It is a pressing button type cylinder 72, and when the pressing button type cylinder 72 is pressed while "waiting for a rotating light", the switch 74 is turned on and the rotation light switch 65 is turned on with the same result. The light 62 is activated. The normal button 13A that acts in "normally stationary" is a frequently used effect button that does not necessarily operate all the effect means. On the other hand, this rotary light button 66 is for one notification.

When functioning as the exhilarating button 70, as outlined in the right side view of FIG. 2, the movable body 73 becomes "rolling operation" in which the movable body 73 continuously rotates at high speed in the pressure button type cylinder 72, and the operation thereof is performed. Illuminate from the inside or the surroundings with colored light according to the winning expectation (for example, blue, green, red, Danger pattern (D pattern), rainbow color (correct), and the winning expectation is high in this order) , A state occurs in which the player can visually recognize this situation from the outside through the press button type cylinder 72. Since the exhilarating button 70 is operated on the premise of the appearance of this state, when the exhilarating button 70 is operated at the time of a big hit, it is extremely effective due to the synergistic effect with the effect (operation at the time of operation) related to the big hit lottery result generated after the operation. It is possible to give a great pleasure to the player. Since the exhilarating button 70 has a structure in which the movable body 73 is rotatably and rollably incorporated in or below the pressing button type cylinder 72, it functions as a button LED and also as a movable body accessory.

<2. Control device: Fig. 3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 3, a control device for controlling the game operation of the game machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing an outline of the control device.

The control device of the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a main control board (main control means) 20 (hereinafter referred to as “main control unit 20”) that collectively controls control related to overall gaming motion (game motion control). And, the effect control board (effect control means) 24 (hereinafter, "effect control unit 24") that receives the effect control command from the main control unit 20 and controls the execution control (appearance control) of the effect by the effect means. (Named), a payout control board (payout control means) 29 that controls the payout of prize balls by the game ball payout device 19, and a power source (including a backup power supply) required for each board of the game machine from an external power source. It is mainly composed of a power supply board (power supply control means (not shown)) to be supplied. Further, a liquid crystal display device 36 as an image display device is connected to the effect control unit 24. The power supply route is omitted in FIG.

(2-1. Main control unit 20)
The main control unit 20 is equipped with a microprocessor incorporating a CPU 201 (main control CPU), and is ROM 202 (main control) that stores various data necessary for game operation control in addition to a control program that describes a game operation control procedure. It is equipped with a ROM) and a RAM 203 (main control RAM) that functions as a work area and a buffer memory, and constitutes a microcomputer (Z80 system equivalent) as a whole.

Although not shown, the main control unit 20 applies interrupt signals to the CTC and CPU, which provide the Z80 system with a periodic interrupt, a pulse output creation function (bit rate generator) with a fixed period, and a time measurement function. Interrupt controller circuit that demonstrates interrupt enable / interrupt prohibition functions such as timer interrupts, reset circuit that can detect when the power is turned on or off, power failure, etc., and output a system reset signal to reset the CPU, control program Watchdog timer (WDT) circuit that monitors the operation abnormality of, out-of-designated area prohibition (IAT) circuit that monitors whether the program is executed correctly within the preset address range, and a certain range of hardware It also has a counter circuit for generating random numbers. At least the main control unit (main control board) 20 and the payout control board 29 receive a voltage drop signal received from a power supply board (not shown) to start execution of necessary backup processing prior to power cutoff, and power supply. The game operation before shutting off can be resumed after the power is restored (backup function). The gaming machine 1 can retain the stored contents of the RAM for at least several days.

The counter circuit includes a random number generation circuit that generates a random number and a sampling circuit that samples a random number value at a predetermined timing from the random number generation circuit, and acts as a 16-bit counter as a whole. By sending an instruction to the sampling circuit according to the processing state, the CPU 201 acquires the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit as an internal lottery random number value (big hit determination random number (random number size: 65536)). , The random number value is used for the big hit lottery. It should be noted that the random number for internal lottery is obtained by adding the soft random number value generated by appropriate software processing and the hard random number value in order to prevent the goto action such as hitting.

<Memory address map: Fig. 24>
Here, in order to facilitate the understanding of the present invention, FIG. 24 shows an outline of an address map relating to the memory space (RAM 203, ROM 202) used by the main control unit 20. The memory space shown in FIG. 24 is mainly composed of two spaces, a memory space accessed by a 16-bit address and an I / O space accessed by an 8-bit address.

As shown in the figure, the memory space used by the main control unit 20 includes addresses 0000H to FFFFH as a memory address map. Specifically, addresses 0000H to 01FFH are the memory space of RAM 203 (512 bytes), addresses 0200H to 0FFFH are unused areas (hereinafter referred to as "access prohibited areas"), and addresses 1000H. ~ 1072H is the memory space of the internal function register (register group for controlling each function mounted on the main control unit 20), 1073H ~ 7FFFH is the access prohibited area, and 8000H ~ A7FFH is the memory of ROM202. Space, addresses A800H to FFFFH are assigned to the access prohibited area.

As shown in the figure, the area of ROM 202 is a "program / data area" in which addresses 8000H to A6FFH of the memory space (10240 bytes) from address 8000H to address A7FFH describe a series of game control procedures, from address A700H to address A700H. Addresses A77FH are allocated to the'ROM comment storage area', addresses A780H to A79FH are allocated to the "CALLV instruction vector area", addresses A7A0H to A7A7H are allocated to the "interruption processing vector area", and addresses A7A8H to A7FFH are allocated to the "HW parameter area". Has been done.

The "program / data area" of the ROM 202 includes a "game control program (program in the area)" for executing game operation processing related to normal game progress such as a symbol variation display game and a winning game, and a base display described later. An area for storing various fixed data related to the "information display control program (out-of-area program)" for executing information display processing (base display processing) related to "performance information display" that is not directly related to the game progress. Is. After the reset, the CPU 201 starts executing the program from the address 8000H. As shown in the figure, the RAM 203 is provided with a work area (a RAM area in the area of addresses 0000H to 00FFH and a RAM area outside the area of addresses 0100H to 01FFH) corresponding to the in-area program and the out-of-area program, respectively. Has been done.

The "ROM comment area" is an area in which arbitrary data such as a program title, a manufacturer name, and a product version can be set. Further, the "CALLV instruction vector area" is an area for setting the upper address of the subroutine of the CALLV instruction described later (CALLV instruction vector table), and the "interrupt processing vector area" is the start address of the timer interrupt processing (main). Area to set (interrupt processing vector table). Further, the "HW parameter area" is an area in which parameters can be set for setting CPU internal functions in terms of hardware. The parameters set in the HW parameter area include, for example, a periodic reset setting, a system clock setting, an INT / NMI setting, a program end address (HPRGEND) used in the program / data area, a start address (HRAMSTAT) in the access prohibited area, and the like. Data related to the end address (HRAMEND), security code, manufacturer code, product code, etc. are included. Access to the program / data area (area from HPRGEND + 1 to A6FFH (area where programs and data are not stored)) after the address set by the program end address (HPRGEND), ROM comment area (ROM comment area) Illegal when an event such as access to (A700H to A77FH), access to the area (access prohibited area) between the start address (HRAMSTAT) and the end address (HRAMEND), and write operation to the ROM area is detected. It is considered that an access has occurred, and an illegal reset that resets only the CPU core is generated. When an illegal reset occurs, it is controlled to an error state, the progress of the game is stopped, and the error cannot be cleared until a new setting value is set (until the setting change management process described later is executed). There is.

Returning to the description of FIG. The main control unit 20 includes an upper start port sensor 34a for detecting a prize in the upper start port 34, a lower start port sensor 35a for detecting a prize in the lower start port 35, and a game ball for the normal symbol start port 37. The normal symbol start opening sensor 37a for detecting passage, the large winning opening sensor 52a for detecting the winning of the large winning opening 50, and the general winning opening sensor 43a for detecting the winning of the general winning opening 43 are mainly connected. The control unit 20 can receive the detection signals from these. Based on the detection signals from these sensors, the main control unit 20 grasps which winning opening the game ball has won (winning).

Further, an OUT monitoring switch 49a for detecting a game ball (so-called out ball) discharged from the gaming machine through the out port 49 and each winning port is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 is connected to the OUT monitoring switch. The detection signal from 49a can be received. The main control unit 20 includes a counting means for counting the number of out balls based on the detection signal from the OUT monitoring switch 49a. The number of out balls depends on whether or not the starters 34 and 35 have won a prize if the player continues to launch the game balls from the launcher 32, that is, whether or not the symbol variation display game is executed. It will increase instead. Since the launching performance of the launching device 32 according to the present embodiment is 100 rounds per minute, for example, if the cumulative number of out balls today is 30,000, the information that the gaming machine 1 has been operating for 300 minutes through the game machine 1. Will be obtained. Therefore, it can be said that the number of out balls (cumulative number of out balls) is one of the game performance information defined by the specific value. This out-ball number information is used for calculating the base value (one of the game performance information) described later. Further, the main control unit 20 can transmit an effect control command (out ball count command) including information that can specify the counting result by the counting means to the effect control unit 24 based on a predetermined transmission condition. This out-ball number command is used on the effect control unit 24 side for transition control of the variable lottery mode (FIG. 56) described later (details thereof will be described later).

Further, a fraud detection sensor (for example, vibration sensor, radio wave sensor, magnetic sensor: not shown) for detecting fraudulent activity against the pachinko gaming machine 1 is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 is connected to the fraud detection sensor. Based on the detection signal from, it is possible to monitor fraudulent activity against the gaming machine.

Further, the main control unit 20 includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 41c for controlling the opening and closing of the movable wing piece 47 of the lower starting port 35, and a large winning opening solenoid 52c for controlling the opening and closing of the open door 52b of the large winning opening 50. Is connected, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for driving and controlling them.

Further, the special symbol display device 38a and the special symbol display device 38b are connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for displaying and controlling the special symbols 1 and 2. There is. Further, a normal symbol display device 39a is connected to the main control unit 20, and a control signal for displaying and controlling the normal symbol can be transmitted.

Further, the main control unit 20 is connected to the composite display device 38c, the right-handed display device 39b, and the round number display device 39c, and the main control unit 20 is for displaying and controlling various information displayed on these devices. The control signal can be transmitted.

Further, a frame external terminal board 21 is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 is a signal (outer end signal) gaming machine including predetermined game information via the frame external terminal board 21. It can be output to the outside. The external terminal board 21 for the frame is configured to be connectable to a so-called "data counter DT" or "hole computer HC" provided outside the gaming machine, and is output from the external terminal board 21 for the frame. The end signal is sent to the "data counter DT" or the "hole computer HC". As the outer end signal, the main control unit 20 may use, for example, hit game start information, winning information for the starting port (variation start information of a special symbol), prize ball number information, security information (for example, vibration sensor error, radio sensor). It is possible to output one or more outer end signals including error, magnetic sensor error, RAM clear, setting change, and other occurrence information). The data counter DT is specific game information about the gaming machine (for example, the number of big hits, the number of rotations (the number of changes in the special symbol), the change start / stop information of the special symbol, and the winning information) based on the information contained in the outer end signal. It is a game information notification device that can notify (such as), and is usually installed on the upper part of the game machine. In addition, the hall computer HC monitors and collects game information of the gaming machine based on the outer end signal output from the external terminal board 21 for the frame, and comprehensively monitors the operating status of the gaming machine installed in the pachinko hall. It is a management computer dedicated to the pachinko parlors that manage it.

Further, a payout control board (payout control unit) 29 is connected to the main control unit 20, and when it is necessary to pay out the prize balls, a control command (number of prize balls) related to the payout is given to the payout control board 29. The specified payout control command) can be sent.

A game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19 for paying out game balls is connected to the payout control board 29. The main roles of the payout control board 29 are reception of a payout control command from the main control unit 20, prize ball payout control of the game ball payout device 19 based on the payout control command, transmission of a status signal to the main control unit 20, and the like. Is.

The game ball payout device 19 is provided with a supply shortage detection sensor 19a for detecting a supply shortage of the game ball, a ball counting sensor 19b for detecting the game ball (prize ball) to be paid out, and the like. Each detection signal from these sensors can be received. Further, the game ball payout device 19 is provided with a payout motor 19c for driving a ball payout mechanism unit (not shown) for paying out the game ball, and the payout control board 29 controls the payout motor 19c. It is possible to transmit the control signal of.

Further, the payout control board 29 has a full detection sensor 60 for detecting the storage state of the game balls stored in the upper tray 9 (whether or not the upper tray 9 is full), and the front frame 2 and / or the front operation. A door open sensor 61 that detects the open state of the panel 7 is connected. The door opening sensor 61 according to the present embodiment functions as a door opening detecting means, and is, for example, ON when the front frame 2 is opened to the front side with respect to the outer frame 4 (open state detection) and OFF when the front frame 2 is closed. It is configured to be in a state (closed state detection).

Further, the payout control board 29 is used as a state signal for the main control unit 20 based on the detection signals from the fullness detection sensor 60, the door open sensor 61, the supply shortage detection sensor 19a, the ball counting sensor 19b, and the like. , "Ball jam signal" indicating the full state, "Door opening signal" indicating that the front frame 2 / front operation panel 7 is open, and "Out of supply" indicating the supply shortage of the game ball from the game ball payout device 19. With a configuration that can transmit various status signals such as "signal", "counting error signal" indicating that the payout of prize balls is insufficient or an abnormality has occurred in the number of prize balls, and "payout completion signal" indicating that the payout operation has been completed. It has become. Based on these status signals, the main control unit 20 determines whether the front frame 2 / front operation panel 7 is in the open state (door opening error) and whether the payout operation of the game ball payout device 19 is normal (whether the payout operation of the game ball payout device 19 is normal). It monitors whether or not the upper tray 9 is full (ball jam error) and the like (replenishment shortage error). Although it has been described above that the detection signal (door opening signal) from the door opening sensor 61 is input to the main control unit 20 via the payout control board 29, the main control unit does not go through the payout control board 29. It may be configured to be directly input to 20.

Further, a launch control board 28 is connected to the payout control board 29, and the payout control board 29 can transmit a “launch permission signal ES” that permits a launch operation to the launch control board 28. The launch control board 28 controls the energization of the launch solenoid provided in the launch device 32 based on the output of the launch permission signal ES from the payout control board 29, and launches the game ball by operating the launch operation handle. The operation is realized. Specifically, it is detected that the launch permission signal ES is output from the payout control board 29 and that the player is touching the handle by the touch sensor (not shown) provided on the launch operation handle 15. The firing operation of the game ball is permitted on condition that the firing operation stop switch (not shown) provided on the firing operation handle 15 is not operated. Therefore, when the launch permission signal ES is not output, the launch operation is not executed even if the launch operation handle 15 is operated, and the game ball is not launched. Further, the launch strength of the game ball can be changed according to the operation amount of the launch operation handle 15. When the payout control board 29 detects the above-mentioned "ball jam error", a ball jam signal is transmitted to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 receiving the signal sends a launch permission signal to the launch control board 28. Stop the output of ES. As a result, the firing operation of the game ball is stopped until the full state of the upper tray 9 is resolved.

Further, the main control unit 20 includes a RAM clear switch 98 for initializing a predetermined area of the RAM 203, a setting key switch 94 for switching to a setting change allowable state in which a set value can be changed, and a setting change allowable state thereof. In the state, the setting change switch 95 for changing the setting value and the setting change completion switch 96 for confirming the setting value selected by the setting change switch 95 are connected, and the main control unit 20 is connected from these switches. The detection signal can be received. In the case of the present embodiment, the RAM clear switch 98, the setting change switch 95, and the setting change completion switch 96 are all push button type switches that can be operated by the operator, and the setting key switch 94 sets the setting key. It is a key switch that can be switched between a setting change allowable state (ON) and a setting change prohibited state (OFF) by inserting it and operating it ON / OFF. These switches are formed in appropriate places inside the gaming machine from the viewpoint of preventing fraudulent operations such as illegal operation of set values, and ON / OFF operations from the outside of the gaming machine are not possible unless the front frame 2 is opened. It is possible.

Further, a setting display 97 (setting display means) for displaying information related to the set value is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for displaying and controlling the setting display unit 20. .. The setting display 97 according to the present embodiment is composed of one 7-segment display and is mounted on the main control unit (main control board) 20. The setting display 97 is not limited to the main control board, but is a payout control board 28, a launch control board 29, and a relay board (a relay board that relays the connection between various display devices and switches and the control board: not shown. ), Or the effect control unit (effect control board (including the liquid crystal control board)) 24, etc., can be provided at an appropriate place inside the gaming machine.

(About the set value)
The above-mentioned "set value" causes a stepwise change in the payout rate (so-called machine discount (PAYOUT rate)), and in the present embodiment, six levels of setting values 1 to 6 are provided. ing. This "set value" defines at least the lottery probability (winning probability) of a big hit (the winning type at which the condition device described later is activated) for each of the settings 1 to 6 (6 stages), and is a set value. The higher the value, the higher the jackpot lottery probability (big hit winning probability) is set, which is advantageous to the player. For example, at low probability, setting 1 is 1/410, setting 2 is 1/390, setting 3 is 1/370, setting 4 is 1/350, setting 5 is 1/330, setting 6 is 1/320, and so on. be. That is, the higher the set value, the easier it is to win a big hit (the machine discount becomes higher), which is advantageous to the player. As described above, the set value is a value that mainly defines the event that affects the machine discount for each stage, and means the value for the grade related to the susceptibility of a specific event such as a big hit. Such "set values" are determined exclusively based on the sales strategy of pachinko halls (game stores). If the jackpot lottery probability is in a high probability state (when the special symbol probability change function described later is activated), the probability increases to a value that does not exceed 10 times, and the increase rate (for each set value). The ratio) is not different. In the above example, when the jackpot lottery probability at low probability is set 1 to 6 = 1/410 to 1/320 and the increase rate is 10 times, the jackpot lottery probability at high probability is set 1 to 6. = 1/41 to 1/32.

When a plurality of types of jackpots are provided, the winning probability of one or a plurality of types of jackpots can be changed according to the set value. For example, if there are four types of jackpots 1 to 4, the higher the set value, the higher the winning probability of all jackpots 1 to 4, or some jackpots may be configured. It may be configured to increase only the winning probability of a certain jackpot 1 to 3 (in this case, the winning probability of the jackpot 4 is common to all the set values), or only a specific jackpot (for example, only the jackpot 1). ) May be configured to increase only the winning probability (in this case, the winning probability is common to all the set values for the jackpots 2 to 4). Further, the higher the set value is, the higher the total winning probability of the jackpots 1 to 4 may be. Further, the winning probability of the small hit type that does not trigger the operation of the conditional device may be changed according to the set value, as in the case of the large hit described above.

(About the operation to change the set value)
In the present embodiment, when the power is turned on, at least when the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 are in the ON state, the setting change is controlled to the allowable state, and when the power is turned on by any other switch operation, the power is turned on. It is controlled to the setting change prohibition state. When the setting change switch 95 is turned on in this setting change allowable state, the current display value of the setting display 97 is "1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → 2 → 3 → ...". It is switched and displayed so as to circulate in the range of 1 to 6. Then, when the desired setting value is displayed, when the setting change completion switch 96 is turned ON (setting confirmation operation), the current display value is confirmed as the current setting value, and the setting value data is the predetermined area of the RAM 203 (the setting confirmation operation). It is stored in the setting value storage area). Then, when the setting key switch 94 is operated from the current ON state to the OFF state, the setting change allowable state is terminated, and thereafter, the game is started under the fixed set value. The main control unit 20 of the present embodiment includes a setting value selection means for selecting one of a plurality of types of setting values having different advantages for the player based on the operation of a predetermined operation means. It is provided with a setting value setting means for setting a setting value selected by the setting value selection means.

Further, the main control unit 20 can transmit various game processing information such as information about the special symbol variation display game and error information to the effect control unit 24 by the effect control command according to the processing state. .. However, in order to prevent the goto action from the outside, the main control unit 20 only transmits a signal to the effect control unit 24, and the signal from the effect control unit 24 cannot be received. It has become.

(About performance indicator 99)
Further, a performance display 99 (information display means) for displaying (notifying) information (hereinafter referred to as "performance information") related to the game result for a predetermined period (specific game period) is connected to the main control unit 20. The main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for displaying and controlling this. The performance display 99 of the present embodiment is composed of a plurality of 7-segment LEDs, and specifically, four 7-segment LEDs (7-segment displays 99a to 99d) in which a display unit and a circuit unit are unitized are laterally arranged. This is mounted on the main control board 20, for example, to form a display capable of displaying a 4-digit number. Further, each 7-segment LED has a decimal point DP (dot) under the 7-segment number.

In the present embodiment, as the above performance information, the total number of payouts (number of payouts in the normal state) in the normal state (the jackpot lottery probability is low probability (normal probability) and there is no electric support described later) and the cumulative total in the normal state. The number of out balls (number of outs during normal times) is measured in real time, and the value obtained by dividing the number of payouts during normal times by the number of outs during normal times multiplied by 100 (number of payouts during normal times ÷ number of outs during normal times x 100) is calculated. (Specific ratio information); hereinafter also referred to as “base value”) is adopted, and this is displayed in a predetermined mode by the performance display 99. As for the displayed value, the value rounded off to the first decimal place is displayed in a predetermined display mode. However, instead of simply measuring permanently and displaying the base value (performance information), when the number of out balls being measured reaches a predetermined specified number (for example, 60,000), the measurement is temporarily terminated. , The base value at the end of the measurement is stored as history information in a predetermined area (performance display storage area) of the RAM 203 (the current base value is stored). In the case of this embodiment, the "predetermined number (60,000)" that triggers the end of this measurement is not the number of outs during normal times, but the cumulative number of out balls measured during all gaming states (including during winning games). A number (hereinafter referred to as "total number of outs") is adopted, and this "total number of outs" is also measured in real time. Therefore, the data of the number of normal payouts, the number of normal outs, and the base value (specific ratio information) for calculating the base value and the data of the total number of outs are the corresponding areas of RAM 203 (normal payouts). It is stored in each of the number storage area, the normal out number storage area, the specific ratio information storage area, and the all-state out number storage area), and is used as needed. In the following, for convenience of explanation, various data used for base value calculation (normal time payout number storage area, normal time out number storage area, specific ratio information storage area, all state out) are not specified unless otherwise required. The storage area of the number storage area) is collectively referred to as a "measurement information storage area".

After storing the base value of this time as the above history information, the measurement information storage area used in this measurement is cleared to zero, and the number of next normal payouts, the number of normal outs, the base value, and all state out balls are cleared. Start counting numbers and measure new base values in real time.

On the performance display 99 of the present embodiment, the previous base value (history base value) as the above-mentioned history information and the base value currently being measured in real time (real-time base value) are alternately arranged at predetermined time intervals. It is designed to be switched and displayed (may be configured to enable simultaneous display). In the case of this embodiment, among the four 7-segment LEDs of the performance display 99, for the two 7-segment displays 99a and 99b on the left half of the front, whether the currently displayed display value is a real-time base value or not is a history. It functions as an "identification display unit (identification segment)" that displays identification information (identifier) for identifying whether it is a base value, while the two 7-segment displays 99c and 99d on the right half of the front are the base. It is designed to function as a "base display (ratio segment)" that displays values. For example, "bL." Is displayed on the identification display unit when "real-time base value" is displayed on the base display unit (ratio segment), and "b6." Is displayed when "history base value" is displayed on the identification display unit. Is displayed (identifier display), and it is identifiable whether the currently displayed base value is a real-time base value or a history base value. Therefore, the entire display ("identification display unit (identification segment) + base display unit (ratio segment)") of the performance display 99 (7-segment display 99a to 99d) is, for example, "when the real-time base value is 31". "bL.31" is displayed, and if the history base value is 29, "b6.29" is displayed. Further, the base value is displayed on the numerical display unit after rounding off to the first decimal place, but when the value after rounding is 3 digits or more, "99." indicating overflow is displayed on the base display unit.

The above-mentioned "performance information" is mainly used by pachinko hall stores and related agencies for confirmation and investigation. Information for investigating whether or not it has occurred, and whether or not the original ball ejection performance of the gaming machine (designed ball ejection performance) is properly exhibited, in other words, "information on game performance". Therefore, the performance information itself is information that is not directly related to the game progress itself when the player enjoys the game, unlike the advance notice effect and the setting suggestion effect. Therefore, the performance display 99 is not installed in a place that is visible to the player, but is mounted in a place that is easily visible inside the gaming machine, for example, on a control board or a board case that protects the control board.

(2-2. Production control unit 24)
The effect control unit 24 is equipped with a microprocessor having a built-in CPU 241 (effect control CPU), a ROM 242 (effect control ROM) that stores effect data required for effect control processing, and a RAM 243 (effect control ROM) that functions as a work area or a buffer memory. It is mainly composed of a microcomputer equipped with an effect control RAM), as well as an acoustic control unit (sound source LSI), RTC function unit (Real Time Clock), counter circuit for effect lottery random numbers, interrupt controller circuit, reset circuit, etc. A WDT circuit or the like is provided to control the overall production operation. In addition, the RTC function unit is a clock IC that ticks the time, and is related to real-time time information and / or date (month, day, day of the week) such as the current time (“current time is hour, minute, second”). It works as a clock means to provide calendar information. Since the RTC function unit is equipped with a secondary battery and can be operated permanently by charging the secondary battery with the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. Even if it is, it keeps timing the current date and time. However, the RTC function unit may have a time shift with the passage of time due to a frequency shift of the internal transmitter or the like. Therefore, it is possible to provide accurate time information by adjusting the time of the RTC function unit based on the accurate time information provided by the time adjusting means from the outside of the gaming machine.

The main roles of the effect control unit 24 are to receive the effect control command from the main control unit 20, determine the selection of the effect based on the effect control command, control the image display of the liquid crystal display device 36 which is the effect means, and control the sound of the speaker 46. , Light emission control of various effect LEDs (decorative lamp 45, button LED 13b, other effect LEDs), operation control of various movable objects, and the like.

Further, the effect control unit 24 includes a display control unit (not shown) that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 36. This display control unit expands VDP, which controls overall video output processing such as image expansion processing and image drawing, an image ROM that stores image data (directed image data) that VDP performs image expansion processing, and VDP. A VRAM (Video RAM) that temporarily stores the image data, a liquid crystal control CPU that outputs control data necessary for VDP to perform display control, and a program that describes the display control operation procedure of the liquid crystal control CPU and its It is mainly composed of a liquid crystal control ROM that stores various data necessary for display control and a liquid crystal control RAM that functions as a work area or a buffer memory.

Further, the effect control unit 24 includes various effect LEDs such as a decorative lamp 45, a button LED 13b, and 62a in order to bring out various effects (light effect, sound effect, and movable body effect by a movable body accessory). An optical display control unit for the optical display device 45a, an acoustic control unit (sound source LSI) for the sound generator 46a including the speaker 46, and movable body accessory motors 80c, 62c, 73c for operating the first to third movable object accessories. It is equipped with a drive control unit (motor drive circuit) for the LED. The effect control unit 24 can transmit a control signal related to the effect means to these control units.

Further, the effect control unit 24 is connected to a position detection sensor 82a that monitors the operation of the movable body accessory, and the effect control unit 24 is based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a and the current operation of the movable body accessory. The operation mode is controlled while monitoring the position (for example, the amount of movement from the origin position). Further, based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a, a malfunction in the operation of the movable body accessory is monitored, and if a malfunction occurs, a predetermined error notification is performed.

Further, the effect control unit 24 is connected to the effect button switch 13a for detecting the operation of the effect button 13 and the direction key switches 75a'to 75d' for detecting the operation of the direction keys 75 (75a to 75d) to control the effect. The unit 24 can receive operation detection signals from the effect buttons 13 (13A, 66, 70) and the direction keys 75.

When the effect control unit 24 receives the effect control command sent from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 determines by lottery or uniquely from a plurality of types of effect patterns prepared in advance based on the information contained in the command. Then, various production means are controlled at the required timing to bring out the desired production. As a result, the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device 36 corresponding to the effect pattern, the reproduction of the sound from the speaker 46, and the lighting / blinking drive of the decorative lamp 45 and other effect LEDs are realized, and various effect patterns (decorative patterns) are realized. By developing the variable display operation, advance notice production, etc. in chronological order, a "production scenario" in a broad sense is realized. Further, the effect control unit 24 responds to the effect button 13 and / or the direction key 75 based on the operation detection signals from the effect button switch 13a and the direction key switches 75a'to 75d' during the predetermined operation reception valid period. It has a configuration that can identify whether such an operation has been performed (for example, pressing, long pressing, repeated hitting, etc.) (operation identification means), and it has a configuration that can control the appearance according to the operation mode. There is.

The effect control command defines the function by a 2-byte configuration consisting of a 1-byte length mode (MODE) and a 1-byte length event (EVENT), and in order to distinguish between MODE and EVENT, Bit7 of MODE is used. Bit7 of ON and EVENT is set to OFF. When transmitting this information as valid, a strobe signal is output corresponding to each of the mode (MODE) and the event (EVENT). That is, when there is a command to be transmitted, the CPU 201 (main control CPU) sets and outputs mode (MODE) information for transmitting the command to the effect control unit 24, and is the first time after a predetermined time has elapsed from this setting. Sends the strobe signal of. Further, the event (EVENT) information is set and output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the transmission of the strobe signal, and the second strobe signal is transmitted after the predetermined time has elapsed from this setting. The strobe signal is controlled to be active by the CPU 201 for a predetermined period during which the CPU 241 (effect control CPU) can reliably receive the command.

Further, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) generates an interrupt based on the input of the strobe signal, executes the control program for the command reception interrupt process, and acquires the effect control command in this interrupt process. It has become. Further, unlike the CPU 201, the CPU 241 is executing an interrupt process (a timer interrupt process that is periodically executed) based on another interrupt when an interrupt occurs based on the input of a strobe signal. Even if there is, the command reception interrupt process is performed by interrupting the process, and the command reception interrupt process is preferentially performed even if other interrupts occur at the same time.

<3. Overview of operation>
Next, a gaming operation related to the gaming machine 1 using the control device (FIG. 3) will be described.

(3-1. Symbol fluctuation display game)
(3-1-1. Special symbol variation display game, decorative symbol variation display game)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 20 is based on predetermined starting conditions, specifically, that the gaming ball enters (wins) the upper starting opening 34 or the lower starting opening 35. A "big hit lottery" is held by random number lottery. Based on the lottery result, the main control unit 20 variablely displays the special symbols 1 and 2 on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b to start the special symbol variable display game, and after a predetermined time elapses, displays the result as a special symbol. Derived display is performed on the device, thereby ending the special symbol variation display game.

Here, in the present embodiment, the big hit lottery based on the winning of the upper starting port 34 and the big hit lottery based on the winning of the lower starting opening 35 are performed separately and independently. Therefore, the jackpot lottery result for the upper starting port 34 is derived on the special symbol display device 38a side, and the jackpot lottery result for the lower starting port 35 is derived on the special symbol display device 38b side. Specifically, on the special symbol display device 38a side, the special symbol 1 is variablely displayed and the first special symbol variable display game is started on the condition that the game ball enters the upper start opening 34. On the other hand, on the special symbol display device 38b side, the special symbol 2 is variablely displayed and the second special symbol variable display game is started on condition that the game ball enters the lower start opening 35. ing. Then, when the special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a or the special symbol display device 38b is started, after a predetermined variation display time elapses, if the jackpot lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined "big hit". In the mode, if the big hit lottery result is "small hit", the special symbol in the variable display is stopped and displayed in the predetermined "small hit" mode, and in other cases, in the predetermined "missing" mode. The game result (big hit lottery result) is derived by.

In the present specification, for convenience of explanation, the first special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a side is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1", and the second special symbol display device 38b side is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1". The special symbol variation display game is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 2". Unless otherwise required, "special symbol 1" and "special symbol 2" are simply referred to as "special symbol" (sometimes abbreviated as "special symbol"), and "special symbol variation display game 1" and "special symbol". The "variable display game 2" may be referred to as a "special symbol variable display game".

Further, when the above-mentioned special symbol variation display game is started, the decorative symbol (directing game symbol) is variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the decorative symbol variation display game is started. Then, various productions are developed. When the special symbol variation display game ends, the decorative symbol variation display game also ends, the special symbol display device reflects a predetermined special symbol indicating the jackpot lottery result, and the liquid crystal display device 36 reflects the jackpot lottery result. The decorative pattern is derived and displayed. That is, the result of the special symbol variation display game is reflected and displayed by the dramatic decorative symbol variation display game including the variation display operation of the decorative symbol.

Therefore, for example, when the result of the special symbol variation display game (result of the jackpot lottery) is "big hit", the decorative symbol variation display game develops an effect reflecting the result. Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode (for example, the 7-segment display state is "7") indicating a big hit in the special symbol display device, the liquid crystal display device 36 displays "left", "middle", and "right". In each display area of "", the decorative symbols reflect the "big hit" (for example, in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" display areas, the three decorative symbols are "7", "7", and " 7 ”is displayed as a stop display.

In the case of this "big hit", specifically, the special symbol variation display game is terminated, and the decorative symbol variation display game is terminated accordingly, and as a result, the symbol mode of the "big hit" is derived and displayed. After that, the large winning opening solenoid 52c (see FIG. 3) of the special variable winning device 52 operates and the open door 52b opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, whereby the large winning opening 50 is opened and closed, and the normal state (normal game). A special gaming state (big hit game) that is more advantageous to the player than the state) occurs. In this big hit game, the number of game balls that have won a prize until a predetermined time (maximum opening time: for example, 29.8 seconds) elapses by the opening door 52b or the big winning opening is won (big winning opening 50). The maximum number of winning balls (maximum number of winning balls): for example, the maximum number of winning balls allowed for a winning opening whose entrance is opened or expanded by one operation of the winning combination) The "round game" is such that the winning area is opened or expanded until the number reaches, and the big winning opening is closed when any of these conditions (round game end condition) is satisfied (the closing condition is satisfied). A predetermined number of predetermined rounds (for example, up to 16 rounds) are repeated. That is, the opening pattern of the above-mentioned large winning opening has one or more unit opening periods, and the unit opening period starts by opening the large winning opening, and at least the number of winnings to the large winning opening is a predetermined number (maximum number of winnings). It is controlled to close the open big prize opening based on reaching. It should be noted that the hit game in which the unit opening period is continuously executed for two or more is the case of the big hit game in which the accessory continuous operation device is operated, and the hit game in which the unit opening period is executed once is executed by the round game. This is the case for small hit games that are not played.

When the jackpot game starts, the opening effect is performed using the jackpot start interval time, and after the opening effect is completed, the round game is performed a plurality of times up to a predetermined number of predetermined rounds. Then, when the specified number of rounds is completed, the ending effect is performed using the jackpot end interval time. As a result, the jackpot game ends. That is, the jackpot game is roughly divided into an opening period, a round game period up to the maximum number of rounds, and each game period of the ending period. In addition, during the round game, the effect during the round and the interval effect between the rounds appear between the round games.

Regarding the information necessary for executing the above-mentioned decorative symbol variation display game, first, the main control unit 20 first enters (wins) a game ball into the upper start opening 34 or the lower start opening 35, and specifically. , "Big hit", "Small hit", or "Loss" on condition that the game ball is detected by the upper start port sensor 34a or the lower start port sensor 35a and the start condition (start condition related to the special symbol) is satisfied. If it is a "big hit", the big hit type is selected, if it is a "small hit", the small hit type is selected, and if it is a "miss", the big hit type is selected. Perform a big hit lottery including'design lottery (winning type lottery)'to draw a lottery for the lost type (if there is only one type of big hit, small hit or lost, it is not necessary to perform the symbol lottery, so omit the lottery. Based on the lottery result information, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol and the special symbol (special stop symbol) to be finally stopped and displayed are determined. Then, as an effect control command for specifying the processing state, the effect control unit 24 issues a "variation pattern designation command" including at least the variation pattern information of the special symbol (for example, the big hit lottery result, the information regarding the variation time of the special symbol, etc.). Send to the side. As a result, the basic information required for the decorative symbol variation display game is sent to the effect control unit 24. In this embodiment, a "decorative symbol designation command" including information on special stop symbols (design lottery result information (information on winning type)) is also transmitted to the effect control unit 24 in order to enrich the variation of the effect. It has become like.

The variation pattern information of the special symbol may include information for designating the occurrence of a specific advance notice effect (for example, a reach effect type described later, a pseudo-continuous effect and the number of times thereof). Specifically, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is roughly classified into a "hit fluctuation pattern" in the case of a hit and a "loss fluctuation pattern" in the case of a loss, depending on the result of the big hit lottery. 'Reach fluctuation pattern' that specifies the occurrence of reach effect (including the designation of N reach 1-2, weak SP reach-strong reach type, etc. described later),'normal variation pattern'that does not specify the occurrence of reach effect, pseudo-ream There are multiple types of fluctuation patterns, such as the'pseudo-ream reach variation pattern'that specifies the occurrence of the effect and the reach effect, and the'pseudo-ream normal variation pattern'that specifies the occurrence of the pseudo-ream effect and does not specify the occurrence of the reach effect. included. Further, with respect to the reach fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation pattern with pseudo-ream, the fluctuation time longer than the fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation pattern is basically set in order to secure the production time of the advance notice effect.

The effect control unit 24 is time-series during the decorative symbol variation display game based on the information included in the effect control commands (here, the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command) sent from the main control unit 20. Decide the content of the effect (effect scenario) to be developed in the game, the decorative pattern to be finally stopped and displayed (decorative stop pattern), etc. Controls the appearance of variable display effects of decorative patterns. As a result, the decorative symbol by the liquid crystal display device 36 is variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and the period of the special symbol variable display game and the decorative symbol variable display game are in progress. The period of is substantially the same time width. Further, the effect control unit 24 controls the liquid crystal display device 36, the light display device 45a, or the sound generator 46a, respectively, so as to correspond to the effect scenario, and develops various effects in the decorative symbol variation display game. As a result, image reproduction (image effect) on the liquid crystal display device 36, sound effect reproduction (sound effect), and lighting / blinking drive (light effect) of the effect LED such as the decorative lamp 45 are realized.

In this way, the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game have an inseparable relationship, and the one that reflects the display result of the special symbol variation display game is expressed in the decorative symbol variation display game. , These two symbol variation display games may be regarded as equivalent symbol games. Unless otherwise specified in the present specification, the above two symbol variation display games may be simply referred to as "symbol variation display game".

(3-1-2. Ordinary symbol fluctuation display game)
Further, in the gaming machine 1, based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed (winning) through the normal symbol starting port 37, the main control unit 20 performs a "subsidy winning lottery" by a random number lottery. Based on this lottery result, the normal symbol represented by the LED is variablely displayed on the normal symbol display device 39a to start the normal symbol variable display game, and after a predetermined fluctuation time elapses, the result is turned on and off by the LED. It is designed to stop and display in combination. For example, when the result of the normal symbol variation display game is "auxiliary hit", the display unit of the normal symbol display device 39a is stopped and displayed in a specific lighting state (for example, all two LEDs 39 are in the lighting state).

In the case of this "auxiliary hit", the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c (see FIG. 3) is activated, whereby the movable wing piece 47 opens in an inverted "C" shape and the lower starting port 35 opens. Alternatively, the game ball is expanded to a state in which the game ball is likely to flow in (starting opening open state), and an auxiliary game state (hereinafter referred to as "solenoid open game") that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state occurs. In this general electric opening game, the opening time of the lower starting port 35 (the operating time during which the lower starting port 35 is opened by the movable wing piece 47) is set to a predetermined time (for example, by the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41). The winning area is opened or expanded until 0.2 seconds) elapses, or until the number of game balls won in the lower starting port 35 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 4), and either of these conditions is satisfied. In this case, the operation of closing the lower starting port 35 is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of two times).

(3-1-3. Operation hold ball)
Here, in the present embodiment, each start port 34 to 35 or the normal symbol start port 37 wins a prize during the special / decorative symbol variation display game, the normal symbol variation display game, the big hit game, or the normal electric opening game. When it occurs, that is, when there is a detection signal input from the start port sensors 34a to 35a or the normal symbol start port sensor 37a and the corresponding start condition (symbol game start condition) is satisfied, this is the start right of the variable display game. As the data related to the above, except for the data related to the variable display, the maximum number of reserved storages (for example, a maximum of 4), which is a predetermined upper limit, is stored. The pending data that is not used for this symbol variation display operation or the game ball related to the reserved data is also referred to as an "operation pending ball". In order to clarify the number of operation holding balls to the player, a dedicated holding display (not shown) provided at a suitable position in the game machine 1 or a holding display provided as an icon image on the screen by the liquid crystal display device 36. Turn on the device.

Further, in the present embodiment, up to four operation hold balls related to the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol are reserved and stored in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203, and the special symbol or the normal symbol is reserved as the number of fixed fluctuations. The maximum number of stored balls (maximum number of reserved balls) for each of the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol is not particularly limited. Further, all or part of the maximum reserved storage number of each symbol may be different, and the number can be appropriately determined according to the playability. In the following, each of the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol operation hold ball will also be referred to as a special figure 1 operation hold ball, a special figure 2 operation hold ball, and a normal figure operation hold ball, respectively.

(3-2. Game state)
Next, the gaming state will be described. The gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be capable of generating a plurality of types of gaming states in addition to the above-mentioned jackpot which is a special gaming state. In order to facilitate the understanding of the present invention, first, the functions (means) related to the generation of various gaming states will be described.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a "probability variation function (probability variation function)" in which the main control unit 20 (CPU201) is responsible for the functional unit. There are two types of this, a probabilistic function related to a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol probabilistic function") and a probabilistic function related to a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as "ordinary symbol probabilistic function").

The special symbol probability variation function changes the jackpot lottery probability from a low probability (for example, 1/320) of a predetermined probability (normal probability) to a high probability (for example, 1/32), which is more advantageous than the normal state. It is a function to generate a "high probability state (big hit high probability state)". Under the gaming state (high probability state) in which this special symbol probability change function is operating, the jackpot lottery probability is high, so that a jackpot is likely to occur.

The normal symbol probability variation function is more advantageous than the normal state by changing the lottery probability per auxiliary from a low probability (for example, 2/256), which is a predetermined probability (normal probability), to a high probability (for example, 255/255). It is a function to generate a "probability change state per auxiliary". Under the game state (auxiliary hit probability change state) in which this normal symbol probability change function is operating, the auxiliary hit lottery probability becomes a high probability state, so that auxiliary hits are likely to occur, and the normal electric open game frequently occurs. The operating rate is improved, in which the operating rate of the movable wing piece 47 per unit time is improved as compared with the normal state.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a "variable time shortening function (time saving function)" in which the main control unit 20 is responsible for the functional unit. There are two types of this: a time saving function related to a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol time saving function") and a time saving function related to a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as "ordinary symbol time saving function").

The special symbol time reduction function generates a "special symbol time reduction state" that shortens the average time required for one special symbol variation display game (the average time from when the special symbol starts to change to when it is stopped and displayed). It is a function to make it. Under the gaming state (special symbol time saving state) in which this special symbol time saving function is activated, the average fluctuation time of the special symbol in one special symbol fluctuation display game is shortened (for example, the average required for the loss change without reach). The time is shortened from 8 seconds to 2 seconds), and the number of big hit lottery per unit time is improved as compared with the normal state.

The normal symbol time saving function generates a "normal symbol time saving state" that shortens the average time required for one normal symbol fluctuation display game (the average time from when the normal symbol starts to change to when it is stopped and displayed). It is a function to make it. Under the gaming state (normal symbol time saving state) in which the normal symbol time saving function is activated, the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol in one normal symbol variation display game is shortened (for example, from 30 seconds to 1 second). ), The number of lottery times is improved, in which the number of lottery per auxiliary per unit time is improved compared to the normal state.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has an "open extension function" in which the main control unit 20 is responsible for its functional unit. This open extension function is a function to generate an "open extension state" in which the open operation period (opening time of the movable wing piece 47) of the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 is extended from the normal state. Under the open extension state, the open operation period (start opening open state time) of the movable wing piece 47 is extended from, for example, 0.2 seconds to 1.7 seconds, and the number of times of opening and closing thereof is, for example, once (open extension function). Is extended from 2 times (when the open extension function is operating) to 2 times (when the open extension function is operating), and the operating rate of the movable wing piece 47 per unit time is improved as compared with the normal state. Therefore, when the open extension function is activated, the frequency of winning the lower starting port 35 increases. Therefore, as a game state, the frequency of establishment of the starting condition of the special symbol variation display game for deriving the lottery result of the big hit is higher than the normal state. The open extension state is also referred to as an "electric chew support state" in that the open extension state is increased and the game state is advantageous to the player as compared with the state in which the open extension function is not activated (non-operated).

By operating one or a plurality of types of each of the above functions, it is possible to bring about a change in the internal gaming state (internal gaming state) of the gaming machine. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the gaming state in which the special symbol probability change function, the special symbol time saving function, the normal symbol probability change function, the normal symbol time reduction function, and the open extension function are activated is referred to as a "probability change state", and among these functions, The game state in which the special symbol probability change function is removed is referred to as a "time saving state", and at least the game state in which the special symbol probability change function is activated and the open extension function is not activated (in this embodiment, only the special symbol probability change function is activated). ) Is referred to as a "latent state", and a state in which all functions are not operating (non-operating) is referred to as a "normal state". Therefore, paying attention to the jackpot lottery probability in these gaming states, when the gaming state is the "time saving state" or the "normal state", the jackpot lottery probability becomes the "low probability state (normal probability)" and the gaming state becomes. In the case of "latent state" or "probability change state", the jackpot lottery probability is "high probability state". In addition, during the big hit related to the operation of the condition device, a hit game occurs in which the big winning opening is opened and closed, but all the functions are not activated for each of the above functions, and basically, under the same game state as the above normal state. Placed in.

Regarding each of the above game states, when focusing on the presence or absence of the electric chew support state, if the game state is "normal state" or "latent state", there is no "electric chew support state" (hereinafter, "no electric support state"). (Referred to as)', and when the gaming state is a "time saving state" or a "probability change state", it becomes a "electric chew support state (hereinafter referred to as" electric support state ")". In the case of the present embodiment, in the probabilistic state with the electric chew support state and the time saving state, the normal symbol probabilistic change function, the normal symbol time saving function, and the opening extension function are operated at the same time, so that the normal electric opening game can be easily generated. It is considered to be a gaming state in which the operating rate of the movable wing piece 47 is significantly improved.

Regarding the operating status of each of the above functions (special symbol probability change function, special symbol time saving function, normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time reduction function, and open extension function) that determine the game state, these functions are added to the main control unit 20 side. The operation (5AH) / non-operation (00H) is managed by the ON / OFF state of the corresponding flag. Further, what kind of gaming state the current gaming state is is managed by using an identifier of "gaming status number YJ". For example, when the game state number YJ is "00H", it is in the "normal state", when it is "01H", it is in the "time saving state", when it is "02H", it is in the "latent state", and when it is "03H", it is in the "probability changing state". 'Specify. The gaming state focusing on the operating status of each function is also referred to as an "internal gaming state".

<4. About hits>
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the “hit” of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

(4-1. About hit type and hit game)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, a plurality of types of hit types such as "big hit 1 to 11" and small hit 1 are provided as the types of hits for the big hit lottery target. Of these hits, the big hits 1 to 11 are hits belonging to the big hit type that triggers the operation of the conditional device, and the small hit 1 is a hit that belongs to the small hit type that does not trigger the operation of the conditional device. Here, the "conditional appliance" is a device whose operation is a condition necessary for the operation of the accessory continuous actuating device (device for continuously operating the special electric accessory) for performing a round game, and is a specific special. A combination of symbols is displayed, or a game ball that operates when it passes through a specific area in the big winning opening (excluding those that won a prize in the big winning opening while the accessory continuous actuating device is operating).

Therefore, when the small hit is won, the accessory continuous actuating device does not operate, so that the round game such as the big hit is not executed. However, the opening / closing operation of the big winning opening is controlled in the same or very similar or completely different operation mode as the round game by the big hit, in other words, the "pseudo round game" is executed. Similar to the big hit, such a small hit is just a "loss" in that it is a winning type that triggers a transition (occurrence) to a hit game (special game state) accompanied by an opening / closing operation of the big winning opening. Is different in nature. Although the small hit 1 is a hit belonging to the'small hit'type, for convenience of explanation, it will be treated in the same row as one of the big hit types without distinguishing it from the above big hit unless it is particularly necessary.

The notations of "16R", "8R", "4R", and "2R" in the jackpots 1 to 11 in the "contents of hit" column of FIG. 4 indicate the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds) related to the jackpot, respectively. .. In addition, the notation of "long opening" in the same column is "long opening" where the maximum opening time of the big winning opening in one round game can reach the maximum number of winnings (10). It indicates that it is a big hit set to "opening time (for example, 29.8 seconds)", and "short opening" means "short opening time" (for example, short opening time) in which the maximum opening time of the big winning opening is shorter than "long opening". 1.8 seconds) ”indicates that it is a big hit. The opening pattern of the large winning opening can be opened according to either one or a plurality of types of opening patterns (the same applies to small hits).

In addition, the notations of "probability change", "time saving", and "latent probability" are the probabilistic big hit that triggers the transition to the probabilistic state, the time saving jackpot that triggers the transition to the probabilistic state, and the latent probability that triggers the transition to the latent state, respectively. Shows a big hit. For example, if the jackpot is 1 "12R long open probability variation jackpot", it is a jackpot that triggers the probability variation transition, the maximum number of rounds is 12R, and the jackpot of each round game is opened and closed in a long opening pattern. Show that. The profit status during the big hit game becomes higher as the maximum number of rounds is relatively larger, and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening is higher in the long opening than in the short opening.

(4-2. About the transition destination game state after the hit game)
Further, FIG. 4 shows the transition destination of the game state after the end of the big hit game according to the game state at the time of winning when each big hit is won. With reference to FIG. 4, when the jackpots 1, 3, 5, 8, and 10 are won, "probability change state (high probability, with electric support)" regardless of the game state at the time of winning. Will be transferred to. That is, the jackpots 1, 3, 5, 8, and 10 are all jackpots that trigger the transition to a probabilistic state (high probability, with electric support). In addition, if the jackpots 2, 4 and 9 are won, the process shifts to "time reduction A (time reduction number 100 times)", and if the jackpots 6 and 11 are won, the time reduction B (time reduction number 50 times) is transferred. It is supposed to be done. That is, the jackpots 2, 4, 6, 9, and 11 are all jackpots that trigger the transition to a time-saving state (low probability, with electric support). In addition, when the jackpot 7 is won, if the game state at the time of winning is the normal state, it is shifted to the "latent state (high probability / no electric support)", and if it is the latent / shortened state or the probable change state. It is designed to shift to the "probability change state".

Regarding the "latent state", "probability change state", and "time saving state" according to the present embodiment, the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game (number of changes of the special symbol) is continued until the predetermined number of times is completed. When the special symbol variation display game ends without winning the big hit (excluding the small hit that does not trigger the transition of the internal gaming state) within the specified number of times, the game is shifted to the normal state (normal gaming state) from the next game. It has become so. In the case of the present embodiment, the total number of executions of the special symbol variation display games 1 and 2 (total number of fluctuations of the special symbols 1 and 2) is counted as the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game.

With respect to the predetermined predetermined number of times, 65536 times is set as the predetermined predetermined number of times (hereinafter referred to as "ST number of times") for the latent state or the probable change state (so-called "ST type"). This number of STs will almost certainly continue to be in a high probability state until the next big hit is won due to the relationship with the big hit winning probability (for example, the big hit probability during probability change, setting 1 to 6 = 1/41 to 1/32). It is the number of times that can be made. Of course, in order to set the continuation rate of the high probability state to an appropriate continuous villa rate (for example, the continuation rate of about 65%), the number of STs may be set to an appropriate value (for example, the number of STs = about 33 times). However, the high probability state may be continued 100% until the next big hit is won (for example, the number of STs may be infinite or the number of STs itself may not be provided) (general probability variation type).

Further, the conditions for transitioning to the latent state or the probable change state may be defined as follows. A specific area is provided in the big winning opening 50, and when a specific big hit (for example, 1 big hit and 3 big hits) is won, the game ball can pass through the specific area (in other big hits, the specific area of the specific area). Make passage difficult or impossible). Then, only when the game ball passes through this specific area (so-called "V winning"), the special symbol probability change function is activated to shift to the probability change state or the latent state depending on the jackpot type, so-called "V probability change type". It may be a model of ". Further, it may be a so-called "fall lottery type" model in which a transition lottery (fall lottery) from high probability to low probability is performed in each game during the probability change state.

Further, regarding the time saving state, the time saving number of times is set to 100 times in the case of the time saving A, and the time saving number of times is set to 50 times in the case of the time saving B. In the present embodiment, an example in which a different number of time reductions is set according to the jackpot type is shown, but the same number of time reductions (for example, 70 times) may be set regardless of the jackpot type.

(When you win a small hit)
Next, the game state after the small hit game will be described. When a small hit is won, the gaming state (internal gaming state) at the time of winning the small hit is continued as it is. That is, the transition control of the internal gaming state due to the small hit winning is not performed. Therefore, the internal gaming state at the time of winning the small hit and the internal gaming state after the small hit game are both the same internal gaming state. For example, if the small hit 1 is won during the normal state, the normal state is continued during and after the hit game. In this respect, the property is different from the above-mentioned "big hit" in which the transition control of the internal gaming state is performed. Further, the closing condition of the large winning opening 50 during the small hit game is the same as at the time of the big hit, until the opening time of the large winning opening elapses for a predetermined time or until the maximum number of winnings is reached. Utilizing such a transition mode, in the present embodiment, when a small hit 1 or a big hit 7 (2R short open latency) is won in a normal state, the following game motion control is performed. The hit game by the small hit 1 (small hit game) is controlled so as to have substantially the same operation mode as the hit game by the big hit 7 (2R short open latency) (pseudo 2R big hit game is executed). : Pseudo 2R short opening), and the effects during hitting also appear to be substantially the same effect, and after these hit games, the mode is changed to the same effect mode (CZ effect mode described later). As a result, even if the small hit 1 is won, it is possible to pretend that the big hit 7 is won (the winning type is concealed). As a result, even if the small hit 1 is won, the player can be given a feeling of expectation of entering a high-probability state that "may have shifted to the latent state".

In the present embodiment, in both the cases where "small hit 1" and "big hit 7" are won in the normal state, the probability state is high for a predetermined game period (for example, until the number of changes of the special symbol is 4 times). As a production mode that fuels the expectation of rushing into, the same chance production mode (CZ production mode) is transferred. This CZ effect mode works as an effect mode that fuels the expectation of a high probability state. The substance of the CZ effect mode that is transferred when the small hit 1 is won is the "CZ (normal)" whose game state is "normal state", and the CZ effect mode that is transferred when the big hit 7 is won. The substance of is "CZ (latent probability)" whose gaming state is "latent probability state".

<5. About production>
(5-1. Production mode)
Next, the effect mode (effect state) will be described. The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of effect modes for producing effects related to the gaming state, and is configured to be able to control the transition between each effect mode in response to the transition of the gaming state. There is. The above-mentioned effect modes include "normal effect mode" related to "normal state", "CZ effect mode" related to "CZ", "latent effect mode" related to "latent state", and "probability change state". There are a plurality of types of production modes according to each game state, such as a "probability variation effect mode", a "time reduction effect mode" related to the "time reduction state", and a "hit game production mode" related to the "hit game state". In the "normal C production mode" corresponding to the above "CZ", the current jackpot lottery probability state (internal game state) is kept secret for the production, and the player is expected to have a high probability state. It plays a role as a "secret production mode". Further, as for the time saving effect mode, a time saving effect mode common to the time saving A and the time saving B may be provided, or different production modes may be provided.

The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) has a function unit (effect state transition control means) for transition control between a plurality of types of effect modes. Among the effect control commands sent from the main control unit 20 (CPU201), the effect control unit 24 specifies a command including information on the game state, specifically, the current game state is specified, or the game state is changed. Based on the information contained in a specific effect control command, such as specifying, control the transition from one effect mode to another effect mode while maintaining consistency with the game state on the main control unit 20 side. Manage the production mode related to the game state. The above-mentioned specific effect control commands include a fluctuation pattern specification command, a game state specification command, a customer waiting command, a spec specification command, and a command transmitted during a hit (a big hit start command and a big hit end command described later). ..

In addition, in each effect mode, the background is displayed as the background of the variable display screen of the decorative pattern so that the player can grasp what kind of game state the player is staying in in the effect mode (hereinafter, "background"). (Also called "directing"), for example, a background production reminiscent of the season'spring'under the "normal production mode" (for example, a background production that displays a background image of a cherry tree), and a season'summer'under the "time saving production mode". (For example, a background effect that displays a background image of the sea), and a background effect that reminds us of the season'autumn'under the "probability effect mode" (for example, a background effect that displays a background image of an autumnal tree). Under the "latent effect mode", the background display is switched to the background display related to the game state, such as the background effect reminiscent of the season'winter'(for example, the background effect that displays the background image of the snowy mountains).

Even under the same effect mode, different background effects can be displayed. For example, a plurality of types of normal effect modes such as a normal A effect mode as a background image A, a normal B effect mode as a background image B, and a normal C effect mode as a background image C are provided in the normal effect mode, and these normal effect modes are provided. It is possible to make an effect corresponding to the effect mode appear. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of production modes related to the same gaming state are provided, and the "morning one background change notice" described later is realized.

(5-2. Notice production)
Next, the advance notice production will be described. The effect control unit 24 is the content of the effect control command from the main control unit 20, specifically, the variation pattern information included in at least the variation pattern designation command (in the present embodiment, the “variation pattern designation command” and / or “. Based on the information included in the "decorative symbol designation command"), various "notice effects" related to the jackpot lottery result can be controlled to appear (notice effect control means). Such notice production includes the degree of expectation of winning or not winning the winning type (well-known "winning expectation degree") and / or a predetermined event (for example, winning, winning a specific hit, or specifying a specific notice effect). It includes things that can suggest (notice) the occurrence of), and most of them work as a "fanning effect" to fuel the player's expectation of winning. Typical notice productions include "reach production (production mode related to reach fluctuation pattern)", "pseudo-continuous production", "player participation type production", etc., which accompany these productions. There are various warning effects that occur in a complex (simultaneous, overlapping) or single manner. Hereinafter, these production modes will be described.

(5-2-1. Reach production)
The “reach effect” refers to an effect mode accompanied by a reach state, and specifically, an effect mode in which a game result can be derived and displayed via the reach state. This "reach state" is a display mode in which some of the decorative symbols derived and displayed in the middle of the decorative symbol variation display game show winning in the stage before the result of the decorative symbol variation display game is derived. It refers to the so-called "tenpai state (reach symbol)", which is a display mode in which a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been derived and displayed is performed in a state in which a part is configured. As a typical example of the reach state, for example, on a predetermined hit effective line, a part of the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed as a part of the hit symbol (for example, a set of symbols such as "777") (for example,). The left symbol and the right symbol show a tenpai state such as displaying "7"), and other decorative symbols (here, the middle symbol that does not form a tenpai state) continue to stop for a predetermined time. The possibility of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed, while swinging, scaling, or deforming. Therefore, even if the reach state is formed, the result of the decorative symbol variation display game does not necessarily become a "big hit", and the finally derived result is a winning symbol (for example, the winning symbol "777"). If not, the result of this game will be "missing".

The reach state is not limited to the one accompanied by the left and right tenpai display using the left symbol and the right symbol (“7 ↓ 7”) as in the above case. For example, a display state such as "left middle tenpai" whose left middle right decorative pattern is "77 ↓" or "middle right tenpai" whose "↓ 77" decorative pattern can be treated as a reach state. In addition, when the hit symbols are not aligned, for example, in the case of a loose eye such as "357", the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are "3 ↓ 7" (left and right tenpai) and "35 ↓" (left middle tenpai). ), The variable display state of "↓ 57" (middle right tenpai) can be treated as a tenpai state. The reach effect is accompanied by such an indication of the reach state, and if the reach effect appears (appears), the winning expectation is relatively higher than the normal fluctuation. In the case of the present embodiment, when the game result is a hit, some kind of reach effect is displayed in this symbol variation display game. In addition, there is also a notice effect mode (variable display mode) such as "sudden alignment" in which a decorative symbol that does not accompany a reach state suddenly hits and is stopped and displayed, but such a sudden alignment is also described in the present specification. , Treated as one aspect of reach production.

The reach effect includes a plurality of types of reach effect associated with the winning expectation. For example, there are cases where the winning expectation is relatively higher than when N reach (normal reach) appears. This kind of reach production is called'SP reach (super reach)'. Most of this "SP reach" has a relatively longer production time (variable time) than the N reach in order to fuel the player's expectation of winning. The N reach of the present embodiment includes a plurality of types of N reach such as "N reach 1 and 2", and the SP reach includes a plurality of types of SP reach such as "weak SP reach, medium SP reach, and strong SP reach". Is included. Regarding the relationship of winning expectations between the same species, there is a relationship of "N reach 1 <N reach 2" and "weak SP reach <medium SP reach <strong SP reach". Reach 1 <N reach 2 <weak SP reach <medium SP reach <strong SP reach ". The actual jackpot winning expectation level changes depending on whether or not other notice effects appear. Therefore, for example, even when a weak SP reach appears, if a notice effect with a high expectation of winning is involved, the expectation of winning can be equal to or higher than that of the medium SP reach. Further, the SP reach includes an advanced SP reach (SPSP reach) that develops from one SP reach to another SP reach. This "SPSP reach" has the highest expectation among SP reach and belongs to the strong SP reach type.

In the present embodiment, when the game result is a hit, in principle, the above reach effect is passed through in the process of deriving and displaying the winning symbol. Therefore, for the player, whether or not the reach effect is generated is a clue to know the possibility of winning. Therefore, in the stage before the occurrence of the reach effect, various advance notice effects are provided to give notice (suggestion) of the possibility (including confirmation of occurrence) of the reach effect. However, the notice effect is not necessarily the one that foretells the possibility of the reach effect, but also the one that suggests the possibility of the occurrence of other advance notice effects (including the setting suggestion effect described later) other than the reach effect, and the reach effect. Some of them occur in a complex manner. In such a notice effect, one or a plurality of types of notice effects may occur in combination during one symbol variation display game (during one change) in relation to the jackpot lottery result, and the notice effects are combined. When it occurs, the expected degree of winning is shown more clearly. For example, if a plurality of types of advance notice effects with a high expectation of winning occur (including cases where they occur in duplicate (simultaneously) or at different timings), the expectation of winning will be higher. The fun of the game can be improved by the advance notice effect during the game, which is woven by such advance notice effect and reach effect.

(5-2-2. Pseudo-ream production (pseudo-ream))
The "pseudo-ream" refers to an effect mode accompanied by a pseudo continuous fluctuation display state (so-called "pseudo-variation") of a decorative pattern. This "pseudo-variation" is a display operation in which a part or all of the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol variation display game, and the decorative symbol re-variation display operation is executed from the temporary stop state. A variable display mode that is repeated once or multiple times. That is, the pseudo-ren is an effect mode in which the temporary stop state of the decorative symbol is sandwiched one or more times so that the variable display operation of the decorative symbol is executed a plurality of times in one symbol variation display game. Is. In this temporary stop state, for example, the decorative symbol is not completely stopped, but the decorative symbol is displayed vertically (or left and right) in small steps as a typical example. In this respect, it is different from the "look-ahead notice effect" described later, which can be developed over a plurality of symbol variation display games. The rate of occurrence of such "pseudo-ren" is basically set so that the higher the number of pseudo-variations, the higher the expectation of winning. For example, the higher the number of pseudo-variations, the higher the expectation of winning. Expectations for the occurrence of high-level notice effects (for example, SP reach) are increasing.

Therefore, the above-mentioned "pseudo-ream" is mainly generated in the stage before the reach state is formed (pre-stage of the reach effect) in the case of the effect scenario including the reach effect, and for example, the reach effect may occur. As a notice to that effect or the possibility that a specific reach type may occur, one or more pseudo fluctuations are performed, and after this pseudo fluctuation is completed, the final is made via the reach state (reach effect). The game result will be derived and displayed.

Further, in the case of an effect scenario that does not include the reach effect (effect mode based on the normal variation pattern with pseudo-ream), after the pseudo variation is completed, the normal variation is executed without going through the reach state (reach effect). The final game result will be derived and displayed. Here, the fluctuation display operation executed after the pseudo fluctuation is completed is also referred to as "main fluctuation", and in the case of not passing through the reach state described above, the normal fluctuation is executed by this fluctuation, and the final game is played. The result will be derived and displayed. On the other hand, in the case of passing through the reach state, the reach effect is executed by this change, and the final game result is derived and displayed.

In the present embodiment, when it is expressed as "pseudo N times (N = 2, 3, 4)", it means a series of fluctuation display operation times including the pseudo series and the main fluctuation. For example, when expressing "pseudo-repeated 2 times + SP reach", "pseudo-variation 1 time + SP reach of this fluctuation" (the number of fluctuation display operations is 2 times), that is, SP reach is executed after 1 pseudo-variation. Means. In the case of an advanced reach effect such as SPSP reach, a pseudo-ream may occur before the reach state related to the SP reach of the final development destination is formed. That is, a pseudo-variation may be performed during or after the first SP reach. In any case, the maximum number of pseudo-reams is "3 times" in this embodiment (see the "pseudo-ream" column in FIG. 43).

(5-2-3. Player participation type production)
The "player participation type effect" is an effect mode belonging to the so-called "button notice effect", and when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means (effect button 13 and / or direction key 75), the operation content thereof. Based on the above, it is a notice production mode in which the content of the production can be changed. In the player participation type effect, during the predetermined button validity period, an "operation instruction effect" for instructing the operation means to perform a predetermined operation appears, and the player operates the operation means during the button validity period. When the operation is performed, the effect being displayed changes to another effect (effect during operation) based on the operation content, and the winning expectation can be announced according to the effect mode (effect content) before and after the operation. .. For example, depending on the button operation, a specific object display or character display changes, a special sound effect or light effect is generated, or a story-like effect scenario progresses (so-called conversation content in a conversation effect). Is progressing, etc.) is a typical example.

(5-2-4. Background change notice production (background change notice production))
"Background change notice effect" means that one background image is changed (shifted) to another background image based on a predetermined transition condition, and the winning expectation is announced according to the background image type after the change (the background change notice effect). It is a notice production mode such as (suggestion). However, this background change notice refers to an effect mode in which the background display changes as a notice effect, unlike the background effect related to the above-mentioned effect mode. In the background change notice effect, for example, a part of the background image currently being displayed or the entire background image is changed, and the background image after the change suggests the degree of expectation of winning. Specifically, when the current production mode is the "normal production mode", the cherry tree, which is a part of the background image (specific object display), has rape blossoms (high expectation) or rape blossoms (high expectation) depending on the winning expectation. It may change to an image of Gamkouei (low expectation), or change from a normal daytime background image to a night background image for advance notice (high expectation). In the present embodiment, with the start of the symbol variation display game, a cut-in image expressing a flower (corolla) is generated (a specific sound effect and / or a light effect may be accompanied). As a result, the background display changes. Further, the background change notice effect is not limited to the one that suggests the degree of expectation of winning, and may appear as one aspect of the setting suggestion effect described later (for example, the setting suggestion is given according to the background effect type).

(5-2-5. Pre-reading notice production)
The "look-ahead notice effect" is mainly for the hold display mode and time for the operation hold ball (undigested operation hold ball) that has not been used for the execution of the symbol change display game (special symbol change display operation). This is an effect mode in which the winning expectation degree regarding the operation-holding ball can be notified in advance by using the effect in the symbol variation display game that is executed first in series.

An outline of the screen display of the liquid crystal display device according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 5, including the pre-reading notice effect. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram provided for explaining the screen display of the liquid crystal display device 36 according to the present embodiment.

In a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 (in the figure, below the display area of the decorative symbol), a hold display area 76 for displaying the number of special pattern 1 operation hold balls and the number of special figure 2 operation hold balls are displayed. A hold display area 77 to be displayed is provided, and the presence or absence of the operation hold ball is indicated by a lighting state (with operation hold ball: "○ (white circle)" in the figure) or an extinguished state (without operation hold ball:). Information on the current number of pending balls is notified by the dashed circle in the figure).

The display regarding the presence or absence of the operation hold ball (hereinafter referred to as "hold display") is sequentially displayed in the order of occurrence (winning order), and in each of the hold display areas 76 and 77, the leftmost operation hold ball is displayed. It is displayed as the earliest (that is, the oldest) activated reserved ball on the time axis among all the activated reserved balls in the reserved display. In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, hold display units a1 to d1 (icon images) composed of hold icons (icon images) provided in a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 in the same number (4 pieces) as the maximum number of hold storages (4). (Corresponding to the special symbol 1 side) and a2 to d2 (corresponding to the special symbol 2 side) are provided. Further, on the left side of the hold display areas 76 and 77, a changing display area 78 for showing the operation hold ball actually used in the special symbol change display game is provided. In the case of this embodiment, the changing display area 78 is configured so that an image in which the icon of the game in progress hold K currently used for the game is placed appears on the icon of the seat J. That is, when the variable display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is started, the oldest hold a1 or a2 icon (icon image) displayed in the hold display areas 76 and 77 is the hold K during game execution. As an icon, the icon is moved onto the icon of the seat J in the changing display area 78, and the state is maintained for a predetermined display time.

When an operation hold ball is generated, as an effect control command, the look-ahead determination information related to the jackpot lottery result and the number of operation hold balls at the time of the look-ahead judgment (the number of existing operation hold balls including the operation hold ball generated this time) are input. A identifiable "hold addition command" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (see step S323 in FIG. 20 described later).

Specifically, the pre-reading determination information includes a jackpot lottery result (big hit lottery result at the start of fluctuation) executed when the operation holding ball is provided to the symbol variation display game in the main control unit 20, and fluctuations. It refers to game information related to the look-ahead fluctuation pattern obtained when the look-ahead determination is made for the fluctuation pattern at the start. Therefore, this pre-reading determination information includes at least the pre-reading determination result (pre-reading winning result) information of the winning lottery result at the start of the fluctuation, and in addition, the pre-reading determination result (pre-reading symbol result) information of the symbol lottery result and the variation. The look-ahead determination result (look-ahead fluctuation pattern) information regarding the fluctuation pattern at the start can be included. What kind of information is included in the hold addition command to be sent to the effect control unit 24 can be appropriately determined depending on what kind of notice content is to be notified. For example, the "look-ahead fluctuation pattern" obtained by the look-ahead determination when the operation holding ball is generated does not necessarily have to be the "variation pattern at the start of fluctuation" obtained when the operation holding ball is subjected to the fluctuation display operation. .. For example, in the case of a fluctuation pattern in which "N reach 1" is specified at the start of fluctuation, the content specified by the look-ahead fluctuation pattern is not the reach type itself of "N reach 1", but the essence of "N reach". Species (N reach 1 or N reach 2) ”may be specified.

When the effect control unit 24 receives the hold addition command, the effect control process related to the "look-ahead notice effect" is performed as a part of the display control process related to the hold display based on the look-ahead determination information included therein. Specifically, based on the information included in the hold addition command, a look-ahead notice lottery is performed to draw a lottery as to whether or not the look-ahead notice effect can be executed. A look-ahead notice production according to the degree of expectation of winning will appear. The winning probability of the pre-reading notice lottery is higher for the "big hit" than for the "missing", and for the reach type with a relatively high expectation of winning. Therefore, the degree of expectation of winning the winning type is shown depending on whether or not the pre-reading notice effect occurs.

In this embodiment, when the look-ahead notice lottery is won, among the hold icons of the hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2, the hold icon targeted for the look-ahead notice is, for example, a normal hold display (normally). Pre-reading notice of "hold display change system" that changes from white of hold display mode) to blue, green, red, D pattern, rainbow-colored special hold color or color hold display (special hold display mode) Directing (pending change notice) will be performed. FIG. 5 shows an example in which the hatched holding ball of the holding display unit b1 is changed to the special holding display. Here, the display of the blue, green, red, D pattern, and rainbow color of the hold icon means that the winning expectation is high in the order of this color, and in particular, the display of the rainbow-colored hold icon is confirmed as a big hit. ) It is a premium hold icon (notice of reservation) to be displayed. Therefore, this hold display unit functions as a hold display means for displaying the number of operation hold, but when executing the look-ahead notice effect, the hold display unit of the corresponding one of the hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2. The hold display mode is changed to a predetermined look-ahead notice display mode (special hold display mode), thereby serving as a look-ahead notice control means for controlling the appearance of the look-ahead notice effect.

The existing operation hold balls are sequentially digested when the symbol variation display game is executed. At this time, in order to express that one operation-reserved ball has been consumed, the display position of the hold display unit corresponding to the existing operation-reserved ball is moved forward (shifted to the left side in sequence), and the number of displayed objects is reduced. Although control (shift display) is performed, the above-mentioned special hold display continues to be displayed continuously while changing the display position of the hold display during this period. Further, when the hold K during game execution is placed on the seat J, basically the same display mode as the hold display mode in the hold display areas 76 and 77 is maintained, and the operation related to the current symbol variation display game is maintained. The pre-reading notice display mode for the reserved ball is notified to the player even during the game.

Further, in the lower right corner of the liquid crystal screen shown in FIG. 5, as a display area for a sub-effect (sub-effect) different from the main effect such as a decorative pattern and a notice effect, a variable display operation of a special symbol or a normal symbol is related. A sub-display area 79 is provided and is indicated by six small squares. In the figure, the sub-display area 79 is exaggerated for convenience of explanation.

(6. Directing means)
Various effects in the gaming machine 1 are manifested by the effect means arranged in the gaming machine. Such a directing means may be any stimulus transmitting means capable of exerting a directing effect by appealing to human perception such as visual sense, auditory sense, and tactile sense, and may be a light generating means (light directing means) such as a decorative lamp 45 or an LED device. ), A sound generator (sound effect means) such as a speaker 46, an effect display device (display means) such as a liquid crystal display device 36, a pressurizing device that transmits contact pressure to the operator's body, and a wind pressure applied to the player's body. A typical example is a wind pressure device or a movable body accessory that exerts a visual effect by its operation. Here, the effect display device is a display device that appeals to the visual sense like the image display device (image display means), but is different from the image display device in that it includes a display device that does not depend on an image (for example, a 7-segment display). When referred to as an image display device, it mainly refers to a type that displays an effect (image display effect) by displaying an image, and a device that displays an effect other than an image, such as a 7-segment display, is the concept of the above-mentioned effect display device. Included in.

<Processing on the main control unit side: FIGS. 6A to 29>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 6A to 29, the game operation processing on the main control unit 20 side of the present embodiment will be described. The processing on the main control unit 20 side is an infinite loop-shaped main processing (main control side main processing: FIGS. 6A and 6B) and a timer interrupt processing activated by a scheduled interrupt from the CTC (main control side timer interrupt). Processing: Consists of including FIG. 16).

<6. Main control side main processing: FIG. 6A and FIG. 6B>
The main process on the main control unit 20 side (main process on the main control side) will be described with reference to FIGS. 6A and 6B.

6A and 6B are flowcharts showing the details of the main processing on the main control side. In the following, when the main control side main process is described, the process closely related to the present invention will be described with reference to the source code shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B (which may also be referred to as a “program” in some cases). However, FIGS. 26A and 26B exemplify a part of the source code of the main processing on the main control side described along the storage order in the memory, and the arrow on the right side of the description column of the source code. Is executed according to the combination of the input state (ON / OFF state) of the setting key switch 94, the door open sensor 61, and the RAM clear switch 98 (setting key switch signal, door open signal, RAM clear switch signal). About the processing route ("setting change processing route", "RAM clear processing route", "setting confirmation processing route", "backup recovery processing route", "repower on wait processing (RAM error processing) route" described later). The processing contents executed in the processing route and the execution order of the processing are shown corresponding to the source code. In each processing route, the processing of steps S011 to S014 described later is executed in common, and then, depending on the combination of the ON / OFF state of the setting key switch 94, the door opening sensor 61, and the RAM clear switch 98. , Processing is branched (conditional branching).

When the main control side starts the main process, the watchdog timer (WDT) function is activated and the CPU is activated when a system reset occurs when recovering from a power failure or power failure, or when the control program goes out of control. There are cases where it is forcibly reset (WDT reset). In any case, when the main control side main process is started, the main control unit 20 (CPU201) first executes the initial setting process necessary for starting the game operation as a part of the power-on process (step S011). ).

(7. Initial setting process: Fig. 7)
First, the initial setting process of step S011 will be described with reference to the columns (SPa1 to SPA26) of the initial setting process of FIGS. 7 and 26A. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the details of the initial setting process.

In FIG. 7, when a system reset or a WDT reset occurs, the CPU 201 first sets itself to the interrupt disabled state as an initial setting at startup (steps S051 and Spa1).

Next, the stack pointer SP is set (step S052). Here, 00FFH is set (set) in the stack pointer SP (SPa2). As a result, the address 00FEH or lower in the RAM 203 is set as the stack area for the in-region program, and the address 01FEH or lower is set as the stack area for the out-of-region program (see FIG. 24).

Next, the protected and prohibited areas of the RAM are invalidated in preparation for the use of the stack in the first power supply abnormality check process (_ VDDCHK) described later (step S053, Spa3). RAM protection is a function to prevent rewriting of RAM due to malfunction or erroneous operation. The operation of RAM protection is as follows. RAM protection is effective (RAM protect state) after a system reset or WDT reset occurs when the power is restored. When RAM protection is enabled, data can be read from the RAM, but data cannot be written to the RAM. Therefore, when writing data to RAM, it is necessary to disable RAM protection. In the present embodiment, the enable / disable of the RAM protect and the RAM access prohibited area is controlled according to the value of the RAM protect register (RAMPT). When RAMPT = 00H, "RAM access prohibited area is invalid, RAM protect is invalid", when RAMPT = 01H, "RAM access prohibited area is invalid, RAM protect is valid", and when RAMPT = 80H, "RAM access prohibited area is valid, RAM". When "protection is invalid" and RAMPT is 81H, it is controlled to "RAM access prohibited area valid, RAM protection valid".

Next, various setting processes at the time of turning on the power are executed (step S054). Here, in consideration of the possibility that the power is turned off / on during the setting change (for example, the setting change management process in step S023 described later), first, the exclusive OR (XOR) between the WA register pairs is taken into consideration. ) Is obtained (WA = 0000H) (SPa4), and the information for outputting the security signal (illegal detection signal for external output) of the external terminal board 21 for the frame by utilizing the fact that the value of the WA register pair is zero. It is used to clear the external terminal port 2 (P_GAIBU2) corresponding to the terminal to zero, and to set ON / OFF of the dynamic lighting data and the launch control signal (launch permission signal ES by the payout control board 28) for the setting display 97. The LED common port (P_LEDCMN) and the LED common buffer (W_LEDCMN) are each cleared to zero (SPa5 to Spa7). As a result, the output port for the security signal is temporarily cleared, and the setting display 97 is set to the off state. In addition, the launch control signal is set to the OFF state to prevent an inadvertent launch control signal from being output.

Next, the first power supply abnormality check process (_ mightCHK) is executed (step S055). Here, the first power supply abnormality check process (_ mightCHK) of the subroutine is called and executed by the CALLV instruction (SPa8). This'CALLV'instruction is a kind of CALL instruction, but unlike a normal CALL instruction, it is an instruction to execute a subroutine defined in advance in the vector table (CALLV instruction vector table) in the CALL instruction vector area of ROM 202. It has become. In detail, in the normal CALL instruction (CALLmn), it is an instruction to execute a subroutine starting from the address (mn address) specified by the upper address and the lower address, whereas in the CALLV instruction, it is a part of the address. Since the upper address that composes is specified in the vector table as a specific value, the address of the subroutine can be specified by specifying only the lower address, and the subroutine can be called with a smaller amount of data than the CALL instruction. It is a special CALL instruction that can be executed (1 byte for a CALLV instruction and 3 bytes for a normal CALL instruction). Therefore, the CALLV instruction is suitable for executing a frequently used subroutine.

(8. First power supply abnormality check process: Fig. 8)
The first power supply abnormality check process (_ mightCHK) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the details of the first power supply abnormality check process.

In this first power supply abnormality check process, the CPU 201 first clears the WDT (step S701), and then acquires the input information of the power supply abnormality signal indicating a power failure from the external signal input register (PINSTS) (step S702). .. As shown in the figure, the 0th bit (b0 to b7) of the external signal input register (PINSTS) has the 0th bit (b0) ON / ON of the upper start port sensor signal (upper start port sensor 34a). The OFF state, the first bit (b1) is the ON / OFF state of the lower start port sensor signal (lower start port sensor 35a), and the second bit (b2) is the ON / OFF state of the power supply abnormality signal (voltage drop signal). The third bit (b3) to the seventh bit (b7) are unused.

When the power supply abnormality signal acquired in step S702 is in the ON state (b2 = 1) (step S703: YES), the process proceeds to the first process (step S011) of the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6A, and when the power is turned on. Similarly, the processes after step S011 are sequentially executed. However, when the acquired power supply abnormality signal is not in the ON state (step S703: NO), it is assumed that the operation is normal, the first power supply abnormality check process is exited, and the internal function register initial setting process (step S056) of FIG. 7 is performed. Transition.

Returning to FIG. 7 again, if the power supply abnormality signal is not in the ON state, the internal function register initial setting process is executed (step S056, Spa9 to Spa13). Here, the initial setting process regarding the internal function register value of the CPU including each part of the microcomputer is performed. In D_REGINI1 shown in FIG. 26A, initial values relating to various internal function register values inside the CPU are defined. By Spa9 to Spa13, for example, in addition to the RAM protect register, CTC, WDT, serial port for transmission / reception, interrupt mode ( (Set to interrupt mode 2), interrupt priority, internal hard random numbers, internal soft random numbers, and other internal function registers are set to initial values.

Next, as a process of managing the start-up waiting time of the sub control board (effect control unit 24), the processes of steps S057 to S062 are executed. Specifically, first, as the above-mentioned start waiting time setting process, the loop count (for example, 240) is set in the B register (step S057, SPA14), and the start wait count value (for example, 13880) is set in the WA register pair. Is set (step S058, Spa15).

Then, as the subtraction process of the start waiting time, while decrementing the value of the WA register pair (step S059, Spa16), wait until the value of the WA register pair becomes zero (step S060: NO, Spa17). Then, when the value of the register becomes zero (step S060: YES, Spa17), the first power supply abnormality check process of FIG. 8 is executed (step S061, Spa18). The processing of steps S059 to S062 is repeated until the number of loops becomes zero (step S063: NO, Spa19). As a result, the CPU 201 waits for the execution of subsequent processing until the sub-control board starts normally. The startup waiting time secured by the series of processes in steps S059 to S063 is set to about 2000 ms in consideration of the number of instruction cycles of SPA10 to Spa15, the count value for starting, the number of loops, and the CPU operating frequency. Will be done.

Therefore, in the case of the present embodiment, the timer interrupt process on the main control side is not activated at this stage (the timer interrupt process is activated in step S036 described later). Therefore, since the timer value cannot be counted by the timer interrupt process, a device is devised to set the start waiting time using the number of instruction cycles, the count value for starting, the number of loops, the CPU operating frequency, and the like.

If the start waiting time has elapsed (step S063: YES (B = 0)), the standby screen display command data (BA01H) is acquired (step S064, Spa20), and the acquired command data is shown in FIG. It is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process (step S070) (step S065, Spa21). The command transmission process in step S065 is a subroutine (_CMDOUT) that is called and executed by a CALLV instruction as shown in FIG. 9 as shown in Spa21 of FIG. 26A, and is, for example, a predetermined register pair (for example, a predetermined register pair). It is a process of transmitting the effect control command data of 2 bytes length set in the DE register) to the effect control unit 24 side (SPa20 to Spa21, step S070). Note that this command transmission process (_CMDOUT) is a subroutine commonly used in various processes that require transmission of command data. In the present embodiment, when it is necessary to transmit the effect command, the command transmission process (_CMDOUT) of FIG. 9 is called and executed by the CALLV command after the command data is acquired. This simplifies the command transmission control process when transmitting the effect control command at various timings, and reduces the control load.

When the effect control unit 24 receives the standby screen display command, the effect means is used to display the standby effect when the power is turned on. For example, the liquid crystal display device 36 is made to display an effect image such as "Please Wait".

Next, the first power supply abnormality check process of FIG. 8 is executed (step S066, SPA22), and the “power-on signal and payout communication confirmation signal (hereinafter abbreviated as“ power-on signal ”)” from the payout control board 29 are sent. Wait for it to be sent (steps S067 to S069, Spa23 to Spa26). This power-on signal is a signal that is output when the payout control board 29 normally starts up, and the ON / OFF information of the power-on signal is acquired from the input port 1 (P_INPT1) described later. The CPU 201 waits for the payout control board 29 to start normally without completing the initial setting process. Therefore, if the payout control board 29 is not functioning normally due to some trouble, the steps S066 to S069 are performed. The game operation is not started only by repeating the process. Then, when the power-on signal is turned ON (step S069: ON), the initial setting process is exited, the process returns to the main control side main process of FIG. 6A, and the branch determination information acquisition process of step S013 is executed. do.

If the processing flow of the above steps S066 to S069 is described in detail according to the source code (SYSTEM_50 shown) shown in FIG. 26A, the processing content is as follows.

In SYSTEM_50 of FIG. 26A, the CPU 201 first calls and executes the first power supply abnormality check process (_ mightCHK: FIG. 8) of the subroutine by the CALLV instruction, and checks whether or not the power supply abnormality signal is ON (SPa22). ..

Next, the 8-bit data (input information) of the input port 1 (P_INPT1) is read into the A register (SPa23), and the read data is transferred (COPY) to the W register (SPa24). These Spa23 to Spa24 correspond to the "input port 1 data acquisition process" of the process of step S067, and the information of the input port 1 acquired in this process (input port 1 (P_INPT1) set in the W register). The input information) is also used in the “branch determination information acquisition process (step S013)” shown in FIG. 6A described later.

As shown in the figure, the 0th bit (b0 to b7) of the input port 1 (P_INPT1) has the 0th bit (b0) indicating the ON / OFF state of the setting key switch signal (setting key switch 94). , The first bit (b1) is the ON / OFF state of the supply shortage signal, the second bit (b2) is the ON / OFF state of the ball count error signal, and the third bit (b3) is the disconnection detection signal 1. The 4 bits (b4) are the ON / OFF signal of the disconnection detection signal 2, and the 5th bit (b5) is the ON / OFF state of the door open signal (door open sensor 61) (open / close of the door (for example, the front frame 2)). The 6th bit (b6) indicates the ON / OFF state of the RAM clear signal (RAM clear switch 98), and the 7th bit (b7) indicates the ON / OFF state of the power-on signal.

The above-mentioned "RAM clear signal" is a signal for determining whether or not to initialize a predetermined area of RAM, and is usually an ON / OFF state (ON operation / OFF operation) of the RAM clear switch 98 operated by a hall clerk. Has a value corresponding to. Further, the "setting key switch signal" is one of the signals for determining whether or not to shift to the setting change mode in which the set value can be changed, and is usually ON / ON / of the setting key switch 94 operated by the hall clerk. It has a value corresponding to the OFF state (ON operation / OFF operation). Therefore, if the acquisition timing of the RAM clear signal or the setting key switch signal is delayed, the hall clerk releases the switch and misses the ON operation. However, in the present embodiment, such a situation is avoided. Therefore, these signals are promptly acquired when the power is restored. Further, the "disconnection detection signal" is an error signal that occurs when the wiring (harness) connecting the boards or the board and various sensors is detected when the wiring (harness) is disconnected or short-circuited. For example, if the wiring between the main control unit 20 (main board) and the payout control board 29 is broken, or if the wiring between the main control unit 20 and the upper start port sensor 34a is broken, signals cannot be transmitted or received. Therefore, the disconnection detection signal is also quickly acquired. For each bit value, it is "1" when indicating the ON state and "0" when indicating the OFF state.

After finishing Spa23 to Spa24, the value of the 7th bit (b7) of the A register, that is, the ON / OFF data of the power-on signal of the input port 1 (P_INPT1) is set in the carry flag CF (SPa25). If the carry flag CF is not 1 (CF ≠ 1), that is, if the power-on signal is not ON (b7 ≠ 1), the jump is made to the start address of SYSTEM_50, that is, the first power supply abnormality check process in step S066. Returning to (_ mightCHK), the processes of steps S066 to S069 are repeatedly executed until the carry flag CF is 1 (CF = 1), that is, the power-on signal is ON (b7 = 1) (SPa26). Then, when the power-on signal is turned ON, the initial setting process is exited, the process returns to the main control side main process of FIG. 6A, and then the branch determination information acquisition process of step S013 is executed.

Returning to the description of FIGS. 6A and 6B, when the above-mentioned initial setting process (step S011) is completed, the branch determination information acquisition process of FIG. 6A is executed (step S013). In this branch determination information acquisition process, the value of the W register, that is, the 8 bits of the input port 1 (P_INPT1) transferred to the W register in the input port 1 data acquisition process (step S067) during the initial setting process of FIG. The logical product (AND) of the data and the mask data "01100001B" is taken, and the bits other than the 0th bit corresponding to the setting key switch signal, the 5th bit corresponding to the door open signal, and the 6th bit corresponding to the RAM clear signal are obtained. Mask the bits (SPb1). As a result, the ON / OFF state (signal state (input state)) of the current setting key switch signal, door open signal, and RAM clear signal is acquired in the W register. For example, if the bit pattern of the W register after masking is "01100001B (0th bit, 5th bit, 6th bit are ON)", the setting key switch signal, the door open signal, and the RAM clear signal are each ON states. If it is "00000001B (0th bit is ON)", it means that the door open signal and the RAM clear signal are in the OFF state, and only the setting key switch signal is in the ON state.

In the present embodiment, a combination of three signals, a setting key switch signal (setting key switch 94), a door opening signal (door opening sensor 61), and a RAM clear signal (RAM clear switch 98), that is, a combination of ON / OFF states, that is, The processing content (processing route) to be executed differs depending on the value of the W register (combination of the values of the 0th bit, the 5th bit, and the 6th bit) obtained by the mask processing in step S013 (SPb1). It has become.

(About the processing content of the migration destination by conditional branching: Fig. 25)
In order to facilitate the understanding of the present invention, it is first executed according to the value of the W register described above (combination of the values of the 0th bit, the 5th bit, and the 6th bit) with reference to FIG. 25. The outline of the processing route will be explained. FIG. 25 shows the execution according to the combination of ON / OFF states of the setting key switch signal, the door open signal, and the RAM clear signal (combination of the values of the 0th bit, the 5th bit, and the 6th bit of the W register). Indicates the processing route (migration destination processing route).

As shown in FIG. 25, there are a total of eight types of ON / OFF state combinations indicating the input states of the three signals of the setting key switch signal, the door open signal, and the RAM clear signal, and the combination of the ON / OFF states of these signals. That is, according to the value of the W register obtained in the branch determination information acquisition process (step S013), the signal is branched (migrated) to any of the following processing routes (a) to (d). ing. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the combination of the values of the (0th bit, 5th bit, 6th bit) of the W register is set to'W (x, y, z)'(however, "x, y, z". Each value of "" is expressed as 0 or 1).

<(B) Setting change processing route (setting change mode)>
When the input states of the three signals of the setting key switch signal, the door open signal, and the RAM clear signal are all ON states (when W (x, y, z) = W (1, 1, 1)), CPU201 Shifts the processing state to the "setting change processing route (steps S021 to S024, S030 to S032)" on the assumption that the setting change mode transition condition is satisfied. This setting change processing route is a processing route in which'setting change management processing (step S023)'that controls the setting changeable state and'intra-region RAM clear processing (step S031)'that clears a predetermined area of RAM are executed. For example, it is transferred when a person related to the hall performs a "setting change operation". Details will be described later, but when the route is shifted to the setting change processing route, the area (outside the area) of the work area (storage area) of the RAM 203 excluding at least the storage area (measurement information storage area) related to the display control of the performance display 99. The entire area of the RAM in the area except the RAM) is cleared (reset).

In the present embodiment, when the process is not transferred to the setting change processing route, one of the following "RAM clear processing route", "setting confirmation processing route", and "backup recovery processing route" is processed according to the value of the W register. Migrated to the root.

<(B) RAM clear processing route (RAM clear mode)>
When at least one of the setting key switch signal and the door open signal is in the OFF state and the RAM clear signal is in the ON state (W (x, y, z) = W (1, 0, 1), W ( 0, 1, 1), W (0, 0, 1)), CPU201 assumes that the RAM clear mode transition condition is satisfied, and sets the processing state to "RAM clear processing route (steps S029 to S032)". To migrate to. This RAM clear processing route is a processing route in which the intra-region RAM clear processing (step S031) is executed without executing the setting change management process (step S023) described later. This is the case when the specific area of the RAM is cleared by the "RAM clear operation" without performing the "setting change operation". Although details will be described later, the "specific area" is a storage area of the RAM 203 excluding at least the set value storage area and the out-of-area RAM area. Therefore, when the RAM clear processing route is executed, the range of RAM clear is limited as compared with the case where the setting change processing route is executed.

<(C) Setting confirmation processing route (setting confirmation mode)>
When the setting key switch signal and the door open signal are in the ON state and the RAM clear signal is in the OFF state (W (x, y, z) = W (1, 1, 0)), the CPU 201 confirms the setting. Assuming that the mode transition condition is satisfied, the processing status is shifted to the "setting confirmation processing route (steps S027 to S028)". This setting confirmation processing route controls the current setting value to a confirmable setting confirmation state without executing the setting change management process (step S023) and the in-area RAM clear process (step S031). (Step S027)'and'backup return processing (step S028)'to restore the backup data are executed. For example, a person involved in the hall performs a “setting confirmation operation” to set the current setting value. Migrated when confirming.

<(D) Backup recovery processing route (backup recovery mode)>
When at least one of the setting key switch signal and the door open signal is in the OFF state and the RAM clear signal is in the OFF state (W (x, y, z) = W (1, 0, 0), W (0) , 1, 0), W (0, 0, 0)), the CPU 201 shifts the processing state to the "backup recovery processing route (step S028)" on the assumption that the backup recovery mode transition condition is satisfied. .. This backup return processing route does not execute any of the setting change management process (step S023), the in-region RAM clear process (step S031), and the setting confirmation process (step S027), and the backup return process (step S028). Is the processing route to be executed. For example, it is transferred when the power is restored without performing any of the setting change operation, the RAM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation by the person involved in the hall.

<(F) Power cycle wait processing route (RAM error mode)>
If it is not migrated to the "setting change processing route" in (a) above as described above, the "RAM clear processing route", "setting confirmation processing route", and "backup recovery processing route" in (b) to (d) above It will be transferred to any processing route, but in the present embodiment, prior to these processes, "RAM error determination process (RAM error determination process) for determining whether or not an abnormality (RAM error) has occurred in the contents of RAM 203 (RAM error determination process). Steps S015 to S016) ”are executed. When it is determined in this RAM error determination process that a RAM error has occurred, it is assumed that the RAM error mode (power re-on wait processing mode) transition condition is satisfied, and the processing status is "power re-on wait processing route". (Steps S017 to S020) ”. When the route is shifted to the power re-on wait processing route, for example, the progress of the game processing is forcibly stopped as a predetermined error processing.

As described above, the power re-on wait processing route is a processing route that is migrated when an abnormality occurs in the RAM contents, but when it is migrated to the setting change processing route, the RAM error determination processing is performed. It is not executed and therefore is not migrated to the power cycle wait processing route. Details will be described later, but when the route is changed to the setting change processing route, the setting change management process (step S023) and the in-region RAM clearing process (step S031), which will be described later, are executed to execute the entire area of the in-region RAM (step S031). A work area related to a normal game including a set value storage area) is substantially initialized (cleared). That is, when shifting to the "setting change processing route", even if the RAM data is damaged, the damaged data will be initialized. Therefore, when the setting is changed, the RAM error does not occur after that, and it is not necessary to execute the RAM error determination process and check whether or not the content of the RAM is abnormal. .. For this reason, when shifting to the setting change processing route, the RAM error determination processing is prevented from being executed, and the contents of the RAM are not checked indiscriminately, thereby reducing the control load.

On the other hand, one of the "RAM clear processing route" that targets a specific area of RAM in the area, the "setting confirmation processing route" that does not execute the RAM clear processing itself, and the "backup recovery processing route" that does not execute the same processing. In the case of migration to, even if the RAM data is damaged, the damaged data may remain without being cleared. As a result, there may be a problem that the program processing goes out of control or the backup data cannot be restored normally. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when shifting to a processing route other than the setting change processing route, the contents of the RAM are checked in advance prior to the execution of the processing, and if an error occurs in the contents of the RAM, the contents of the RAM are checked. , Assuming that a RAM error has occurred, the processing status is shifted to the'power cycle wait processing route'. As a result, even when the route is transferred to a processing route other than the setting change processing route, it is possible to prevent a problem caused by data corruption or the like. When a RAM error occurs, the RAM error is not cleared unless the power is turned on again and the RAM is cleared by the setting change processing route (see FIGS. 6A and 8 described later).

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 6A, after executing the branch determination information acquisition process (step S013), it is determined whether or not to shift the processing state to the'setting change processing route (setting change processing mode)' (setting change). Branch determination process: Step S014).

In this setting change branch determination process, the value of the W register of the first operand is compared with the 8-bit data '01100001B' specified by the second operand by the CP instruction, and the difference between them is calculated (SPb2). The process is branched according to whether or not the comparison result (subtraction result) is zero, that is, whether or not the setting key switch signal, the RAM clear signal, and the door open signal are all in the ON state (SPb3). When the calculation result by SPb2 is zero, the bit pattern of the W register has the same value as '01100001B', that is, the setting key switch signal, the RAM clear signal, and the door open signal are all ON states W (1, It is a combination of 1, 1) (W (x, y, z) = W (1, 1, 1)). On the other hand, if the comparison result by SPb2 is not zero, the combination is other than that. (W (x, y, z) ≠ W (1, 1, 1)).

Specifically, when the comparison result by SPb2 is zero, that is, "W (x, y, z) = W (1, 1, 1)", 1 is set in the zero flag ZF, and the comparison result is not zero. That is, when "W (x, y, z) ≠ W (1, 1, 1)", 0 is set in the zero flag ZF. Then, when the zero flag ZF is 1 (ZF = 1) by the JR instruction of SPb3 (“JR NZ, SYSTEM_300”), that is, when W (1, 1, 1), the setting change mode transition condition Is established, the processing state is transferred to the setting change processing route (subsequent program'SPc1'is executed), and the zero flag ZF is not 1 (ZF = 0), that is, it is not W (1, 1, 1). In, it is assumed that the setting change mode transition condition is not satisfied, and the processing state is shifted to the RAM error determination processing (determination processing in step S015) described later (jump to SYSTEM_300). As described above, in the present embodiment, the RAM error determination processing (steps S015 and S016) is not executed when the route is shifted to the setting change processing route.

In SPb3, as a jump instruction, an 8-bit relative jump "JR instruction" is adopted instead of a 16-bit absolute jump "JP instruction". In the JP instruction, the jump destination address is specified by an absolute address (16 bits (2 bytes)), whereas in the JR instruction, the jump destination address is specified by a relative address (8 bits (1 byte)). The JR instruction has the advantage that the program capacity can be reduced by one byte. However, since the range of the jump destination that can be specified for the JR instruction is in the range of -128 to +127 bytes from the location of the program counter (PC register), the range is also limited by the JP instruction of the absolute jump. In this embodiment, from the viewpoint of reducing the program capacity, JR instructions are used for all the jump instructions used in the source code shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B, and a device is devised to make the best use of the small memory capacity. ..

(B. Setting change processing route (setting change mode): S014 → S021 to S024 → S030 to S032)
The processing contents of the setting change processing route will be described with reference to FIGS. 6A to 6B, FIGS. 10 and 26A to 26B. In the source code shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B, the execution order of the processing by the setting change processing route is indicated by a thick arrow and a number related to the “at the time of setting change” column. In the following, in order to avoid duplicate description, the processing of steps S021 to S024 and steps S030 to S032 will be mainly described among the setting change processing routes.

When shifting to the setting change processing route, first, the command data (BA5AH) under setting change is acquired (step S021, SPc1), and the acquired command data is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by the above command transmission process (_CMDOUT) (step S021, SPc1). Step S022, SPc2). When the effect control unit 24 receives the setting changing command, it executes the "setting changing effect" to notify that the setting value is being changed by using the effect means. For example, the decorative lamp 45 is turned on in all blue, the speaker 46 outputs an alarm sound of "setting is being changed ♪", and the liquid crystal display device 36 is made to display the effect image of "setting is being changed". The effect control unit 24 is configured to end the effect during setting change during execution when the setting completion command (BA09H) described later is received.

Next, the setting change management process (M_SETTI) is executed (step S023). Here, the subroutine setting change management process (M_SETTEI) is called and executed (SPc3).

(10. Setting change management process: Fig. 10)
The setting change management process (M_SETTEI) in step S023 will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the details of the setting change management process.

In FIG. 10, the CPU 201 first clears the backup flag BF described later (step S901).

Next, the input data creation process is executed (step S902). In this input data creation process, input information such as a RAM clear switch 98, a setting change switch 95, and a setting key switch 96 is acquired. For example, an input management process of a timer interrupt process on the main control side (S083 in FIG. 16). Is to be called and executed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the set value Nc (set value data) stored in the set value storage area (W_SETTEI) of the RAM in the area is an abnormal value (value other than 00H to 05H) (step S903). In the present embodiment, when the setting change processing route is executed, the power re-on wait processing route (steps S017 to S020: RAM error processing) is not executed. Therefore, the set value Nc is checked in advance before the setting change operation, and if an abnormality occurs, the set value storage area is cleared (step S904). The processing contents of steps S903 to S904 will be described in detail below.

If it is a normal game operation, the setting value data (setting value Nc) of any of '00H to 05H (normal value)' should be stored in the setting value storage area corresponding to the settings 1 to 6. Is. However, there may be a case where the set value data is damaged due to some trouble and a value that does not correspond to any of the settings 1 to 6 is set. Therefore, when the set value Nc is not within the range of 00H to 05H, it can be determined that some trouble has occurred in the set value Nc.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the process of step S903, it is determined whether or not the set value Nc is within the range of 00H to 05H. Specifically, after acquiring the set value Nc in the C register, the value of the C register (set value Nc) and 06H are compared with each other by the CP instruction to obtain the difference between them, and the comparison result (subtraction result) is obtained. When "set value Nc <06H (subtraction result is negative)" (step S903: YES), it is assumed that the set value Nc is within the normal range, and the process jumps to step S905 described later, while "set value Nc". In the case of "≧ 06H (subtraction result is not negative)" (step S903: NO), it is assumed that the set value Nc is an abnormal value, and the initial value 00H (setting 1) is set in the set value storage area (setting). Value Nc ← 00H). The initial value of the set value is not limited to the setting 1 (00H), and may be any value of the setting 2 to the setting 6 (01H to 05H).

In the process of step S905, the first power supply abnormality check process (_ mightCHK) shown in FIG. 8 is executed (step S905).

Next, a security signal (setting changing signal and / or door open state signal) indicating that the setting is being changed (setting change operation) is output from the frame external terminal board 21 (step S906), and then, The chattering prevention waiting time (for example, about 0.12 ms) is set (step S907). Then, it waits for the chattering prevention waiting time to elapse (step S908, step S909: NO). In the present embodiment, the processes of steps S905 to S916 are repeated at high speed until the setting completion change switch 96 is turned off (step S916: YES described later), and whether or not there is a setting change operation each time, that is, setting. Whether or not the change switch 95 has changed from OFF to ON is determined, but by providing a chattering prevention waiting time in steps S907 to S909, erroneous detection due to chattering of the setting change switch 95 can be prevented.

When the chattering prevention waiting time becomes 0 (step S909: YES), the above input data creation process is executed (step S910), and whether or not the setting change switch 95 is in the ON state, that is, the setting change operation is performed. The presence or absence is determined (step S911). In the present embodiment, when the ON edge of the setting change switch 95 is detected, it is determined that the setting change operation has been performed. In this embodiment, the input data creation process for acquiring the input information of the setting change switch 95 is executed not only in step S910 immediately before step S911 but also in step S902 at the start of the setting change management process. .. This is because when the setting change process is started while the setting change switch 95 is being pressed, even if the ON edge of the setting change switch 95 suddenly stands up, it is detected empty in step S910. This is to prevent the determination process of step S911 from being affected.

If the setting change switch 95 is not in the ON state (step S9111: NO), it is assumed that there is no setting change operation, and the process proceeds to step S915. On the other hand, when the setting change switch 95 is in the ON state (step S911: YES), the current setting value Nc is changed (updated) assuming that the setting change operation has been performed (step S912). As described above, the setting values during the setting change (setting change operation) are switched so as to circulate in the range of the settings 1 to 6 each time the setting change switch 95 is operated.

Then, when the processing of step S912 is completed, it is determined again whether or not the current set value Nc is a normal value (step S913), and if it is not a normal value (step S913: NO), the set value Nc is set. Set 00H (setting 1) corresponding to setting 1 (setting value Nc ← 00H) (step S914).

Next, based on the current set value Nc, the setting display data to be displayed on the setting display 97 is created and output (step S915). As a result, the setting display 97 displays the current setting value during the setting change. However, the set value displayed here is a "provisional set value" before the set value is finalized.

When the process of step S915 is completed, it is determined whether or not the setting change completion switch 96 is in the ON state, that is, whether or not the setting change operation (setting change period) is completed (step S916). If the setting change completion switch 96 is not in the ON state (step S916: NO), it is assumed that the setting change operation is not completed (setting change operation end condition is not satisfied), the process proceeds to step S905, and thereafter, the setting change completion switch 96 is performed. The process of steps S905 to S916 is repeatedly executed until is turned ON (until the setting change operation end condition is satisfied).

If the setting change completion switch 96 is turned on (step S916: YES), it is assumed that the set value is confirmed, and the current set value Nc (setting work value of the C register) is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 203. (Step S917).

Next, the set value confirmation display process is executed (step S918). In this setting value confirmation display process, the current setting display data is cleared and the setting confirmation LED lighting display data is output. The setting confirmation LED of the present embodiment has the function of the DP unit (decimal point) of the setting display 97, which is a 7-segment LED, and when the setting change completion switch 96 is turned on, the set value being displayed disappears. , Only the DP section lights up, and it is notified that the set value has been confirmed (setting confirmation display). In the present embodiment, the display mode in which only the DP unit is turned on when the setting is confirmed has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this as long as it is a display mode in which it can be identified that the set value has been confirmed.

Next, the output of the security signal (setting changing signal) is stopped (step S920), the setting completion command data (BA09H) is acquired (step S921), and the acquired command data is transmitted by the command transmission process (_CMDOUT). It is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S922). When the effect control unit 24 receives the setting completion command, the effect during setting change being executed is terminated, and the "setting change completion effect" for notifying that the setting change is completed (the setting value is confirmed) is predetermined. Execute for a period (predetermined time: for example, 10 seconds). For example, the decorative lamp 45 is turned on in all red, the speaker 46 outputs a voice (setting change completion sound) such as "setting has been changed ♪", and the liquid crystal display device 36 has "setting changed". Display the effect image (setting change completion screen).

In the present embodiment, after the setting change management process (step S023) is completed, the predetermined area of the RAM is cleared by the RAM clear process in the area (step S031) described later, so that the RAM is cleared in order to notify this. It is preferable to send a command (BA02H) (see the broken line frame in the setting change column of FIG. 29) and execute the RAM clear notification effect by the effect control unit 24. This RAM clear notification effect can be configured to be able to be notified as a part of the setting change completion effect, in a form accompanying the setting change completion effect, or after the setting change completion effect is completed. The RAM clear notification effect may be executed without executing the setting change completion effect.

As the RAM clear notification effect, for example, the decorative lamp 45 is turned on in red for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), and an alarm sound at the time of RAM clear is output from the speaker 16. Further, the liquid crystal display device 36 displays a background screen in a normal state (background image corresponding to the normal effect mode (normal state)) (low accuracy screen display), and the decorative design is a decoration for clearing the RAM. A combination of symbols (for example, "731": decorative symbol when the RAM is cleared) can be displayed (display mode when the first power is turned on). In this case, the display state of the liquid crystal display device 36 is the display state even after the RAM clear notification by the decorative lamp 45 or the speaker 16 is completed (display mode when the first power is turned on (demonstration start waiting effect when RAM is cleared)). (Waiting for demo start), and if a predetermined waiting time (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed without starting the game, the demo mode (customer waiting effect (demo screen) described later) may be entered. good.

Then, it waits until the setting key switch 94 is turned OFF (step S923: NO), and if the OFF state of the setting key switch 94 is confirmed (step S923: YES), the display of the setting display 97 (here, here). Turn off the setting confirmation LED (DP unit) and exit the setting change management process. This completes a series of setting change operations. In the present embodiment, the setting change completion effect is displayed for a predetermined time regardless of whether or not the setting key switch 94 is in the OFF state. After that, the process returns to the main control side main process of FIG. 6A, and proceeds to the process of step S024 described later.

In this embodiment, in order to reduce the control load, at least until the game startable state is set (until the CTC setting process in step S036 described later is executed (the main control side timer interrupt process in FIG. 16 starts). Even if the door open sensor 61 is in the ON state (the front frame 2 is in the open state), the door open error notification is not executed. It has become like. However, from the viewpoint of security, when the door open sensor 61 is in the ON state, information indicating that the door is in the open state is transmitted to the hall computer HC by using the security signal.

(Ψ: When notifying a door opening error)
Of course, the "door opening error notification" may be configured to be executable even before the game startable state is set. For example, the decorative lamp 45 blinks in red, the speaker 46 outputs a door opening warning sound of "door is open ♪", and the liquid crystal display device 36 displays a production image of "door is open". By the way, when changing the setting, normally, the setting change operation is performed after opening the front frame 2, but if the door opening error is configured to be able to be notified, the setting change operation is performed. From the start to the end, there is a door opening error. Therefore, there is a problem of preferentially notifying the door opening error notification and the setting changing effect or the setting change completion effect. However, in order to clearly notify the processing status, the setting change is performed rather than the door opening error notification. The notification priority of the middle effect or the setting change completion effect is set high, or the door opening error notification is notified using one effect means (for example, the sound effect and the light effect by the decorative lamp 45 and the speaker 46). ), The setting changing effect or the setting change completion effect can be notified by using another effect means (for example, the effect is notified by the image display effect by the liquid crystal display device 36).

(Modification 1-1)
In the present embodiment, an example in which a dedicated setting change switch 95 is provided as a setting change switch has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. The RAM clear switch 98 may function as a setting change switch without providing the setting change switch 95, that is, the RAM clear switch 98 may also be used as a setting change switch. In this case, the setting can be changed by pressing the RAM clear switch 98.

(Modification 1-2)
Further, in the present embodiment, the dedicated setting change completion switch 96 is provided as the setting change completion switch, but the present invention is not limited to this. The setting change completion switch 96 may be not provided, and the setting key switch 94 may function as the setting change completion switch, that is, the setting key switch 94 may also be used as the setting change switch. In this case, the setting change end operation can be performed by the ON / OFF operation of the setting key switch 94. In the case of this modification, the ON / OFF determination process of the setting change completion switch 96 in step S916 is the ON / OFF determination process of the setting key switch 94. Further, the determination process in step S923 becomes unnecessary (the process of the broken line portion in the figure may be deleted), which leads to a reduction in the control load.

(Modification 1-3)
Further, other sensor switches, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball (for example, sensors 34a, 35a, 52a, 43a, 49a, etc.) may function as a setting change completion switch. In this case, in the determination process of step S916, it may be determined that the set value has been determined when the sensor detects the game ball (ON state) by taking care of the game ball in the winning opening. In addition, among the above-mentioned "modification example 1-1" to "modification example 1-3", one modification example or a combination of a plurality of modification examples can be adopted.

As described above, when the setting change management process is completed, the process proceeds to step S024 of FIG. 6A, the address of the command transmission address table (D_MKCADR2A) at the time of setting change is acquired (step S024), and the transmission command table selection process (_MKCADR) is performed. Execute (step S030). By the processing of steps S024 and S030, the effect control command (see the “setting change” column in FIG. 29) is transmitted after the setting change is completed.

The contents of the process of the above "steps S024 and S030" will be described in detail according to the source code of FIG. 26A as follows.

Command at the time of setting change After setting the start address of the transmission address table (D_MKCADR2A) in the HL register pair (SPd1), jump to SYSTEM_250 (SPd2), and then call and execute the transmission command table selection process (_MKCADR) by the CALLV command (_MKCADR). SPf2). The command transmission address table and transmission command table selection process at the time of setting change will be described in detail below.

(28A. Command transmission address table at the time of setting change (D_MKCADR2A): FIG. 28A (A))
The command transmission address table at the time of the above setting change will be described with reference to FIG. 28A. FIG. 28A (A) shows a command transmission address table at the time of setting change.

In the command transmission address table at the time of setting change according to the present embodiment, the loop number (number of tables to be specified) data and the head of the command creation table are used as data for creating the effect control command data transmitted at the time of setting change. The address is fixed. In the case of the present embodiment, the tables to be designated are the "spec specification command creation table (D_SPEC)" shown in the figure (B) and the "customer waiting command creation table (D_BA04)" shown in the figure (C). Since there are two types, the number of loops is 2.

(Command creation table: FIGS. 28A (B) (C))
Next, the spec specification command specification command creation table (D_SPEC) and the "customer waiting command creation table (D_BA04) will be described.

As shown in the figure, the above-mentioned "spec specification command creation table (D_SPEC)" and the above-mentioned "customer waiting command creation table (D_BA04)" include addition value data (here, 00H) and command data to be transmitted. Is stipulated.

This "addition value data" is offset data used when making changes to the reference command data (reference command data). Therefore, when the added value data is 00H, the reference command data is acquired as the command data actually transmitted, and when the added value is not 00H (for example, in the case of 01H), the added value is added to the reference command data. The command data (in this example, the reference command data + 01H) to which is added is acquired as the command data actually transmitted.

(11. Send command table selection process: Fig. 11)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 11, the transmission command table selection process (_MKCADR) in step S030 will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a transmission command table selection process.

In FIG. 11, the CPU 201 first sets the number of loops by referring to the “command transmission address table at the time of setting change” in FIG. 28A (A) acquired in step S024 (SPd1) (step S071).

Next, the command creation table is selected with reference to the command transmission address table at the time of setting change (step S072). Here, the spec specification command creation table of FIG. 28A (B) and the customer waiting command creation table of FIG. 28A (C) are sequentially selected in the two loops. Then, the first command data creation process shown in FIG. 12 is executed.

(12. First command data creation process: Fig. 12)
FIG. 12 shows a flowchart of the first command data creation process in step S073. In the first command data creation process, as shown in FIG. 12, first, the command data to be transmitted is acquired by referring to the command creation table selected in step S072 (step S076), and then the command transmission of the subroutine is performed. The process (_CMDOUT) is called and executed, and the acquired command data is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S077). Here, in two loops,'F611H (spec specification command data)' based on the spec specification command creation table and'BA04H (customer waiting command data)' based on the customer waiting command creation table are acquired. , These command data will be sequentially transmitted to the effect control unit 24. That is, before the setting change operation is completed, the setting changing command (BA5AH) is performed, and after the setting changing operation is completed, the setting completion command (BA09H), the spec specification command (F611H), and the customer waiting command (BA04H) are completed. ) Will be transmitted to the effect control unit 24 in this order (see the description of "setting change" in FIG. 29). When the RAM clear notification effect is executed, the RAM clear command (BA02H) can be additionally transmitted.

After executing the first command data creation process (step S073) of FIG. 12, the number of loops is decremented (step S074), and the processes of steps S072 to S075 are repeated until the number of loops becomes zero. Then, when the number of loops becomes zero (step S075: = 0), the transmission command table selection process is exited.

The transmission command table selection process (_MKCADR) of FIG. 11 is also commonly used when the RAM clear processing route (steps S029 to S032) described later is executed. When this RAM clear processing route is executed, it is not the "setting change command transmission address table" shown in FIG. 28A selected in the setting change processing route, but the "RAM clear command transmission address table (D_MKCADR2)" described later. Is selected (see step S029, FIG. 28B in FIG. 6B). Then, the transmission command table selection process (_MKCADR) is executed (step S030), and the target effect control command is transmitted.

(Customer waiting effect, menu screen: Fig. 43, Fig. 37)
When the effect control unit 24 receives the above-mentioned customer waiting command, a demo movie for explaining and introducing (demonstrating) the game related to the game machine 1 is played based on a predetermined execution condition. ) ”Is revealed. Specifically, after receiving the customer waiting command, the game is not started, that is, the operation hold ball is not generated (without receiving the hold addition command), and the menu screen shown in FIG. 43 to be described later. If a predetermined time (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed without shifting to, the demo screen is displayed. This demo screen can be displayed even when the symbol is stopped and the non-detection state by the touch sensor has elapsed for a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds). During a normal game, the display state of the decoration stop symbol stopped after the end of the current symbol variation display game is continuously displayed until the waiting time of 180 seconds elapses, and the decoration lamp 45 has a predetermined light emission pattern. A "demo start waiting effect" appears in which the speaker 43 is muted (may be executing a predetermined sound effect), and this state is maintained until the customer waiting effect starts (demo movie start). To. It should be noted that the effect of waiting for the start of the demo may be immediately shifted after the end of the symbol variation display game, but for the light effect and the sound effect related to the effect of waiting for the start of the demo, the decorative lamp 45 is specified after a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed. It is preferable to emit light in the light emission pattern of the above and put the speaker 43 in a mute state. As for the sound effect, after the end of the symbol variation display game this time, the BGM related to the current effect mode may be faded out to be in a mute state. Further, even during the display state of the decorative stop symbol, if the touch sensor of the firing handle 15 is in the detection state, the waiting time of 180 seconds may be counted again.

On the other hand, in the case of the processing stage at the time of turning on the power, for example, after the setting change operation is completed, the main control unit 20 sends the effect control unit 24 to the setting completion command (step S921), and the customer is waiting. Although the command will be transmitted, the effect control unit 24 does not execute the customer waiting effect at least until the setting change completion effect is completed. In the case of this embodiment, since the waiting time of 180 seconds is provided, the setting change completion effect is completed within this waiting time, so that no particular problem occurs. When the above-mentioned RAM clear notification effect is executed when the setting is changed, it is preferable to execute the customer waiting effect after the RAM clear notification effect is completed. Further, when the customer waiting command is received after the setting change operation is completed, the customer waiting effect may be executed after the elapse of the waiting time of 180 seconds, but this stage is exclusively before the opening of the pachinko hall store. If the setting change completion effect is displayed without waiting for the elapse of the waiting time of 180 seconds, the RAM clear notification effect is executed following the setting change completion effect after the effect is completed. In that case, the customer waiting effect may be executed immediately after the RAM clear notification effect is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the "menu screen" that can display the game history and set the game-related settings such as volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment can be displayed and controlled during the demo start waiting effect or the customer waiting effect. (Game setting mode control means: see FIGS. 37 to 40 and 43). Specifically, when the demo start waiting effect or the customer waiting effect is being performed, the presence or absence of the "menu display request operation (pressing operation of the effect button 13)" from the player is monitored, and the menu display request operation is performed. In this case, the current display screen is switched to the "menu screen 100" shown in FIG. 43 for display. The timing at which the menu screen can be switched, that is, the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 13, is notified by the button LED 13b in a predetermined light emitting mode.

FIG. 43 shows a menu screen according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 43, eight items from "QR code (registered trademark) issuance 102a" to "menu screen end 102h" are displayed on the menu screen 100 as selection items (menu items) related to the game environment setting. In addition to the text information (selection, decision) for explaining the operation method on the menu screen, the direction key image 104 imitating the direction key 75 and the button imitating the effect button 13 are displayed on the lower side. The image 106 and the image 106 are displayed side by side. Various menu items can be selected by pressing the arrow keys 75, and the selected menu item is highlighted. This makes it possible to easily identify which menu item is being selected. In the illustrated example, an example in which "this sunrise ball ranking 102f" is selected is shown. When any of the menu items of "QR code (registered trademark) issuance 102a" to "menu screen end 102h" is determined, an information screen corresponding to the menu item is displayed, and a predetermined game setting becomes possible. There is. The display control related to these menu screens is provided by the effect control unit 24 (game setting control means). Hereinafter, menu items closely related to the present invention will be described.

When "volume adjustment 102c" is determined, a volume adjustment screen (not shown) that allows the volume of the speaker 46 to be adjusted is displayed, and the player can adjust the volume to his / her preference (adjustable in stages). It has become. When "light amount adjustment 102g" is determined, a light amount adjustment screen (not shown) capable of adjusting the light amount (brightness) of the decorative lamp 45, the liquid crystal screen, etc. is displayed, and the player adjusts the light amount to his / her taste. Is possible (adjustable in stages).

Further, when "today's game history 102d" is determined, predetermined game information related to the game machine 1, for example, the number of big hits, the number of rotations until the big hit is won, the big hit type, the big hit probability, and the like are displayed. The player can guess what kind of setting value the setting value of the gaming machine 1 is based on the game information (for example, the jackpot probability) displayed by "Today's game history 102d".

Further, when the "main sunrise ball ranking 102f" is determined, the ball ejection ranking display (FIG. 44) is displayed. When "menu screen end 102h" is determined, the menu screen 100 ends and the demo start waiting effect is displayed. If a predetermined time (for example, 180 seconds) elapses without doing anything after the menu screen display ends and the demo start waiting effect is returned, the process shifts to the customer waiting effect and the above "demo screen (demo movie)". Appears. If a predetermined time (for example, 120 seconds) elapses without doing anything while the menu screen is displayed, the menu screen is forcibly terminated to shift to the customer waiting effect, and the above "demo screen (demo movie)" is displayed. ) ”Appears. If the predetermined time elapses without doing anything while the menu screen is displayed, the demo screen may be returned to the demo start waiting effect.

Here, the above-mentioned payout ranking display, which is closely related to the present invention, will be described. FIG. 44 shows an example of the payout ranking display.

(Delivery ranking display: Fig. 44)
With reference to FIG. 44, the payout ranking display 771 according to the present embodiment ranks the top three rankings of the total number of payouts during consecutive villas from the time the power is turned on to the present as the display contents or display items. It is displayed (high score image 771b is displayed). Here, the "total number of balls to be played at the time of consecutive villas" is, in the case of this embodiment, the big hit (first hit) in the normal state is counted as the first big hit, and the total number of prize balls during the big hit game is counted. After that, if the jackpot (second jackpot) is won again in the latent probability state, the probability change state, or the time saving state, the number of prize balls in the jackpot game is added. After that, as long as the probable change state or the time saving state continues continuously, the number of prize balls in the big hit won during that period is accumulated, and this is counted as the total number of balls to be played during the consecutive villas. For example, if the first hit is a time-saving big hit and the player exits the time-saving state without winning the big hit during the subsequent time-saving state, only the "number of prize balls obtained during the first-time big hit game" is the consecutive villa. It is counted as the total number of balls released at the time. In addition, if the jackpot (second time) is won again during the latent state, probability change state, or time saving state after the first hit, "total number of prize balls during the first hit jackpot game" + "second time" The total number of prize balls during the jackpot game is counted as the total number of balls to be played during the consecutive villas. After that, if the probability change state or the time saving state continues and the big hit is won (Nth big hit) during the continuation period, the number of prize balls during the big hit game is accumulated. That is, "the total number of prize balls during the first big hit game" + "the total number of prize balls during the second big hit game" + ... + "the total number of prize balls during the Nth big hit game" It is counted as the total number of balls to be played at the time.

Regarding the number of prize balls during the big hit game, the big prize opening command sent when the main control unit 20 wins the big winning opening 50 and the general winning opening winning command sent when winning the general winning opening 43 It can be grasped by commands (commands including information on the number of prize balls). In addition, the above-mentioned total number of balls may be targeted at all the winning openings with prize balls, or may be targeted at a part. In the present embodiment, the general winning opening 43 and the large winning opening 50 are targeted, but only the large winning opening 50 may be targeted. Further, instead of the number of prize balls, the so-called "net increase number" in which the number of out balls is subtracted from the number of prize balls may be targeted.

The production control unit 24 compares the total number of balls to be played at the time of the consecutive villas with the history of the total number of balls to be played, and if the total number of balls to be played this time is within the top three, updates the current ranking information. This is displayed on the LCD screen as a new ball ejection ranking display. The ranking information is updated when the big hit game ends. The effect control unit 24 determines the information regarding the number of prize balls counted by the number of payouts counting means, which counts the number of prize balls in a predetermined game period, and the number of prize balls, which is counted by the number of payouts counting means, based on the preset ranking conditions. It is configured to include a ranking display control means for displaying and controlling the display during the display period (for example, during the display period of the payout ranking display).

In addition to the total number of balls to be played at the time of consecutive villas, the ball output ranking display 771 shows the player's initials and favorite characters (hereinafter, "high score name") for the players who have won the top three prizes. It is possible to enter up to three characters (see "AAA" in the figure). This input screen displays a blessing image such as "Congratulations on updating the high score! Please enter your favorite characters" when the ranking information is updated, for example, when "Honrise ball ranking 102f" is determined. Then, a screen where you can enter a high score name is displayed. As a means for inputting a high score name, for example, a list screen such as alphanumerical characters may be displayed, and an arbitrary character may be selected and determined from the character group by using an operation means (direction key 75 or effect button 13). , A well-known input function may be adopted. The entered high score name is displayed as the name image 771a as shown (the illustration shows the default "AAA").

Although the details will be described later, the ball ejection ranking display 771 is also used when displaying the setting change suggestion effect (end interval screen change: see FIGS. 52 and 53 described later). Therefore, when a specific character is input as the high score name, the setting change suggestion effect (end interval screen change) may be configured to be able to appear as a privilege. For example, when "FUJ" is input, an image display effect related to the current set value can be displayed with a predetermined lottery probability (for example, using the lottery table of FIG. 52 described later). Further, the payout ranking display may be that of today (the ranking display starts from zero after the power is turned on), or the ranking display of the previous day may be inherited unless the RAM is cleared. In addition, the payout ranking display can be displayed as a part (part) of the demo screen (demo movie).

(About power saving mode)
After the start of the customer waiting effect (demo screen display), if a predetermined transition condition (power saving mode transition condition) is satisfied, the transition to the "power saving mode" is performed. This power saving mode shifts to, for example, when a predetermined time (for example, 120 seconds) has elapsed without generating an operation holding ball and switching to the menu screen (game setting screen) after the start of the customer waiting effect. Let me. When the power saving mode transition condition is satisfied, the effect control unit 24 ends the demo mode (customer waiting effect), shifts to the power saving mode, and displays the effect dedicated to the power saving mode (effect during the power saving mode). For example, the liquid crystal display device 36 is displayed with a power saving screen (for example, the character display of "power saving is in progress" on the liquid crystal screen), and control is performed so as to turn off a part or all of the decorative lamp 45 and other effect LEDs. (Power saving control).

(RAM clear processing in area: step S031)
Returning to the description of FIG. 6B, when the transmission command table selection process (step S030) described above is completed, the in-region RAM clear process is then executed (step S031, SPg1 to SPg3). In this area RAM clear processing, at least the entire area excluding the set value storage area of the area RAM area for storing data used in normal game processing (processing related to the symbol variation display game or hit game). Initializes (clears) the (normal data storage area) and returns the operating state of the gaming machine to the initial state. Therefore, even if the in-region RAM clear processing is executed, the out-of-region RAM (see FIG. 25) used for the processing related to the base value (performance display) is not cleared. Even if the data is from the RAM in the area, the set value storage area (set value data) is not targeted for clearing. The initialization / change of the set value data is executed by the setting change management process (step S023 in FIG. 6A) shown in FIG. 10 which has already been described.

The above-mentioned "normal data storage area" mainly includes various flags, operation timers, counters, etc. used in the various random number update processes (step S041) described later and the timer interrupt process on the main control unit side (FIG. 16). , A storage area corresponding to each of these game progress data is defined. The following data are typical data for game progress. The following is a partial example of typical game progress data.

(A) Flags related to various functions for designating the game state ("Public accessory open extension state flag" for specifying the operating state of the open extension function, "Normal symbol time saving" for specifying the operating state of the normal symbol time saving function. "Status flag", "Normal symbol probability change state flag" to specify the operation state of the normal symbol probability change function, "Special symbol time reduction state flag" to specify the operation state of the special symbol time reduction function, and specify the operation state of the special symbol probability change function. "Special symbol probability change state flag": game state specification flag)
(B) "Special symbol time reduction counter" that counts the number of operations of the special symbol time reduction function, and "special symbol probability variation counter" that counts the number of operations of the special symbol probability change function.
(C) "Various data related to the big hit lottery and the auxiliary hit lottery (big hit judgment flag, small hit judgment flag, normal symbol hit judgment flag, special symbol judgment data (winning type data), normal symbol judgment data, special stop symbol number ( Special stop symbol designation data), normal stop symbol number, various random numbers used for each lottery, etc.) "
(D) "Parameters related to the variable display operation state of special symbols and normal symbols (changing flag, special symbol operation status, normal symbol operation status, special symbol operation confirmation data, etc.)", "The current game state can be specified. Game status data (game status number YJ) "," Number of pending balls in operation (Special Figure 1 Number of reserved balls in operation, Special Figure 2 Number of reserved balls in operation, Number of reserved balls in normal drawing) "
(E) "Various data related to the execution of the winning game (current number of rounds (number of special electric accessory operations), specified number of rounds, number of large winning openings, conditional device operation flag, small hit medium flag, continuous operation of the accessory" Device operation flag, special electric accessory operation status, round display LED number, etc.) "," Various data related to the execution of the Fuden open game (ordinary electric accessory operation status, ordinary electric accessory operating flag, etc.) "
(F) "Various operation timers that manage the progress of the game (excluding timers related to the base value display)", "Winning counter that counts the number of winning balls"
(G) "ON / OFF data related to switches and sensors (excluding ON / OFF data of sensors such as winning openings related to base value display)"
(H) “Various error flags”, “backup flag BF”, etc.
In any case, when the in-area RAM clear process (step S031) is executed, all the data in the normal data storage area except the set value storage area and the out-of-area RAM are set to the initial state.

In the present embodiment, as shown in the address map of FIG. 24, 0 to 255 bytes in the RAM 203 are defined as the in-region RAM, and 256 to 511 bytes are defined as the out-of-region RAM. Further, in the case of the present embodiment, the start address (address 0000H) of the RAM in the area is secured for one byte as the set value storage area. Further, among the RAMs in the area, a predetermined area other than the set value storage area and the normal data storage area is used as a stack area for saving the return address when the subroutine is called. Specifically, 2 bytes are used as a stack area for saving (PUSH) the return address at the time of calling the'zero set process (_ZEROSET2)'shown in SPg3 of FIG. 26A by the CALLV instruction. The above-mentioned zero set process (_ZEROSET2) is a process for clearing the data at the designated address to zero.

Therefore, it is necessary to exclude the set value storage area and the area used as the stack area for the return address described above for a total of 3 bytes from the area to be cleared of the RAM in the area. Therefore, in the in-area RAM clear processing, first, the next address of the set value storage area (W_SETTEI) is set in the HL register pair as the start address of the area to be cleared (SPg1), and the data is cleared. 253 is set in the B register (SPg2) as the number of processing of the zero set processing (_ZEROSET2) for the purpose of processing. Then, the zero set process (_ZEROSET2) of the subroutine is called and executed by the CALLV instruction (SPg3). As a result, the area (253 bytes) excluding the set value storage area of the RAM in the area and the stack area for saving the return address is cleared to zero.

Although details will be described later, the out-of-area RAM, that is, the RAM area related to performance information (measurement information storage area, performance display storage area, etc.) is not targeted for clearing by the in-area RAM clear processing, but is mainly controlled. In the performance display monitor process (step S102 in FIG. 16) during the side timer interrupt process, the contents of the out-of-area RAM are checked, and if there is an abnormality in the contents, the RAM clear process (out-of-area RAM clear process) is executed. (See step S102 in FIG. 16). As a result, for example, the RAM clear operation or the setting change operation is performed in order to end the business hours during the winning game or the probable change state and to change the game state to the normal state (initialization) or to change the set value. Even if this is done, only the normal data storage area is cleared without clearing the data related to the base value. Therefore, it is possible to take over across a power failure without being affected by the RAM clear operation or the setting change operation.

Returning to the description of FIG. 6B, when the in-region RAM clear processing in step S031 is completed, then, the initial value at the time of RAM clear is set for the specific data in the in-region RAM (normal data storage area) (power on). Time initial data setting process: Step S032, SPg4 to SPg6). In this power-on initial data setting process, the start address of the “work area initial setting table (D_INSET)” (not shown) is set in the HL register pair (SPg4), and the CALLV command is used for the designated work area. Call and execute'data set processing (_DTSET)'to set specific data (SPg5).

In the above-mentioned "work area initial setting table (D_INSET)", address data for designating a specific address of the RAM in the area and initial data for setting in the storage area designated by the address are defined. By executing the "data set process (_DTSET)", the initial data is set in the designated RAM area.

In the present embodiment, the error notification timer (W_SGTMER), the special figure 1 stop symbol number (W_T1STPNO), and the special figure 2 stop symbol number (W_T2STPNO) are designated as the storage area of the designated destination, and the error notification timer (W_SGTMER) is designated. 30000 ms is set, and the special figure 1 stop symbol number (W_T1STPNO) and the special figure 2 stop symbol number (W_T2STPNO) have the same special stop symbol number 200 (specific loss symbol data: for example, stop corresponding to loss A). (Design data) is set (in this embodiment, a plurality of types of losses A to C are provided as loss types). The error notification timer here is the output time of the RAM clear signal (one of the security signals) indicating that the RAM clear has been executed, and this RAM clear signal is passed through the frame external terminal board 21 to the whole computer HC. Is output to. In the present embodiment, the same special stop symbol number is set for the special figure 1 stop symbol number and the special figure 2 stop symbol number as the initial data, but different lost symbol data may be set. Further, data other than the lost symbol data may be used, and for example, data corresponding to a specific symbol (a symbol dedicated to clearing the RAM) that is not displayed during the game may be set. Further, non-lighting (light-off) data (light-off data) may be set. Further, as for the data related to the normal symbol (normal stop symbol number (W_FSTPNO)), the lost symbol data or the non-lighting data may be set in the same manner as the special symbol.

Then, when the data set processing (_DTSET) of SPg5 is completed, the process jumps to step S033 (SYSTEM_850) described later (SPg6). As a result, the setting change processing route is completed, and the processing state is shifted to the processing of step S033 at the confluence point.

In the setting change branch determination process (step S014), in order to determine that the setting change transition mode transition condition is satisfied, after opening the front frame 2, the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 are used. It is necessary to turn on the power with both turned on. This is because when the front frame 2 is opened, the power switch (not shown) inside the gaming machine is turned on, and then the setting key switch 94 or the RAM clear switch 98 is turned on, the power is turned on and the operation is turned on. Usually, it takes a few seconds. However, before the ON operation, the process of step S067 during the initial setting process of FIG. 7 is executed and the input information of the input port 1 (P_INPT1) is acquired. Therefore, at least the door open signal is in the ON state. However, the OFF state is detected for the setting key switch signal and the RAM clear switch signal. That is, when the setting change branch determination process is executed, a combination other than W (1, 1, 1) is acquired, and it is assumed that the setting change transition mode transition condition is not satisfied in the setting change branch determination process, and the setting is changed. This is because the processing route is not executed. In this case, as shown in the figure, the processing route in which the processing after step S015 is executed is followed, and thereafter, the setting change operation is controlled to the prohibited state. In this case, after the power is turned off once, the power may be turned on again while the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 are turned on. If it is determined that the setting change transition mode transition condition is satisfied, the allowable state of the setting change operation is maintained even if the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 are subsequently turned off. However, in the case where the setting key switch 94 is used as the setting change completion switch instead of the setting change completion switch 96, the setting key switch 94 is turned off after the setting change transition mode transition condition is satisfied, as described above. If set to, the setting change period (setting change operation) ends.

Next, each processing route of the RAM clear processing route (RAM clear mode), the setting confirmation processing route (setting confirmation mode), and the backup restoration processing route (backup restoration mode) will be sequentially described. In order to facilitate the understanding of the present invention, first, "RAM error determination processing (steps S015 to S016)" executed prior to these processing routes will be described in detail.

(RAM error determination process: steps S015 to S016)
As described above, when the determination result in step S014 of FIG. 6A is a combination other than W (1, 1, 1), it is assumed that the setting change mode transition condition is not satisfied, and the processing state is set to steps S015 to S015. The process proceeds to the "RAM error determination process" in step S016 (SPb3: jump to SYSTEM_300 when the zero flag ZF = 1).

This RAM error determination process is a process of determining whether or not to shift the processing state to the'power re-on wait processing route (RAM error mode)'in steps S017 to S020. In the RAM error determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the RAM is abnormal (step S015), but the data in the RAM area to be determined here is the set value data in the set value storage area (W_SETTEI). As described above, the setting values are defined in 6 stages of settings 1 to 6, and if normal, the setting value storage area (W_SETTEI) corresponds to the 6 stages of setting values. Any value from 00H to 05H should be stored. However, due to some problem, an abnormal value other than 00H to 05H may be stored.

Therefore, in this process, the CP command is used to compare the set value data in the set value storage area (W_SETTEI) with 06H to calculate the difference between them (SPh1), and if the comparison result is negative (“setting”). (When the value Nc <06H "), assuming that the set value Nc is a value within the normal range, the process proceeds to the determination process of step S016 (SPh2: when the carry flag CF = 1, the process of SPh3 is executed), while the process is performed. If the comparison result is not negative (when the set value Nc ≧ 06H), it is assumed that the set value Nc is an abnormal value, and the process proceeds to the power re-turning wait processing route of steps S017 to S020 related to the power re-turning wait processing (the setting value Nc ≧ 06H). SPh2: If the carry flag CF ≠ 1, jump to SYSTEM_400). The details of the power re-on wait processing route will be described later.

If it is determined in the determination process of step S015 that the RAM is not abnormal (step S015: NO), then it is determined whether or not the backup flag BF is a normal value (5AH) (step S016, SPh3 to SPh4). ). For this backup flag BF, "5AH (normal value)" is the backup flag of the RAM in the area when the backup process is normally executed in the process of the second power supply abnormality check process (step S081 in FIG. 16) described later. It is set in the storage area (W_BACKFLG). Therefore, under normal conditions, the backup flag BF should be 5AH. However, there may be a case where the backup flag BF is not a normal value due to some trouble. Therefore, in this process, the value of the backup flag BF (W_BACKFLG) is compared with 5AH (normal value) by the CP instruction to calculate the difference between them (SPh3), and when the comparison result is zero (SPh3). BF = 5AH), assuming that the backup flag BF is a normal value, the process proceeds to the determination process in step S025 (SPh4: if the zero flag ZF = 1, jump to SYSTEM_600), while the comparison result is not zero (BF). ≠ 5AH), assuming that the backup flag BF is an abnormal value, the process shifts to the power re-on wait processing route described later (SPh4: When the zero flag ZF = 0, SPi1 of SYSTEM_400 at the next address is executed).

When the backup flag BF is also a normal value (5AH) and the RAM is not abnormal, the process proceeds to the RAM clear branch determination process shown in FIG. 6B (step S025, SYSTEM_600 in FIG. 26B). This RAM clear branch determination process is a process of determining whether or not to shift the processing state to the'RAM clear processing route (RAM clear mode)'.

Here, the RAM clear branch determination process is executed in a combination in which the value of the W register is other than W (1, 1, 1), specifically, as shown in FIG. 25, the setting key switch signal (0th). This is the case where at least one of the bit), the door open signal (fifth bit), and the RAM clear signal (sixth bit) is in the OFF state (when the determination result in step S014 is NO). Of these, in order for the RAM clear processing route transition condition to be satisfied, it is sufficient that at least the RAM clear signal is in the ON state, that is, the sixth bit is 1.

Therefore, in the RAM clear branch determination process, it is determined whether or not the sixth bit of the W register is 1. First, the value of the 6th bit of the W register is set in the carry flag CF (SPj1), and then, if the carry flag CF is 1 (CF = 1) by the JR instruction of SPj2, the RAM clear processing route transition condition is set. Assuming that it is established, the process jumps to the process of step S029, which is the head process of the RAM clear process route, that is, to'SYSTEM_200'shown in FIG. 26A. However, if the carry flag CF is not 1 (CF ≠ 1), it is assumed that the RAM clear processing route transition condition is not satisfied, and the setting confirmation branch determination process in step S026, which is the next process, that is, SYSTEM_600 shown in FIG. 26B. The processing of SPk1 of is executed. The details of the setting confirmation branch determination process (step S026) will be described later.

(B. RAM clear processing route (RAM clear mode): S025 → S029 to S032)
The processing content of the RAM clear processing route will be described. In the source code shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B, the execution order of the processing by the RAM clear processing route is indicated by a thick arrow and a number related to the “at the time of RAM clear” column. In the following, in order to avoid duplicate description, the processing of steps S029 to S032 will be mainly described among the RAM clear processing routes.

When shifting to the RAM clear processing route, first, the address of the RAM clearing command transmission address table (D_MKCADR2) in FIG. 28B is acquired (steps S029, SPe2), and then the transmission command table selection process (_MKCADR) in FIG. 11 is executed. (Step S030, SPf2 of SYSTEM_250). The address acquisition process of step S029 and the address acquisition process of step S024 already described are substantially the same except for the address table to be acquired (see SPd1 and SPe2).

(28B. Command transmission address table at the time of RAM clear (D_MKCADR2): FIG. 28B)
FIG. 28B shows the above-mentioned RAM clearing command transmission address table. Since the basic configuration of this RAM clearing command transmission address table is the same as the setting change command transmission address table shown in FIG. 28A, the details thereof will be described while omitting as appropriate.

When the command transmission address table at the time of RAM clear is referred to, as shown in FIGS. 28B (B) to 28B (D),
(B) "RAM clear command creation table (D_BA02)",
(C) "Spec specification command creation table (D_SPEC)",
(D) "Customer waiting command creation table (D_BA04)",
The three types of command creation tables are sequentially selected (the number of loops is 3), and the command data defined in these command creation tables are sequentially transmitted to the effect control unit 24 in three loops (FIG. Refer to the transmission command table selection process in 11). That is, in the RAM clear processing route, three types of commands, a RAM clear command (BA02H), a spec specification command (F611H), and a customer waiting command (BA04H), are transmitted to the effect control unit 24 in this order. (Refer to the description column of "RAM clear" in FIG. 29).

When the effect control unit 24 receives the RAM clear command (BA02H), the effect mode is set to the "normal effect mode" in the initial state, the effect state is returned to the initial state, and the RAM is cleared by using the effect means. The notification effect (error notification corresponding to RAM clear) is executed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). For example, the decorative lamp 45 is turned on in all red, an alarm sound when the RAM is cleared is output from the speaker 46, and an effect image such as "RAM is being cleared" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. Further, in step S029, the RAM clear command is transmitted and the customer waiting command is transmitted, but the customer waiting effect is not executed at this timing, and at least after the RAM clear notification effect is executed, the customer waiting effect is executed. To execute. For example, the alarm sound is faded out, and the liquid crystal display device 36 is provided with a demo start waiting effect (when waiting for a waiting time of 180 seconds until the customer waiting effect starts (demo screen display start)) or a demo screen (waiting time of 180 seconds). If you want to start the customer waiting effect immediately without waiting) is displayed. In any case, the RAM clear notification effect is executed with the highest priority.

After completing the transmission command table selection process (step S030), the area RAM clear process (step S031, SPg1 to SPg3) and the initial data setting process at power-on (step S032, SPg4) are the same as the setting change process route described above. ~ SPg6) is executed. As a result, the RAM clear processing route is completed, and the processing state is shifted to the processing of step S033 (SYSTEM_850) at the confluence point.

In the in-region RAM clearing process (step S031) according to the present embodiment, the set value storage area (W_SETTEI) in the in-region RAM is not initialized. Therefore, when the RAM clear processing route is executed, only other game data (data related to the normal data storage area) is cleared without changing the set value when the power is cut off. For example, the set value remains the same as when the power was turned off last time, but the game is started in the initialized state (normal state and initial state without hold data) such as the game state and hold data. Will be. As a result, for example, if you want to take over only the set value from the sales of the previous day, you can clear the RAM with a simple operation of ON / OFF of the RAM clear switch 98 without having to perform the setting change operation with many work processes. There is an advantage.

Returning to the description of the RAM clear branch determination process (step S025) of FIG. 6B. When the RAM clear processing route transition condition is not satisfied in the RAM clear branch determination processing, that is, when the value of the sixth bit of the W register obtained by SPj1 in FIG. 26B is 0 (carry flag CF ≠ 1). ), The setting confirmation branch determination process in step S026, that is, the process of SPk1 in FIG. 26B is executed.

This setting confirmation branch determination process is a process of determining whether to shift the processing state to the'setting confirmation processing route (setting confirmation mode)'or the'backup return processing route (backup return mode)'. Specifically, whether or not the W register value is a combination of W (1, 1, 0), that is, whether the setting key switch signal (0th bit) and the door opening signal (5th bit) are in the ON state. Is determined (step S026). When the value of the W register is a combination of W (1, 1, 0) (step S026: YES), it is assumed that the setting confirmation mode transition condition is satisfied, and the "setting confirmation process" of step S027 is executed. If it is other than (step S026: NO), it is assumed that the backup return mode transition condition is satisfied without satisfying the setting confirmation mode transition condition, and the “backup recovery process” of step S028 described later is executed.

If the setting confirmation branch determination process is described according to the source code shown in FIG. 26B, the value of the W register of the first operand is compared with the 8-bit data '00100001B' specified by the second operand by the CP instruction. If the comparison result (subtraction result) is zero, that is, W (1, 1, 0), 1 is set in the zero flag ZF, and if it is not zero, that is, W. If it is not (1, 1, 0), 0 is set in the zero flag ZF (SPk1). Then, if the zero flag ZF is 1 by the JR instruction of SPk2, it is assumed that the setting confirmation mode transition condition is satisfied, and the next process, the program of SYSTEM_650 (SPm1 to SPm20), that is, the setting confirmation process of step S027 is executed. do. However, if the zero flag ZF is not 1 (zero flag ZF = 0), the setting confirmation mode transition condition is not satisfied, in other words, it is assumed that the backup return mode transition condition is satisfied, and the processing state is changed to the backup restoration process described later ( Move to step S028) (jump to SYSTEM_800).

(C. Setting confirmation processing route (setting confirmation mode): S026 → S027)
The setting confirmation process in step S027 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6B, 13 and 26A to 26B. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the details of the setting confirmation process. In the source code shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B, the execution order of the processing by the setting confirmation processing route is indicated by a thick arrow and a number related to the “at the time of setting confirmation” column. In the following, in order to avoid duplicate description, the setting confirmation processing in step S027 will be mainly described among the setting confirmation processing routes.

In FIG. 13, the CPU 201 first sets the command data (E021H) for which the setting is being confirmed in the DE register pair (step S930, SPm1), and the acquired command data is subjected to the command transmission process (_CMDOUT) to the effect control unit 24. (Step S931, SPm2). When the effect control unit 24 receives the setting confirmation command, the effect means is used to execute the setting confirmation effect. For example, an effect image such as "setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

(Ω: When notifying a door opening error)
By the way, when the door opening error is configured to be able to be notified, when confirming the set value, which of the door opening error notification and the setting confirmation effect is prioritized is notified in the same manner as when the setting is changed as described above. However, in order to clearly notify the processing status, the notification priority of the setting confirmation effect is higher than that of the door opening error notification, as in the same event as the setting change effect and the setting change completion effect described above. It can be determined or the door opening error notification can be notified by using one effect means, and the setting change completion effect can be notified by using another effect means.

Next, the set value data is acquired from the set value storage area (W_SETTEI) in the C register (step S932, SPm3).

Next, the first power supply abnormality check process (_ mightCHK) of the subroutine is called and executed by the CALLV instruction (step S933, SPm4).

Next, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch signal (setting key switch 94) is in the ON state (steps S934 to S936, SPm5 to SPm7). Specifically, the data of the input port 1 (P_INPT1) is transferred to the A register (SPm5), the 8-bit data of the input port 1 (P_INPT1) transferred to the A register, and the logical product of the mask data "00000001B" ( AND) is taken and the bits other than the 0th bit corresponding to the setting key switch signal are masked (SPm6). As a result, the ON / OFF state of the current setting key switch signal is acquired in the A register.

When the setting key switch signal is in the ON state, the value of the A register obtained in the above-mentioned mask processing of SPm6 becomes "00000001B", and 0 is set in the zero flag ZF (ZF = 0). In this case, the JR instruction of SPm7 shifts to SPm8, and the 8-bit data '000000010B' specified by the second operand is set in the A register (SPm8). Next, the A register "00000010B" is output to the external terminal port 2 (P_GAIBU2) (SPm9). In the external terminal port 2 (P_GAIBU2), for example, the 0th bit is an information terminal for outputting a setting changing signal, and the 1st bit is an information terminal for outputting a security signal (for example, a setting checking signal). Therefore, the SPm9 outputs a security signal to the hall computer HC from the frame external terminal board 21 (see step S937).

Next, during the setting confirmation, the setting display data to be displayed on the setting display 97 is created (step S938), the data is output controlled, and the current setting value Nc is displayed on the setting display 97 (step S939). ..

The process of steps S938 to S939 will be described with reference to FIG. 27 (A) along with the source code. FIG. 27A shows a source code (SPm3, SPm10 to SPm14) corresponding to the processes of steps S932 and S938 to S939 picked up from the source code shown in FIG. 26B.

With reference to FIG. 27 (A), the CPU 201 first sets the start address of the setting display data table (D_7SEGDATA) shown in FIG. 27 (B) in the HL register pair (SPm10). As shown in FIG. 27B, the setting display data table defines the display pattern data for 7-segments corresponding to the settings 1 to 6.

Next, the set value data stored in the C register, that is, the set value data acquired in SPm3 (see step S932) is transferred to the A register (SPm11). Next, the content of the address specified by the value (HL + A) obtained by adding the value of the above-mentioned HL register pair (starting address of the setting display data table) and the value of the A register (setting value data) is set in the W register. (SPm12). That is, the start address (LED display pattern of 1) of the setting display data table is the reference address, and the setting value data of the A register (any value of 00H to 05H corresponding to the settings 1 to 6) is offset with respect to the reference address. Acts as a value. For example, if the current setting value is 3, the A register (offset value) is 02H, so the LED data "01001111B ('01001111B") specified by the address obtained by adding 02H to the start address of the setting display data table. 3'LED display pattern) ”is set in the W register. Then, the bit data '00010000B (b4-b7: dynamic lighting common 0 to 3)' for setting the dynamic lighting common C3 for displaying the setting display 97 to the ON state is set in the A register (SPm13).

Next, the LED display pattern data of the W register is output to the LED data port (P_LED) for the dynamic lighting data, and the dynamic lighting common data of the A register is output to the LED common port (P_LEDCMN) (step S939, SPm14). The operation of the mnemonic "OUTW (p), WA" shown in SPm14 is "(p + 1, p) ← WA" ('p' indicates an I / O port address).

According to the above SPm10 to SPm14, the current set value Nc is displayed on the setting display 97. It is preferable that the setting confirmation LED (DP unit) does not light or blink in the setting display during the setting confirmation. This is because the setting display during setting confirmation displays the already confirmed setting value, and if the DP unit is turned on even during setting confirmation, is the setting value displayed when the setting value is confirmed by the setting change operation? This is because there is a risk of confusion on the display, whether it is a display during setting confirmation.

Then, when SPm14 is completed, it jumps to SYSTEM_700 (SPm15), and thereafter, until the OFF state of the setting key switch signal (setting key switch 94) is confirmed (until the determination in step S936 becomes NO), SPm4 to SPm15. (Processing of steps S933 to S939) is repeatedly executed. That is, the processes of steps S933 to S939 are repeatedly executed until the setting confirmation (setting confirmation period) is completed, and the current setting value is continuously displayed on the setting display 97 (setting confirmation display).

Returning to the explanation of step S936, when the setting key switch 94 is turned off (step S936: NO), the value of the A register obtained in the mask processing of SPm6 described above becomes "0000000000B", and the zero flag ZF is set. 1 is set (ZF = 1). In this case, assuming that the setting confirmation is completed, the user jumps to SYSTEM_750 (SPm7) and executes the setting confirmation end processing in steps S940 to S943.

Here, as the setting confirmation end process, first, the exclusive OR (XOR) between the WA register pairs is obtained, the value of the WA register pair is updated to 0000H, and then the updated value is used to obtain the LED common port (P_LEDCMN). ) And the external terminal port 2 (P_GAIBU2) are cleared to zero (SPm16 to SPm18). As a result, the setting confirmation display by the setting display 97 is terminated (turned off), and the security signal is stopped (steps S940 and S941). In the present embodiment, after confirming the setting (after confirming the OFF state of the setting key switch signal (setting key switch 94)), the display of the set value is immediately terminated, but this is a setting change in the case of setting confirmation. As described above, the set value itself is not changed, and there is little need to notify the final set value (fixed set value) as after the setting is changed. Therefore, when the setting confirmation is completed (after confirming the setting key switch signal (setting key switch 94) OFF state), a process of displaying the set value for a predetermined time as after the setting change (step S918 in FIG. 10) is performed. The display of the set value is immediately terminated without performing the procedure (step S936: NO → S940). This can contribute to the reduction of the program capacity and the control load.

Then, the E register is incremented (SPm19). When this SPm19 is executed, the value "21H" of the lower byte of the setting checking command data (E021H) acquired in SPm1 (step S930) is set in the E register, so that the INC instruction of SPm19 is executed. As a result, the value of the E register is updated to "22H". As a result, "E022H" in which the value of the D register is "E0H (see SPm1)" and the value of the E register is "22H", that is, the'setting confirmation end command'data is acquired in the DE register pair (see). Step S942, SPm1, SPm19). Then, this command data is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process (_CMDOUT) (step S943, SPm20), whereby a series of setting confirmation periods are completed. When the effect control unit 24 receives the setting confirmation end command, the effect during setting confirmation is terminated. As a result, a series of setting confirmation periods have ended. When the effect control unit 24 receives the confirmation end command, the effect during setting confirmation being executed may be simply terminated, but the effect means is used to perform the "setting confirmation end effect" for a predetermined period (predetermined). Time: for example, 5 seconds). For example, the decorative lamp 45 is turned on in all yellow, the speaker 46 outputs a voice (setting confirmation completed sound) such as "setting confirmation is completed ♪", and the liquid crystal display device 36 is output "setting confirmation is completed". It is possible to display the effect image (setting confirmation completion screen) of.

When the above setting confirmation process is completed, the process state shifts to the "backup recovery process" described below (step S028).

(D. Backup recovery processing route (backup recovery mode): Backup recovery processing (step S028) execution route)
Next, the processing contents of the backup restoration processing route will be described with reference to FIGS. 6B, 14 and 26A to 26B. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the backup restoration process. In the source code shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B, the execution order of the processing by the backup restoration processing route is indicated by a thick arrow and a number related to the “at the time of backup restoration” column. In the following, in order to avoid duplicate description, the backup restoration process of step S028 will be mainly described among the backup restoration processing routes.

As described above, the processing route in which the backup restoration process in step S028 is executed includes the route in which the backup restoration process is executed after the setting confirmation process in (I) step S027 and (II) the setting change process. Setting change management process related to the route (step S023), RAM clear process RAM clear process in the area related to the route (step S031), and setting confirmation process The setting confirmation process related to the route (step S027) are not executed. , There is a processing route in which the backup recovery processing is executed independently, and the backup recovery processing route here means a processing route in which the backup recovery processing is executed independently in the latter case. Therefore, in the backup return processing route, as shown in FIG. 25, W (x, y, z) is W (1, 0, 0), W (0, 1, 0), W (0, 0, 0). ) Is executed in any case.

In FIG. 26B, the CPU 201 first calls and executes "backup return command processing (M_MKINFO)" for transmitting an effect control command related to backup return (SPn1). This backup return command process (M_MKINFO) is configured to include SPn1 to SPn4, and these programs realize the process of steps S951 to S957 in FIG.

With reference to FIG. 14, the “backup recovery command processing (M_MKINFO)” of SPn1 will be described. The backup return command process (M_MKINFO) is mainly composed of the processes of steps S951 to S956 shown in FIG.

In FIG. 14, the CPU 201 first acquires the address of the backup return command transmission address table (D_MKCADR1) shown in FIG. 28C (step S951), and then performs the transmission command table selection process (_MKCADR) of FIG. 11 already described. Execute (step S952). The processing of steps S951 to S952 and the processing content of steps S029 to S030 of FIG. 6B described above are substantially the same except that the command transmission address table to be acquired is different.

(28C. Command transmission address table at backup recovery (D_MKCADR1): FIG. 28C)
FIG. 28C shows the above-mentioned backup return command transmission address table. The basic configuration of this backup return command transmission address table is the same as the command transmission address table at the time of setting change in FIG. 28A and the command transmission address table at the time of RAM clear in FIG. 28B, so the details thereof are omitted as appropriate. I will explain while.

When the command transmission address table at the time of backup recovery is referred to in the transmission command table selection process (_MKCADR), as shown in FIG. 28C (A), as shown in FIG. 28C (A).
“Power failure recovery display command creation table (D_BA03)” in FIG. 28C (B),
“Special Figure 1 Hold Number Designation Command Creation Table (D_B0C0M)” in FIG. 28C (C),
“Special Figure 2 Hold Number Designation Command Creation Table (D_B1C0M)” in FIG. 28C (D),
Three types of command creation tables are selected in this order (the number of loops is 3), and the command data defined in these command creation tables are sequentially transmitted to the effect control unit 24 in three loops. (Refer to the transmission command table selection process in FIG. 11). That is, in the backup return processing route, first, the effect control unit 24 has three types: a power failure recovery display command (BA03H), a special figure 1 hold number designation command (B0xxH), and a special figure 2 hold number designation command (B1xxH). Commands will be sent in this order (see the description column of "Return to backup" in FIG. 29).

Here, as for the power failure recovery display command, as shown in FIG. 28C (B), since the added value data is 0, BA03H of the reference command data is transmitted as the command data. However, with respect to the special figure 1 hold number designation command and the special figure 2 hold number designation command, as shown in FIGS. 28C (C) (D), the added value data depends on the values of'W_T1GONUM'and'W_T2GONUM'. B001H and B101H of the reference command data change. This will be described in detail below.

'W_T1GONUM' in the special figure 1 hold number designation command creation table of FIG. 28C (C) is the special figure 1 hold number data storage area of the RAM in the area, and the special figure 2 hold number designation command creation of FIG. 28C (D). 'W_T2GONUM' in the table is a special figure 2 operation reserved ball number data storage area of the RAM in the area. Therefore, the values of "W_T1GONUM" and "W_T2GONUM" vary depending on the number of existing operation holding balls (0 to 4 (maximum holding storage number)).

Therefore, when the special figure 1 operation hold ball designation command creation table is referred to, any one of 00H to 04H corresponding to the special figure 1 operation hold ball number 0 to 4 at the time of power failure (at the time of backup). When the value is acquired as the added value data and the special figure 2 operation hold ball designation command creation table is referred to, in the same manner, any of 00H to 04H corresponding to the special figure 2 operation hold ball number 0 to 4. The value is acquired as added value data. Therefore, the special figure 1 hold number designation command is one of B001H to B005H, and the special figure 2 hold number designation command is any of B101H to B105H, and the command data after the addition is sent to the effect control unit 24. Will be sent. As a result, the effect control unit 24 is correctly notified of the number of operation hold balls at the time of power failure, and the effect control unit 24 is based on the special figure 1 operation hold ball designation command and the special figure 2 operation hold ball designation command. , The hold display units a1 to d1 of the hold display area 76 and the hold display units a2 to d2 of the hold display area 77 can be lit and displayed with the hold icon corresponding to the number of operation hold balls. ..

Further, when the effect control unit 24 receives the power failure recovery display command (BA03H), the effect means is used to display a "recovery completion effect" for notifying that the restoration is completed. For example, an effect image such as "Resume from power failure, please restart the game" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 for a predetermined time.

Then, when the transmission command table selection process in step S952 is completed, the second command data creation process is then executed (step S953).

(15. Second command data creation process: Fig. 15)
FIG. 15 shows a flowchart of the second command data creation process. In this second command data creation process, as shown in FIG. 15, first, the spec specification command data (F611H) is acquired (step S961), and the acquired command data is transferred to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process (_CMDOUT). (Step S962).

Next, the game state designation command data (FAxxH to FExxH) at the time of return is acquired (step S963), and the acquired command data is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process (_CMDOUT) (step S964). The game state specification command at the time of return (FAxxH to FExxH) is, for example, a command for designating the game state number YJ at the time of backup. "FB01H" in the case of (high probability / with electric support), "FC01H" in the case of time saving state (low probability / with electric support), and "FD01H" in the case of latent state (high probability / without electric support) Will be sent. The effect control unit 20 grasps the game state based on the return-time game state designation command data, causes the liquid crystal display device 36 to display a background image of the effect mode corresponding to the game state, and about the decorative design. Displays a combination of decorative symbols for backup restoration (for example, "315": decorative symbol for restoration) (display mode when the second power is turned on (demonstration start waiting effect when RAM is cleared)). After the backup is restored, the game operation is normally started, so that the effect control process according to the effect control command sent from the main control unit 20 is executed according to the processing state after the backup is restored. .. The above-mentioned display mode when the second power is turned on is the same as the display mode when the first power is turned on when the RAM is cleared, and the display mode is kept until the first symbol variation display game after the backup is restored is started. May be maintained. In this case, it is possible to conceal whether or not the setting has been changed. Then, if 180 seconds have passed without starting the game, the customer waiting effect may be executed.

Returning to the description of FIG. 14, when the second command data creation process of step S953 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the special symbol (both of special figures 1 and 2) is non-variable (step S954).

Regarding the determination of whether or not it is non-variable, the status that acquires the special symbol operation status of the special symbol operation status storage area (W_TJOBST) of the RAM in the area and specifies that the acquired status value is non-variable. Determine if it is a value. This "special symbol operation status" is a status value indicating the behavior of the special symbol, and this status value is changed according to the processing status (processing status of the variable display operation of the special symbol), and the special symbol operation status storage area. It is stored in (W_TJOBST). For the special symbol operation status, specify "waiting (01H)" to specify that the behavior of the special symbol is in the standby state for the next fluctuation, and specify that the behavior of the special symbol is changing (variation display). "Variing (02H)", "Confirming (03H)" to specify that the special symbol has stopped (confirmed) and is being displayed (during the special symbol confirmation time), and the special symbol is waiting. In addition, there is a "customer waiting (00H)" that specifies that there is no hold storage (see the special symbol management process in FIG. 16 described later). When the special symbol is non-variable, the special symbol operation status is 01H in standby or 00H in waiting for a customer, but in this determination process, it is "00H" specified in waiting for a customer. Judge whether or not.

Returning to the explanation of the determination process in step S954, when the special symbol is non-variable, that is, when the special symbol operation status is "00H" specified for waiting for a customer (step S954: YES), the command data for waiting for a customer (step S954: YES). BA04H) is acquired (step S955), and the acquired command data is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process (_CMDOUT) (step S956).

As described above, at the time of backup recovery, by the processing of steps S951 to S953, first, BA03H (power failure recovery display command), B0xxH (first special hold quantity designation command:'xx = 01H to 05H'), B1xxH (second). Special hold quantity specification command:'xx = 01H to 05H'), F611H (spec command), FAXxH to FExxH (return game state specification command) are transmitted in this order, and if the special symbol is not changing, BA04H (Customer waiting command) is additionally sent (see the description column of "Return to backup" in FIG. 29).

After completing the command transmission process in step S956, the RAM clear process at the time of backup recovery is subsequently executed (step S957, SYSTEM_800 (SPn2 to SPn4)). On the other hand, when the special symbol is not non-changing, that is, when the special symbol operation status is not "00H" specified for waiting for a customer (step S954: NO), the special symbol is in a changing state or in a waiting state waiting for the next change start. If there is, the RAM clear process at the time of backup recovery is executed without transmitting the customer waiting command (step S957).

In the backup recovery RAM clear process, a specific area of the RAM in the area is cleared at the time of backup recovery. In the present embodiment, although not shown, the start address (0000H address) of the RAM in the area is the set value storage area (W_SETTEI), the 0001H address is the backup flag BF storage area (W_BACKFLG), and the address 0002H to specific. Up to the address (for example, address 0021H) is a specific error-related data storage area to be cleared when the backup is restored. For example, W_PWRCNT (power supply abnormality confirmation counter shown in FIG. 17 described later) to W_SWFTMR3 (winning opening error detection timer 3) are assigned to addresses 0002H to 0021H, and radio error, magnetic error, and vibration are assigned in this range. A storage area related to a specific error such as a detection timer for detecting an error and an error notification timer is defined.

In the backup recovery RAM clear process, as shown in SPn2 to SPn4 of SYSTEM_800 in FIG. 26B, the address of W_BACKFLG (storage area of the backup flag BF) is first set in the HL register pair (SPn2), and then the description has already been described. As the number of processes in the "zero set process (_ZEROSET2)", the address of'W_SWFTMR3 (winning opening error detection timer 3) -the address of W_BACKFLG + 1'is set in the B register (SPn3), and the zero set process (_ZEROSET2) is called. Execute (SPn4). As a result, the storage area of the backup flag BF to the specific storage area related to the error (here, W_SWFTMR3) are cleared to zero.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the backup is restored, only the specific error-related work area is initialized so that the specific error information (radio wave error information, etc.) before the power failure is not carried over. As a result, a specific error can be resolved by simply turning the power on again, that is, by executing the backup restoration process. However, if there is an abnormality in the set value data or the backup flag BF, the RAM error determination process in steps S015 to S016 executes the power restart wait process (step S017 to step S020) described later, and the power is turned on again. The error cannot be cleared unless the setting change operation is executed.

As described above, when the RAM clear processing at the time of backup restoration is completed, the processing state is shifted to the processing of step S033 at the merging point.

(E. Power re-on wait processing route (RAM error mode): Steps S017 to S020))
Next, with reference to FIGS. 6A and 26A to 26B, the processing contents of the power re-on wait processing route will be described. In the source code shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B, the execution order of the processing by the RAM error processing route is indicated by a thick arrow and a number related to the column of "at the time of RAM error". Hereinafter, in order to avoid duplicate description, the processing of steps S017 to S020 will be mainly described.

As described above, the case of shifting to the power re-on wait processing route is "when it is determined that the RAM is abnormal in the determination process of step S015, or the backup flag BF is a normal value in the determination process of step S016. This is the case when it is determined that it is not (5AH).

In the power re-turning wait processing route, first, the power re-turning command data (BA07H) is acquired in the DE register (step S017, SPI1), and the acquired command data is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process (_CMDOUT). Transmission (step S018, SPI2). When the effect control unit 24 receives the power re-on command, the liquid crystal display device 36 is notified of a RAM error (power re-on instruction effect) such as "Return the RAM error power and set the set value to 1." The effect image is displayed, all the effect LEDs are turned off, and the speaker 46 is muted.

Next, the backup flag BF (W_BACKFLG) is cleared to zero (step S019, SPI3), and the first power supply abnormality check process (_ mightCHK) of FIG. 8 is called and executed (step S020, SPI4).

However, after the first power supply abnormality check process of FIG. 8 is executed, the first power supply abnormality check process is repeated indefinitely under the power supply re-on wait state (see SPi5). That is, when an abnormality (RAM error) occurs in the stored contents of the RAM 203, the WDT clear processing (step S701) and the power supply abnormality confirmation processing (steps S702 to S703) are repeated indefinitely under the power supply wait state. Be taken. Therefore, if a RAM error occurs when the power is turned on, the process related to the progress of the game does not proceed thereafter, and the setting change management process in step S023 is executed until the power is turned on again (in the case of this embodiment, the setting change management process is executed). The game operation will be stopped (game stop processing). When a RAM error occurs, the WDT clear process is executed until a power supply abnormality signal is confirmed, and the WDT reset does not occur at the timing when the infinite loop process is repeated. Therefore, if the setting value data and backup data are still in a damaged state, the damaged data will remain even if the power is turned on again, and the setting change processing route will not be executed when the power is turned on. In other words, when the power is turned on again, the power turn-on wait process (steps S017 to S020) is executed again unless it is set to W (1, 1, 1). Therefore, once a RAM error occurs, the RAM error is not resolved even if the power is simply turned on again, the setting change management process in step S023 is executed, and the RAM error is not cleared unless the work area including the setting value storage area is cleared. Is not resolved. Therefore, the power re-turning command is transmitted in step S017, and the effect control unit 24 that receives the command causes the liquid crystal display device 36 to "re-turn on the RAM error power supply" as a RAM error notification (power re-turning instruction effect). Please set the setting value to 1 "and display an effect image to encourage the surroundings to resolve the RAM error.

(∀: Prevention of fraudulent activities related to set values)
By the way, since the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 are provided inside the gaming machine, the front frame 2 (door) must always be opened when operating these switches. Therefore, when the setting change operation or the setting confirmation operation is a'regular operation', the door opening signal (door opening sensor 61) should always be in the ON state. In other words, the setting key switch signal (setting key switch 94) and the RAM clear signal (RAM clear switch 98) are ON even though the door open signal is OFF, that is, the front frame 2 (door) is closed. If it is in a state, it is considered to be an'illegal operation (goto act)'. In particular, since the high and low of the set value is a game factor that has a great influence on the profit of the pachinko hall and the profit of the player, it is necessary to strictly monitor the matters related to the set value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, at least in order to shift to the "setting change mode" related to the setting change, "the door is in the open state (door open signal ON)" is a condition (the "transition destination processing route" in FIG. 25). See the'Change settings' column in the column).

In addition, the current set value is, in principle, kept secret from the player, and if the set value is known to the player, it may have a significant impact on the profits of the pachinko hall. Trouble such as a game table conflict between players may occur. For example, if a player realizes that the settings are low, such as settings 1 and 2, the possibility of playing a game on that machine is reduced, and not only the operating rate of the machine but also the reputation and reliability of the hall are reduced. It has a serious effect on sexuality. Further, if the player realizes that the setting is a high setting such as 5 or 6, a game table conflict will occur between the players, which may lead to a big trouble. Therefore, in this embodiment, not only the transition to the "setting change mode" but also the transition to the "setting confirmation mode" is subject to the condition that "the door is open (door open signal ON)" (Fig.). Refer to the "Setting confirmation" column in the "Migration destination processing route" column of 25). That is, if the door (front frame 2) is closed (door open signal OFF), neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is entered, and therefore the setting cannot be changed or the setting can be confirmed. There is. As a result, even clever goto acts such as secretly aiming to change settings or confirm settings by using fraudulent equipment with the door closed are disabled, and the effect of preventing fraudulent activities is enhanced.

On the other hand, RAM clearing and backup recovery are not related to setting changes, and it is considered that the degree of influence on the interests of pachinko halls and players is small. Therefore, the ON / OFF state of the door open signal is not a condition for shifting to the RAM clear mode or the backup recovery mode. However, when RAM clear is executed, the game state returns to the initial state (normal state), the production mode is initialized accordingly, and other history and game settings related to the game are changed. , It can be said that it is an operation that can affect the progress of the game. In consideration of this point, "the door is open (door open signal ON)" may be a condition for the transition to the RAM clear mode. In this case, the transition condition to the RAM clear mode should be only "setting key switch signal OFF, door open signal ON, and RAM clear ON (W (x, y, z) = W (0, 1, 1))". Only the transition to the backup return mode is an embodiment that does not require the ON / OFF state of the door open signal.

Further, in the present embodiment, the three signals of'setting key switch signal, door open signal, and RAM clear signal', which are the determination information related to the branch determination process of steps S014, S025, and S026, are set to specific input ports (input port 1). (P_INPT1)) is configured to be input, and the states (ON / OFF states) of these signals are collectively acquired (see step S067 in FIG. 7 and Spa23 to Spa24 in FIG. 26A), and branch determination processing. Judging (simultaneously) determining (simultaneously) the states of these signals together (see steps S014 in FIG. 6A, SPb1 to SPb3 in FIG. 26A, steps S026 in FIG. 6B, SPk1 to SPk2 in FIG. 26B) and the like. It has been realized. As a result, the program capacity can be reduced, the branch determination process can be simplified, and the control load can be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the state of the door open signal is not a transition condition for the transition to the RAM clear processing route (the state of the door open signal is irrelevant), two signals, the setting key switch signal and the RAM clear signal, are used. However, in the setting change branch determination process in step S014, the state of the switch signal is other than W (1, 1, 1), that is, W (x, y, z). Since it is known in advance that the remaining 7 types of combinations are among the 8 types of combinations (the determination result in step S014 is NO), at least the RAM clear signal ON / OFF state is determined as to whether or not the transition is possible. It is only necessary to determine (only the value of the 6th bit of the W register needs to be determined). Also, regarding the transition to the backup recovery processing route, the status of the door open signal is not a transition condition (regardless of the status of the door open signal), so the status of the two signals, the setting key switch signal and the RAM clear signal. However, in advance, the setting change branch determination process of step S014 and the RAM clear branch determination process of step S025 are executed, and at the stage of the setting change branch determination process of step S026, W (x, It is only necessary to determine whether or not y, z) is W (1, 1, 0). These points also simplify the determination process and reduce the control load.

<29. Summary of effect control commands transmitted in each processing route: Fig. 29>
FIG. 29 shows the types of effect control commands transmitted in each processing route of “setting change”, “RAM clear”, “setting confirmation”, “backup recovery”, and “waiting for power-on again (RAM error)” described above, and their transmission. It is explanatory drawing which showed the order.

In FIG. 29, the command type in which the inside of the frame is colored in gray is shown as an individual command type in each processing route, and the command type in which the inside of the frame is white is shown as a command type that can be transmitted in common. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29, the setting change processing route "setting changing command (BA5AH) and setting completion command (BA09H)", the RAM clear processing route "RAM clear command (BA02H)", and the setting confirmation process. The route "setting confirmation command (E021H) and setting confirmation end command (E022H)" and the power-on wait processing route "power-on-waiting command (BA07H)" are the command types sent independently by the processing route. ing.

In addition, the "power failure recovery display command (BA03H), hold number designation command (B0xxH, B1xxH), and recovery game state designation command (FAxxH to FExxH)" are commonly transmitted in the setting confirmation processing route and the backup recovery processing route. In addition, the "spec specification command (F611H) and the customer waiting command (BA04H)" are command types that are commonly transmitted by processing routes other than the power-on waiting processing route. .. However, the customer waiting command (BA04H) related to the setting confirmation processing route and the backup return processing route is transmitted only during non-variation.

As described above, after finishing the processing according to the combination of the ON / OFF state of the setting key switch 94, the RAM clear switch 98, and the door opening sensor 61, the process proceeds to the process of step S033 which is the merging point.

With reference to FIG. 6B, when the process proceeds to step S033, the contents of all the registers are saved, the operation check timer setting process of the program outside the region is executed, and the contents of all the saved registers are restored (steps S033 to S033). S035). In the operation confirmation timer setting process of step S034, necessary initial settings for executing the confirmation operation of whether or not the performance indicator 99 is operating normally are performed. This confirmation operation is a "full blinking display (operation confirmation display)" in which the display modes of the four 7-segment displays 99a to 99d are periodically repeated for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) to turn on all lights and turn off all lights. Control according to the aspect. This makes it possible to check for problems such as turning off lights due to disconnection and missing segments. The process related to the operation confirmation display is executed by the performance display monitor process during the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later (step S102 in FIG. 16 described later).

Next, a CTC setting process for generating a timer interrupt periodically every 4 ms is executed (step S036). After that, the interrupt request signal to the interrupt controller is periodically output, and the main control side timer interrupt process (4 ms interrupt process) shown in FIG. 16 is executed.

Next, assuming that the game startable state is ready, the launch control signal (launch permission signal ES) that permits the launch operation of the launch device 32 is set from the OFF state (launch prohibition state) to the ON state (launch permission state) (step). S037). As a result, after that, the firing operation is allowed, and if the firing operation handle 15 is operated, the game ball can be launched. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B, the firing control signal is controlled to the prohibited state before the CTC setting process (step S036) is executed (see step S054 in FIG. 7). Therefore, the firing operation is prohibited at least until each processing of setting change, setting confirmation, RAM clear in area, and backup restoration processing route is completed. As a result, it is possible to prevent an inadvertent firing operation from being executed while the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed.

In this embodiment, the payout control board 29 receives the launch control signal from the main control unit 20 and allows the launch operation by the launch control board 28, in other words, the main control unit 20 passes through the payout control board 29. It is configured to indirectly control the launch control board 28. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the launch control signal may be directly output to the launch control board 28 to allow the launch operation.

Next, the game start command data (BA77H) is acquired, and the acquired command data is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process (_CMDOUT) already described (steps S038, S039). When the effect control unit 24 receives the game start command, it executes an initial operation (initialization operation) related to a movable body accessory such as a clock-shaped accessory 80 or a flower-shaped accessory 90. However, during the initialization operation, the image display mode of the liquid crystal display device 36, the light emission mode of the decorative lamp 45, and the sound output from the speaker 46 do not change. The initialization operation works exclusively as an operation check when the power is turned on for the movable body accessory.

Then, when a series of power-on processing (steps S011 to S039: game start pre-processing) is completed, the infinite loop processing of the game processing steps S040 to S045 related to the normal game progress is executed. As a result, after that, the game is controlled to a state in which the progress of the game is possible (a state in which the game can be started).

(Game processing related to normal game progress: Loop processing of S040 to S045)
When the process of step S039 is completed, the loop process of steps S040 to S045 is started. Here, first, various random number update processes are executed (step S041) with the CPU set to the interrupt disabled state (step S040). In this various random number update process, various software random numbers (random numbers circulating in a predetermined numerical range by increment processing) used in the special symbol variation display game and the normal symbol variation display game are updated. For example, a random number for special symbol determination used for a symbol lottery, a random number for an auxiliary hit lottery (a random number for an auxiliary hit determination used for a winning lottery per auxiliary, and a normal symbol determination used for a symbol lottery per auxiliary). Random numbers used to change the initial value (start value) of random numbers (random numbers) (initial value random numbers for special symbol judgment, initial value random numbers for auxiliary hit judgment, etc.), random numbers for fluctuation patterns used for selecting fluctuation patterns, etc. Update.

After completing the various random number update processes (step S041), all the registers are then saved in the stack area (step S042), and the processing performance display monitor aggregation division process required for calculating the base value of the program outside the area is executed (step S042). Step S043), all registers are restored (step S044).

Here, the test is performed from the time when the power is turned on for the first time (at the time of shipment) or when all the RAMs outside the area are cleared (when the RAM is cleared due to a base value counting error) until the total number of outs reaches a predetermined number (for example, 299). As a section, only the number of outs in all states is counted, and the base value etc. are not measured. This is in consideration of conducting an operation test when the gaming machine is installed in the pachinko hall for the first time. It is necessary to exclude the prize balls and out balls from such an operation test from the measurement targets. Therefore, the first measurement (first measurement) starts after the end of the test section. In the above test section, when displaying the real-time base value in order to notify that the current measurement is the test section, "bL." Is blinked on the identification display unit and "bL." Is displayed on the base display unit. --- "is lit and displayed. When displaying the history base value, "b6." Is blinked on the identification display unit, and "---" is lit on the base display unit.

If the total number of out-of-states reaches a predetermined specified number (here, 60,000) after the first (first) measurement is started, the base value (first base value) at this point is displayed in the performance of RAM 203. It is stored in the storage area, and the current number of payouts during normal operation, the number of outs during normal operation, and the number of outs in all states are cleared to zero for the second measurement. That is, every time the specified number of 60,000 is counted, the current base value is stored, and the normal payout number, the normal out number, and the total state out number during measurement are stored for the next base value measurement. Clear to zero. Since the history base value is not saved at the time of the first measurement, "bL. **" ('**' is the base value currently being measured) is displayed when displaying the real-time base value, and the history base is displayed. When displaying the value, "b6 .--" is displayed. However, the identification display unit "b6." Is designed to blink to notify that it is the first measurement.

Then, after finishing the performance display monitor aggregation division processing and restoring all the registers (step S044), the interrupt enabled state is set (step S045), the process returns to the processing of step S040, and thereafter, steps S040 to S045. Repeat the process of (main loop process). The CPU 201 repeatedly executes various random number update processes and performance display monitor aggregation / division processes, except during the timer interrupt process that is intermittently executed.

<16. Main control side timer interrupt processing: Fig. 16>
Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the timer interrupt processing on the main control side will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process on the main control side. This main control side timer interrupt process is started by an interrupt from the CTC at regular time intervals (about 4 ms), and is interrupted and executed during the execution of the main control side main process.

In FIG. 16, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 immediately executes the second power supply abnormality check process without saving the contents of the register (step S081). In this power supply abnormality check process, as shown in FIG. 17 described later, the power supply level supplied from the power supply board is monitored, and backup processing is performed when a power supply abnormality occurs. Therefore, the second power supply abnormality check process functions as a backup means for retaining the stored contents of the RAM (here, the RAM in the area) even after the power supply is cut off.

Next, the timer management process is executed (step S082). The timer values of various timers used for the game operation control of the game machine 1 are updated here.

Next, the input management process is executed (step S083). For detection information of various sensors and switches provided in the game machine 1 and input information of a state signal from the payout control board 29 (information about an ON / OFF signal, information about a rising state (ON edge, OFF edge), etc.) Based on this, input data is created and the winning counter is updated. The number of out balls is managed in the process related to the performance information of the program outside the region (step S043 in FIG. 6B, step S102 described later).

Next, the setting abnormality check process is executed (step S084). In the setting abnormality check process, it is determined whether or not the set value data (W_SETTEI) is normal, and error processing related to the set value is executed based on the determination result. The details of the setting abnormality check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the random number management process in the timer interrupt is executed (step S085). In the random number management process in the timer interrupt, the random numbers related to each variable display game are updated periodically. Specifically, in order to make the count value of the random number counter random, random numbers are updated (+1 addition for each interrupt) and random numbers for soft random numbers such as special symbol judgment random numbers and auxiliary hit judgment random numbers. Every time the counter goes around, the process of changing the start value of the random number counter is executed.

Next, the error management process is executed (step S089). In this error management process, based on the detection information related to various switches and sensors, the status signal from the payout control board 29, etc., it is monitored whether or not an error (abnormality) has occurred in the game operation, and an error has occurred. In that case, error processing is executed according to the error type. In this error management process, an error command (command including error type information) transmission process according to the error type to the effect control unit 24, an error release command transmission process when the error is canceled, and a specific error occur. This includes processing such as forced stop control processing of the game operation in the case of an error.

Next, the prize ball management process is executed (step S090). In this prize ball management process, the winning counter is confirmed, and if there is a winning, a payout control command for specifying the number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 29. When the payout control board 29 receives the payout control command, the payout control board 29 controls the game ball payout device 19 based on the prize ball number information included therein, and causes the payout operation for the designated number of prize balls to be executed.

Next, the normal symbol management process is executed (step S091). In this normal symbol management process, necessary processing is executed for the normal symbol variation display game (normal symbol variation display operation). Here, whether or not a game ball is detected by the normal symbol start port sensor 37a is monitored, and if the game ball is detected, predetermined game information (random number for auxiliary hit determination, etc.) required for the auxiliary hit lottery is input. It is acquired (Random number acquisition process for Fuzu), and the game information is stored as hold data (Holding ball for operation of Fuzu) up to the maximum number of hold storages (4 in this case) (Hold storage process for Fuzu). Then, when a predetermined variation display start condition is satisfied, an auxiliary hit lottery based on the normal symbol operation holding ball is performed, a variation pattern of the normal symbol is selected based on the auxiliary hit lottery result, and a stop display mode of the normal symbol (normal stop). Design) is decided. Further, here, in order to operate the normal symbol in a variable display operation, the LED display data for the variable display is created if it is changing, and the LED display data for the stop display is created if it is not changing (normally). Design display data update processing).

Next, the ordinary electric accessory management process is executed (step S092). In this ordinary electric accessory management process, the process necessary for executing the Fuden open game is executed. Here, when the lottery result of the auxiliary hit lottery is a hit, the solenoid control data setting process for the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c is executed. Based on the solenoid control data set here, an excitation signal is output to the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c in the solenoid management process of step S100 described later, whereby the opening / closing operation pattern of the movable wing piece 47 is changed. Be controlled.

Next, the special symbol management process is executed (step S093). In this special symbol management process, necessary processing is mainly executed for the special symbol variation display game (variation display operation of the special symbol). Details of this special symbol management process will be described later in FIG.

Next, the special electric accessory management process is executed (step S095). In this special electric accessory management process, the process necessary for executing and controlling the winning game is executed. Details of this special electric accessory management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 23.

Next, the right-handed notification information management process is executed (step S097). In this right-handed notification information management process, the right-handed display device 39b is turned on when the game is in a "right-handed advantageous" gaming state (in the case of this embodiment, a hit game, a reduced working hours state, or a probable change state). LED data is created, and when the game is in a "left-handed advantageous" gaming state (normal state), LED data for turning off the right-handed display device 39b is created.

Next, the LED management process is executed (step S098). In this LED management process, the output control of the control signal (dynamic lighting data) for the LED display device of the normal symbol display device 39a, the special symbol display device 38a, 38b, the composite display device 38c, and the right-handed display device 39b is executed. The control signal based on the LED display data created in the above-mentioned normal symbol management process (step S091), special symbol management process (step S093), and right-handed notification information management process (step S097) is output by this LED management process. Will be done.

Next, the external terminal management process is executed (step S099). In this external terminal management process, various outer end signals are created through the frame external terminal board 21, and output control is executed for an external device such as a data counter DT or a hall computer HC.

Next, the solenoid management process is executed (step S100). In this solenoid management process, based on the solenoid control data set in the ordinary electric accessory management process (step S092) and the special electric accessory management process (step S094), the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c and the large winning opening solenoid 52c are used. On the other hand, the output control of the excitation signal is executed. As a result, the opening / closing operation of the lower starting opening 35 and the large winning opening 50 is realized.

Next, in order to execute the performance display monitor processing of the program outside the region, all the registers are saved, the performance display monitoring processing is executed, and then all the registers are restored (steps S101 to 103). In the performance display monitor processing, the display control of the performance display 99, the monitoring of the presence or absence of an abnormality related to the base value calculation, and the input data regarding the presence or absence of a prize for each winning opening related to the performance display based on the switch input data acquired in step S083. Perform necessary processing related to base value calculation such as creation. The data created here is the number of normal payouts, the number of normal outs, the base value, and all the states in the performance display monitor aggregation division process (step S043 in FIG. 6B) during the main control side main process, which has already been described. It is used to count the number of outs.

Next, the count value of the WDT is cleared (step S104). As a result, the WDT is reset and the count value is returned to the initial value.

When the processing of the above steps S081 to S104 is completed, the timer interrupt processing is terminated and the main control side main processing is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

<17. Second power supply abnormality check process: Fig. 17>
Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the second power supply abnormality check process (step S081) in FIG. 16 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the second power supply abnormality check process.

In FIG. 17, the CPU 201 first acquires the input information of the power supply abnormality signal indicating a power failure from the external signal input register (PINSTS) (step S711). Then, it is determined whether or not the levels of the power supply abnormality signals match twice in succession (step S712), and the processes of steps S711 to S712 are repeated until they match. When the levels of the power supply abnormality signals match (step S712: YES), it is determined whether or not the power supply abnormality signal has an abnormality level (step S713).

When the power supply abnormality signal is not at an abnormality level (step S713: NO), the backup flag BF is cleared (step S723), the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter is cleared (step S724), and the second power supply abnormality check process is exited.

On the other hand, when the power supply abnormality signal is at an abnormal level (step S713: YES), 1 is added to the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter (step S714), and the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter after the addition reaches the upper limit value Y. It is determined whether or not (step S715). This takes into consideration that the data acquired from the external signal input register (PINSTS) may be garbled due to the influence of noise or the like, and the acquired data continuously maintains an abnormal level. When the upper limit value Y (for example, Y = 2) is reached, it is determined that the AC power supply is actually cut off.

When the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter has reached the upper limit value Y (step S715: YES), it is assumed that a power supply abnormality has occurred, and the backup process is executed. Specifically, the power supply abnormality confirmation counter is cleared (step S716), the firing control signal is set to the OFF state (step S717), and the backup flag BF is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S718). The backup flag BF may be set to the ON state, a checksum operation for calculating the checksum value may be executed, and the operation result may be stored in a predetermined area (SUM storage area) of the RAM 203. Here, the checksum operation is an 8-bit addition operation targeting the work area of the RAM 203. The checksum value stored in the SUM storage area at the time of the electric interruption is maintained by the backup power supply together with other data of the RAM 203. In the case of the embodiment in which the checksum is stored at the time of this backup, the checksum determination process is performed as a part of the RAM error determination process (see steps S015 to S016 in FIG. 6A) or in place of steps S015 to S016. "Can be provided. In this case, in the checksum determination process, the checksum at the time of power restoration is calculated, the calculated checksum value is compared with the checksum value stored in the SUM storage area at the time of power failure, and the comparison results do not match. The configuration may be such that the power re-on wait process (RAM error process) in steps S017 to S020 is executed, and if the comparison results match, the process proceeds.

If a power failure occurs during the setting change management described above (step S023 in FIG. 6A), the main control side timer interrupt process is before the activation (before the execution of step S036 in FIG. 6B). 2 The power supply error check process is not executed and the backup process cannot be performed. In this case, if a power failure occurs after the backup flag BF is cleared to zero in step S901 during setting change management, it is determined that a RAM error has occurred at the next power restoration (determination in step S016 of FIG. 6A). The result is NO (BF ≠ 5AH)), the process shifts to the power re-on wait processing route (steps S017 to S020 in FIG. 6A), and the control is performed under the power re-on wait state.

Returning to the description of FIG. 17, when the process of step S718 is completed, the power cutoff command data (BA33H) is acquired, and the acquired command data is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process (_CMDOUT) (. Step S719). The power off command (BA33H) is an effect control command that specifies that a power failure has occurred. This power cut command is composed of a power cut A command and a power cut B command each having a length of 16 bits, and is continuously transmitted every 8 bits in this order. The reason for adopting such a configuration is to prevent the power failure status from being erroneously notified to other control units due to the influence of noise or the like.

Next, 01H is set in the RAM protect register (RAMPT), and data writing to the RAM is prohibited in the subsequent processing as'RAM access prohibited area invalid, RAM protect enabled'(step S720). Then, the output data of all the output ports are cleared (step S721). As a result, it is prevented that the RAM is abnormally rewritten due to the reading of an invalid address of the RAM due to the voltage drop, and the same type of power supply abnormality check process is started later than the main control unit 20. Unreasonable data transmission to the board 29 can be prevented.

Then, the generation of the interrupt signal is prohibited by the setting process for the CTC, and the CPU is set to the interrupt disabled (step S722) so that the power supply voltage drops while repeating the infinite loop process and the CPU becomes inactive. wait.

<18. Setting error check process: Fig. 18>
Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the setting abnormality check process (step S084) in FIG. 16 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a setting abnormality check process.

In FIG. 18, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the setting error flag is in the ON state (= 5AH), that is, a RAM error (setting error error) (step S731). When the setting error flag is in the ON state (step S731: = 5AH), the setting abnormality check process is exited without doing anything. On the other hand, when the setting error flag is not in the ON state (step S731: ≠ 5AH), the set value Nc is acquired from the set value storage area (W_SETTEI) of the RAM in the area, and the value corresponds to the normal value (set values 1 to 6). It is determined whether or not it is (a value of any of 00H to 05H) (step S732). This determination process is a process common to the contents of the determination process in steps S903 and S913 during the setting change management process of FIG.

When the acquired set value Nc is not any of the values 00H to 05H (step S732: NO), it is assumed that an abnormality has occurred in the set value data, and the setting error flag is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S733). Then, the set value abnormality command data (0E33H) is acquired (step S734), and the acquired command data is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process (_CMDOUT) (step S735), and the setting abnormality check process is exited. .. When the effect control unit 24 receives the set value abnormality command, the effect means is used to execute the setting abnormality error notification (RAM error notification). For example, the decorative lamp 45 is turned on in all red, and an error display such as "RAM is abnormal. Please call a staff member" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. The case where the game is being executed will be described later with reference to FIGS. 18, 20, and 21.

<19. Special symbol management process: Fig. 19>
Next, the special symbol management process (step S093) in FIG. 16 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol management process.

In FIG. 19, the CPU 201 first performs the “special figure 1 start port check process” regarding the special symbol 1 side (upper start port 34 side) (step S301), and then the special symbol 2 side (lower start port 35 side). "Special figure 2 start port check process" is executed (step S302). The details of the special figure 1 start port check process and the special figure 2 start port check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 20.

When the start port check process in steps S301 to S302 is completed, the state of the small hit middle flag is determined (step S303). This "small hit medium flag" is a flag for designating whether or not the small hit game is in progress, and when the flag is in the ON state (= 5AH), it indicates that the small hit game is in progress. , When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the small hit game is not in progress.

When the small hit middle flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S303: ≠ 5AH), then the state of the condition device operation flag is determined (step S304). This "condition device operation flag" is a flag for designating whether or not a big hit game is in progress, and when the flag is in the ON state (= 5AH), it indicates that the big hit game is in progress. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the jackpot game is not in progress.

When the condition device operation flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S304: ≠ 5AH), that is, when neither the small hit game nor the big hit game is performed (step S303: ≠ 5AH and step S304: ≠ 5AH), special The process related to the variable display operation of the special symbol is executed according to the symbol operation status (00H to 03H) (step S305: special symbol operation status branch process). On the other hand, during the small hit game (step S303: = 5AH) or during the big hit game (step S304: = 5AH), the process related to the variation display operation of the special symbol in steps S306 to S308 is not performed as it is. The process proceeds to the special symbol display data update process in step S309. Therefore, when either the small hit game or the big hit game is in progress, the variable display operation of the special symbol is not performed. That is, during the hit game, the stop display mode of the special symbol is held as being fixedly displayed as the small hit symbol or the big hit symbol.

In the special symbol operation status branch processing in step S305, it depends on which of the status values "waiting (00H, 01H)", "changing (02H)", and "confirming (03H)" the special symbol operation status is. Then, the processes of steps S306 to S308 corresponding to each are executed. By these processes, the fluctuation display operation that sets the fluctuation start and fluctuation stop of the special symbol is realized. The details of the special symbol variation start processing (step S306) and the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308), which are closely related to the present invention, will be described later with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22A to 22B, respectively.

After completing any of the processes of steps S306 to S308, the special symbol display data update process of step S309 described later is performed. In this special symbol display data update process, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is changing, and if it is changing, the data of the special symbol that repeats blinking at predetermined time intervals (data for 7-segment blinking display during fluctuation). ), And if the special symbol is not changing, the data for stop display (data for 7-segment blinking display during stop display) is created. The display data of the special symbol created here is output in the LED management process (step S098) of FIG. 16, and variable display and stop display of the special symbol on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b are realized. When the special symbol display data update process is completed, the special symbol management process is exited and the special electric accessory management process of step S095 of FIG. 16 is executed.

(20. Special figure 1 start port check process: FIG. 20)
A special figure 1 start port check process (step S301 in FIG. 19) will be described with reference to FIG. 20. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the details of the special figure 1 start port check process. This special figure 1 start port check process serves as a winning process executed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and is mainly a process related to hold storage when a game ball wins a prize in the upper start port 34. And, it is mainly composed of processing related to pre-reading notice effect (hold addition command). It should be noted that the special figure 1 start port check process and the special figure 2 start port check process differ only in whether the processing content is related to the special figure 1 side or the special figure 2 side. The processing contents are substantially the same. Therefore, in order to avoid duplicate description, the special figure 1 start port check process will be mainly described here.

In FIG. 20, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not a winning (winning ball) is detected at the upper starting opening 34 (step S311).

When the winning of the upper starting opening 34 (special drawing 1 starting opening) is detected (step S311: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of balls held in special drawing 1 is 4 or more (step S312). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is less than the maximum number of reserved balls (here, 4). If the winning of the upper starting port 34 is not detected (step S311: NO), the special figure 1 starting port check process is exited without doing anything.

Special figure 1 When the number of pending balls is 4 or more, that is, when an over-winning exceeding the maximum number of reserved balls occurs (step S312: YES), an over-winning command for designating an over-winning (in the case of special figure 1). B006H, B106H in the case of special drawing 2) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S324). On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is not 4 or more, that is, less than 4 (step S312: NO), 1 is added (+1) to the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 (step S313), and step S314. Proceed to the process of.

Proceeding to the process of step S314, various random numbers used in the special symbol variation display game 1 related to the special figure 1 operation holding ball generated this time are acquired (step S314). Specifically, the current values of the big hit determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number are acquired from various random number counters, and the acquired random number values are stored in the reserved storage area of the RAM in the area. This hold storage area is an area for storing predetermined game information related to the symbol variation display game as an operation hold ball (hold data), and in this hold storage area, the above-mentioned various random numbers as hold data are special symbols. Until the variable display operation of 1 is performed (until the special symbol variable display game 1 is executed), the start conditions are held and stored in the order of establishment (winning order). The reserved storage area includes a reserved storage area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side and the special symbol 2 side (special symbol 1 reserved storage area (first reserved storage area) corresponding to the special symbol 1 and special symbol 2). A special figure 2 hold storage area (second hold storage area) corresponding to the above is provided. These reserved storage areas are provided with a reserved 1 storage area to a reserved n storage area (n is the maximum number of activated reserved balls: n = 4 in the present embodiment), and the reserved data for each of the maximum number of activated reserved balls is provided. Can be stored.

Next, as the winning command data (data corresponding to the lower byte side (EVENT) of the hold addition command) for creating the hold addition command (details will be described later), the look-ahead prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") that prohibits the look-ahead determination is prohibited. ”) Is acquired (step S315), and it is determined whether or not the“ special figure 1 look-ahead prohibition condition ”is satisfied (step S316). The above-mentioned "special figure 1 look-ahead prohibition condition" is a condition for prohibiting the look-ahead determination (prohibiting the look-ahead notice) for the special figure 1 operation holding ball. In the present embodiment, if the special figure 2 operation hold ball can occur with a higher probability than the special figure 1 operation hold ball "under the state with electric support", it is set as "special figure 1 look-ahead prohibited", and conversely, the special figure 1 operation hold ball. If the special figure 1 operation hold ball can occur with a higher probability than the operation hold ball in FIG. 2 under the "state without electric support", it is set as "special figure 2 look-ahead prohibited". In the determination process of step S316, when the current gaming state is a gaming state (time saving state or probable change state) accompanied by an electric support state, the determination result is "YES" as the special figure 1 look-ahead prohibition condition is satisfied. ..

When the above-mentioned special figure 1 look-ahead prohibition condition is satisfied (step S316: YES), the process related to the look-ahead determination (steps S317 to S321) is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of step S322 described later. In this case, the look-ahead determination for the operation hold ball of this special figure 1 is not executed, and the hold addition command having the look-ahead prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") is created (see step S322 described later). ). As a result, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is prohibited (the look-ahead notice effect for the operation hold ball this time is not executed).

When the special figure 1 look-ahead prohibition condition is not satisfied (step S316: NO), then it is determined whether or not the setting error flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S317). When the setting error flag is in the ON state (step S317: = 5AH), that is, when a RAM error (setting error error) has occurred, the process related to the look-ahead determination (steps S317 to S321) is skipped, and a step described later is performed. Proceed to the process of S322. In this case as well, the look-ahead determination for the operation hold ball of this special figure 1 is not executed, the hold addition command having the look-ahead prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") is created, and the look-ahead notice effect is not executed either. In other words, the read-ahead prohibition data (9FH) can be said to be data that specifies that the process related to the look-ahead determination (steps S318 to S321) is not executed.

When the setting error flag is not in the ON state (step S317: ≠ 5AH), the set value command is transmitted and the random number determination process (winning jackpot random number determination process) is executed (step S318). This random number determination process is performed as a part of the'look-ahead determination'process, and here, the "winning lottery at the start of fluctuation (described later)" is executed when the operation holding ball is subjected to the variation display operation. See step S410 in FIG. 21) ”in advance, and perform a'look-ahead winning / failing determination'.

(Set value command)
The above "setting value command" is used when the effect control unit 24 side contains information that can specify the current set value and controls the appearance of the advance notice effect (setting suggestion effect described later) based on the set value. Will be done. This set value command is transmitted every time an operation hold ball is generated in the start port check process. As a result, the effect control unit 24 can control the appearance of the advance notice effect (for example, the setting suggestion effect related to the look-ahead advance notice effect) related to the operation holding ball based on the correct set value information.

In the random number determination process of step S318, first, a hit random number determination table (not shown) is acquired, and a random number value for jackpot determination is acquired. Then, based on the acquired random number value for jackpot determination and the winning random number determination table, the winning lottery (pre-reading winning determination) for the operation pending ball this time is executed, and the lottery result (pre-reading winning result) is acquired.

The hit random number determination table is provided with a hit random number determination table corresponding to each of the special figure 1 operation hold ball (special symbol variation display game 1) and the special figure 2 operation hold ball (special symbol change display game 2). There is. The "random number determination table for special figure 1" is referred to during the special figure 1 start port check process, and the "random number determination table for special figure 2" is referred to during the special figure 2 start port check process. This hit random number determination table is also used when performing a winning lottery in the "random number determination process for determining the operation of a special electric accessory (step S410 in FIG. 21)" described later.

In these hit random number determination tables, the winning type (big hit, small hit, or loss) is determined for each big hit lottery probability state (high probability state (high probability) and low probability state (low probability)). The judgment area (judgment value) for this purpose and the random number value for big hit judgment (size of random number for big hit judgment: 65536) are defined in association with each other. Specifically, the random number value for big hit judgment is any judgment value. The winning type is determined depending on whether or not it belongs to. Therefore, even if the acquired jackpot determination random value belongs to the same determination value, the current jackpot lottery probability (operation probability of the conditional device) depends on whether it is a high probability or a low probability. The winning type may be different, such as "big hit" or "missing" on the other hand.

In the case of the present embodiment, the hit random number determination table is provided with a hit determination table corresponding to each set value (settings 1 to 6) (a table in which at least the lottery probability of a big hit is different depending on the settings 1 to 6). Has been done. Further, in the case of the present embodiment, the ratio of the jackpot lottery probability at the time of high probability to the jackpot lottery probability at the time of low probability (probability fluctuation ratio: high probability / low probability) is the same at each set value, and the ratio is 10. It is set to a value that does not exceed. For example, setting 6 "low probability 1/320, high probability 1/32", setting 5 "low probability 1/330, high probability 1/33", ..., Setting 2 "low probability 1 /". With 390, high probability 1/39 "and setting 1" low probability 1/410, high probability 1/41 ", you will win a big hit.

Further, instead of providing a hit determination table corresponding to each set value (settings 1 to 6), a common hit determination table may be provided for a part of each set value. For example, the "low setting hit random number judgment table" common to settings 1 and 2, the setting 3 is the "setting 3 hit random number judgment table", the setting 4 is the "setting 4 hit random number judgment table", and the settings 5 to 6 are used. It is a common "random number judgment table for high setting" and the like. In this case, a common hit random number judgment table is referred to for some setting values (in this example, setting 1 and setting 2, setting 5 and setting 6), and the profit degree (ball output rate) is the same between the settings. In other words, the setting can be less than 6 steps instead of 6 steps. In this example, it is possible to set the actual setting to "4 steps". In this way, by also using the hit random number determination table with some of the set values, the actual setting can be reduced to less than 6 steps even in a model with 6 steps of settings as in this embodiment. .. Even when a common hit random number determination table is referred to, the original 6-step setting can be made by setting the symbol selection rate of each hit type to a different probability for each set value.

After completing the random number determination process in step S318 described above, the special stop symbol data creation process is then executed (step S319). This special stop symbol data creation process is performed as a part of the'look-ahead determination'process, and here, the "symbol at the start of fluctuation" executed when the operation holding ball is subjected to the fluctuation display operation. "Lottery (see step S411 in FIG. 21 to be described later)" is determined in advance by performing "look-ahead symbol determination".

In the above special stop symbol data creation process, the "design table (not shown) according to the pre-reading winning result obtained in step S318 and the special symbol type (special figure 1 and special figure 2) to be processed this time. ) ”Is selected. Then, the special symbol determination random value obtained in step S314 is acquired, and based on the selected symbol table and the acquired special symbol determination random value, the symbol lottery (look-ahead) for the current operation pending ball is performed. The symbol determination) is executed, and the lottery result (look-ahead symbol result) is acquired.

The above "design table" includes a "big hit symbol table", a "small hit symbol table", and a "missing symbol table" for determining a big hit type, a small hit type, and a loss type, and each symbol table is a special symbol. It is provided according to the type. These symbol tables are also used when performing a symbol lottery at the start of fluctuation in the special stop symbol creation process (step S411 in FIG. 21) described later.

In the symbol table, the determination area (judgment value) for determining the hit type (symbol type) and the special symbol determination random value (for example, the size of the special symbol determination random value: 200) are defined in association with each other. Specifically, the winning type is determined according to a predetermined symbol selection rate depending on which determination value the special symbol determination random value belongs to. In the present embodiment, the special symbol determination data and the special stop symbol number are acquired as the data indicating the lottery result.

The "special symbol determination data" is data that identifies the winning type (winning type: big hit type, small hit type, and loss type), and specifically, the big hits 1 to 11 and the small hit shown in FIG. 1. It is data for identifying which of the losses A to C (not shown) was won. This special symbol determination data is a process that requires winning type information (for example, a game state transition preparation process in step S412 of FIG. 21 described later, a special symbol variation pattern creation process in step S413, and a process related to execution control of a big hit game. The data is used in (special electric accessory management process of FIG. 23) and the like. The above-mentioned "special stop symbol number" is data for designating a special stop symbol mode to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device. , It is used when the main control unit 20 side specifies the stop symbol type of the special symbol. As for the normal symbol, the normal symbol determination data as the symbol determination data is normal as the stop symbol number as well as the special symbol. A stop symbol number is provided.

If there is only one winning type to be drawn, the symbol table may not be provided. For example, if the type of loss is one type of loss A, and if the winning result is a loss without providing a loss symbol table (without performing a symbol lottery), the loss A may be determined as the winning type. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the special figure 2 side has a higher selection rate of the jackpot type that gives a relatively high profit than the special figure 1 side, and the symbol lottery is advantageous for the player. As a result, it is considered that it is more advantageous for the player to receive the lottery of the special symbol variation display game 2 than the special symbol variation display game 1. In particular, in the state with electric support, the winning probability on the lower starting port 35 side is dramatically improved, and the chances of executing the special symbol variation display game 2 are increased. Therefore, in the state with electric support, the game is in a high base game state. Not only that, it is considered to be an advantageous gaming state for the player from the viewpoint of the symbol lottery.

A common symbol table may be defined for all settings, but a symbol table may be defined according to the settings. In this case, it can be configured as follows.
(A) The symbol selection rate of one or more winning types is different in a part or all of each setting. For example, regarding the symbol lottery rate of jackpots 1 to 4 shown in FIG. 4, "7%, 4%, 35%, 13%" is set in the case of setting 1, and "15%, 5%," in the case of setting 6. It can be "30%, 12%".
(B) The probability variation inrush rate (the jackpot symbol selection rate that triggers the transition to probability variation and / or latency) is different in all or part of each setting. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the probability variation inrush rate is 65% (the rate of latent probability and probability variation jackpot is 65%, and the rate of time saving jackpot is 35%). For example, in the case of setting 1. Can set the probability variation inrush rate to 60%, and in the case of setting 6, the probability variation inrush rate can be set to 65%. The same applies to the time saving rush rate (the big hit symbol selection rate that triggers the transition to time saving).
In any case, as the setting becomes higher, the ball ejection performance may be determined to be advantageous to the player.

After completing the special stop symbol data creation process in step S319 described above, the start opening winning random number determination process is then executed (step S320). This start port winning random number determination process is also performed as part of the'look-ahead determination'process, and here, the "variation at the start of fluctuation" executed when the operation hold ball is subjected to the variation display operation. A'look-ahead variation pattern determination'that determines in advance the pattern lottery (see step S413 in FIG. 21 described later) is performed.

When the random number determination process at the time of winning the start opening is entered, the winning lottery result obtained in the random number determination process (step S318) and the look-ahead symbol determination result obtained in the special stop symbol data creation process (step S319) are acquired. Using at least the random number for the fluctuation pattern (step S314), the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation related to the current operation hold ball, that is, the "special" executed when the current operation hold ball is subjected to the fluctuation display operation. The result of the symbol variation pattern creation process (see S413 in FIG. 21 described later) ”is pre-read and determined. Then, based on the read-ahead determination result, the winning command data 1 (second byte (EVENT): lower byte) used for creating the hold addition command is created and updated. As a result, the look-ahead prohibited data "9FH" (see step S315) is updated to a data value (excluding the reserved ball number information) that specifies the content of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern in this process before entering the main process. The contents of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern include, for example, normal fluctuation, N reach loss, weak SP reach loss, medium SP reach loss, strong SP reach loss, N reach jackpot, weak SP reach jackpot, medium SP reach jackpot, strong SP reach jackpot, and 2R latent. Definite / small hit designation etc. are included. Further, the winning expectation degree related to the look-ahead fluctuation pattern is higher in this order, and the higher the look-ahead fluctuation pattern, the higher the winning probability by the look-ahead notice lottery.

After completing a series of look-ahead determination processes in steps S318 to S321 above, the winning command data 2 (MODE) on the upper byte side is subsequently acquired based on the current number of pending balls and the special symbol type (Special Figure 1). "B6H to B9H" is acquired according to 1 to 4 activated holding balls, and "BBH to BEH" is acquired according to 1 to 4 activated reserved balls), and the acquired prize is obtained. Based on the command data 2 (MODE) and the top entry prize command data 1 (look-ahead fluctuation pattern specification information) on the lower byte (EVENT) side, a "hold addition command" is created (step S322) and stored in the RAM 203. (Since the data related to the hold addition command is unnecessary thereafter), the data is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S323). Therefore, this hold addition command includes the look-ahead determination result information (information that can specify the look-ahead fluctuation pattern) obtained in a series of processes related to the look-ahead determination (steps S318 to S320), and the special figure 1 operation hold ball information or the special figure 1. FIG. 2 includes operation hold ball information. However, if the read-ahead prohibition condition is met or an abnormality occurs in the set value data, the look-ahead prohibition data "9FH" is maintained as it is, so that the hold addition command having the look-ahead prohibition data is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. (Refer to the processing route where the determination result in step S315 is NO and the determination result in S316 is NO).

When the hold addition command is transmitted from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24, which receives the command, determines whether or not the look-ahead advance notice effect can be executed unless the information contained in the hold addition command is specified as pre-reading prohibition. A lottery (look-ahead notice lottery) is performed, and if a winner is won, a look-ahead notice effect is created, and based on that scenario, a look-ahead notice effect (hold change notice effect and fluctuation) targeting the current operation hold ball is created. (Continuous notice production at the start) is made to appear.

Further, if the information included in the hold addition command is "pre-reading prohibition designation", the effect control unit 24 generates a pre-reading notice effect without executing the pre-reading notice lottery or forcibly losing the pre-reading notice lottery. Is prohibited. In this embodiment, the hold addition command for which read-ahead prohibition is specified is transmitted regardless of whether or not a setting error has occurred. The reason is as follows.

In the case of the present embodiment, the game operation is not forcibly stopped and controlled even if a setting abnormality error occurs. The first reason is that the resolution of the setting error is solved by performing the setting change operation as described above, but the setting change operation during business is a matter that is enthusiastic from the viewpoint of legal request. There is a high possibility that it falls under the prohibited items. Secondly, if the game operation process is forcibly stopped immediately when a setting abnormality error occurs, the player feels distrust in the sudden stop of the game. For example, when the symbol variation display game in process is executed during normal operation, or when a big hit game is in progress, a setting error error occurs by chance, and the game is controlled so that the game cannot be played immediately. Then, the profit that the player should originally obtain disappears, which causes the player to feel distrust. In consideration of such circumstances, if a setting abnormality error occurs, the error notification is stopped, and the game progress itself is conditional, but the game progresses as it is. The expression "conditionally" here is to prohibit pre-reading notice or forcibly lose the result of the symbol variation display game when a setting abnormality error occurs (FIG. 20). See step S317 during the start port check process and step S409 during the special symbol change start process of FIG. 21 described later). In this way, the reason for proceeding with the game "conditionally" as it is is that when a setting abnormality error occurs, only the error notification is performed, and if no other measures are taken, the effect control process is caused by the problem. This is because there is a risk that the big hit lottery will not be executed correctly.

<21. Special symbol change start processing: Fig. 21>
Next, the special symbol variation start processing (step S306) in FIG. 19 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol change start processing.

In FIG. 21, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is zero (step S401), and if the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is not zero (step S401: NO), the special figure 2 FIG. 2 The processing (steps S403 to S416) at the start of the fluctuation targeting the number of pending balls is executed. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is zero (step S401: YES), it is subsequently determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is zero (step S402), and the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is zero. If the number is not zero (step S402: NO), the process at the start of fluctuation (steps S403 to S416) for the number of balls on hold in FIG. 1 is executed. By the processing of steps S401 and S402, "priority" of which of the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball is preferentially subjected to the variable display operation (which operation holding ball is digested). "Fluctuation order" is decided. In the present embodiment, when the operation holding ball is present in both the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball, the special figure 2 operation holding ball is preferentially digested.

When the number of operating hold balls in both the special figure 2 operation hold ball number and the special figure 1 operation hold ball number is zero (step S401: YES and step S402: YES), the state of "no operation hold ball". Will be. This "no operation hold ball" state is a state in which a special symbol is waiting and there is no hold memory. Therefore, if "no operation hold ball" is set, the process proceeds to step S417, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol operation status is "waiting (00H)" indicating the state of the above "no operation hold ball". Step S417).

If the special symbol operation status in the above "no operation hold ball" state is "waiting (01H)" (step S417: NO) (process during the special symbol confirmation time in FIG. 22A described later). (Refer to step S472 in the middle), the special symbol operation status is switched to "waiting (00H)" (step S418). Then, as an effect control command, a customer waiting command (BA04H) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S419), and the special symbol change start process is exited. As described above, when 180 seconds have passed without the game starting after receiving the customer waiting command, the effect control unit 24 displays the demo start waiting effect and then displays the customer waiting effect. ..

If the number of balls on hold in FIG. 1 or the number of balls on hold in FIG. 2 is not zero (step S401: NO or S402: NO), steps S403 to S416 are sequentially executed. It should be noted that the processing method of steps S403 to S416 described below is substantially different only in the difference between the target of the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the target of the special figure 2 operation holding ball. Is the same. Therefore, in order to avoid duplicate description, unless there is a particular need, the process will be described without distinguishing which operation holding ball is targeted.

Proceeding to step S403, the number of operation-holding balls on the special drawing side to be used for the current fluctuation display operation is subtracted by 1 (step S403), and a "holding subtraction command" including information on the number of operation-holding balls after the subtraction is issued to the effect control unit 24. (Step S404).

Next, the special symbol operation confirmation data is stored (step S405). This special symbol operation confirmation data is information for designating the special symbol type on the fluctuation start side of this time, and is "00H" if the special figure 1 is the fluctuation start side, and if the special figure 2 is the fluctuation start side. For example, "01H" is stored in the special symbol operation confirmation data.

Next, the hold data stored in the hold storage area of the RAM 203 is shifted (step S406), and the hold 4 storage area is cleared to zero (step S407). In the processing of steps S406 to S407, the reserved data stored in the reserved storage area (reserved 1 storage area) corresponding to the reserved storage number n = 1 is read and stored in the determination random number storage area of the RAM in the area. , Hold data stored in the hold storage area corresponding to the hold n storage area (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the hold storage area corresponding to'n-1'(step S406), and hold. 4 Clear the storage area and provide an empty area (step S407). As a result, the start order of the special symbol variation display game matches the order of the number of operation hold balls n (n = 1, 2, 3, 4), and the operation hold balls acquired at the time of winning the start opening are stored in any hold. While it is specified whether it corresponds to the area, it becomes possible to hold and store a new operation holding ball.

Next, the game state information transmission process is executed (step S408). In the game state information transmission process, a state command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. This state command includes at least the game state information that can specify the current game state, and in the present embodiment, the special symbol time reduction counter information (remaining time reduction information) is also included. By this state command, the effect control unit 24 grasps whether or not the transition of the game state has occurred in this game, controls the transition of the effect mode, and displays the remaining time reduction number display effect of displaying the remaining time reduction number of time reduction states. Appearance control is performed under the effect mode according to the current game state, such as output control.

Next, it is determined whether or not the setting error flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S409). When the setting error flag is not in the ON state (step S409: ≠ 5AH), the setting value command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and then the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory is executed (step S410). In this special electric accessory operation determination random number determination process, the big hit determination random number value is used to execute a'winning lottery at the start of fluctuation'for the operation holding ball used for the current variation display operation. Since the processing procedure of the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory is substantially the same as the random number determination process of step S318 described above, the description will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description.

Here, first, based on the special symbol operation confirmation data, the hit random number determination table on the processing target side this time (for example, if the special figure 1 side is the processing target, the hit random number table for the special figure 1) is acquired. Next, the jackpot determination random number value stored in the determination random number storage area is acquired, and the winning lottery based on the jackpot determination random number value and the winning random number determination table is executed. Then, if the lottery result is "big hit", the big hit judgment flag is set to "5AH", and if the lottery result is "small hit", the small hit judgment flag is set to "5AH", and "big hit" and "small hit" are set. If none of the "hits" is won, that is, in the case of "missing", "00H" is set for both the big hit judgment flag and the small hit judgment flag.

In the special stop symbol creation process of step S411, the winning lottery result of the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric object and the random number value for special symbol determination in step S410 are used, and the "symbol lottery" related to this special symbol variation display game is used. Is executed. Since the basic processing procedure of the special stop symbol creation process is substantially the same as the special stop symbol data creation process of step S319 described above, the description will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description.

Here, first, a symbol table (either a big hit symbol table, a small hit symbol table, or a lost symbol table) is selected according to the special symbol operation confirmation data and the winning lottery result of the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric object. do. For example, when the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H and the jackpot determination flag is 5AH, that is, when the fluctuation start side of this time is'special figure 1 side'and the winning lottery result is'big hit', the special figure The jackpot symbol table for 1 is selected. Then, the special symbol determination random number value stored in the determination random number storage area is acquired, the symbol lottery is executed based on the above-selected symbol table and the special symbol determination random number value, and the special symbol which is the lottery result is executed. The determination data and the special stop symbol number are stored in the corresponding areas of the RAM in the area.

When the special stop symbol creation process in step S411 is completed, the game state transition preparation process is executed (step S412). In this game state transition preparation process, when a big hit is won, it is necessary to specify the game state (see FIG. 4) after the big hit game based on the current game state and the special symbol determination data (big hit type). Various data are stored in the corresponding area (transition state buffer) of the RAM in the area. The data set here will be used in the jackpot end process (step S509 in FIG. 23) described later.

After completing the game state transition preparation process in step S412, the special symbol variation pattern creation process is then executed (step S413). In the special symbol variation pattern creation process, the variation pattern distribution table (not shown) according to the current game state, the set value, and the symbol lottery result (special symbol determination data) of the special stop symbol creation process is acquired. ..

In this variation pattern distribution table, one or more types of variation patterns include the number of operation hold balls (the number of existing operation hold balls excluding the operation hold balls used for the variation display operation this time), the symbol lottery result, and the symbol lottery result. It is determined in relation to the random number value for the fluctuation pattern (magnitude of the random number value: 10000), and specifically, a predetermined selection rate (variation pattern lottery) depending on which judgment value the random number for the fluctuation pattern belongs to. One of the fluctuation patterns is determined according to the probability). In the case of this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern includes normal fluctuation type (normal fluctuation 2s, normal fluctuation 8s, normal fluctuation 12s, etc.), N reach type (N reach 1, 2, etc.), SP as belonging to the loss fluctuation pattern. Those that specify the reach type (weak SP reach, SP reach, strong SP reach, etc.) are included, and as those belonging to the hit variation pattern, a reach variation pattern that specifies various reach excluding the normal variation type is included. Further, in the case of the normal variation type and the N reach type, the pseudo-ream 1 to 2 times is specified, and in the SP reach type, the pseudo-ream 1 to 5 times (5 times is correct) is specified. Therefore, if the pseudo-ream occurs three times, it is determined that the SP reach is reached.

Further, as described above, the fluctuation pattern distribution table is provided with the fluctuation pattern distribution table corresponding to the set values (settings 1 to 6). That is, the probability that one or a plurality of specific fluctuation patterns will be drawn differs depending on the set value. Therefore, even if the selection conditions of the fluctuation pattern (number of pending balls, symbol lottery result, random value for fluctuation pattern) are the same, the same fluctuation pattern is not always selected, but is selected according to the set value. The fluctuation patterns may differ (even if the fluctuation patterns are the same, the selection rate differs depending on the set value). For example, the selection rate of the strong reach in the case of the number of pending balls 3 and the loss C is "290/10000" in the case of setting 1, but "580/10000" in the case of setting 6. By providing a variation pattern distribution table according to such setting values, a'special variation pattern'that can be selected only in the high setting range (settings 5 to 6) can be provided, or a specific setting value (for example, even number setting) can be provided. Depending on (settings 2, 4, 6) and odd-numbered settings (1, 3, 5)), one or a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns having different selectivitys can be determined. For example, when a notice effect corresponding to the above-mentioned special variation pattern (for example, a special reach effect or a special variation display effect) appears, it is definitely determined that the current setting value is in the high setting range. It can be notified. This makes it possible to give the player a setting guessing element. It can be said that such a fluctuation pattern is one aspect of the setting suggestion effect described later.

The information regarding the fluctuation pattern determined in this way includes at least another winning / losing lottery result (in the case of this embodiment, the detailed symbol lottery result information is included in the decorative symbol designation command), and the present. Game status, fluctuation time information, execution designation information of a specific advance notice effect (presence / absence of reach effect and its type (types such as normal variation, N reach, SP reach, etc.), pseudo-ream designation information (including the number of pseudo-reams), etc. ), Information related to set values, etc. can be included. The main control unit 20 creates a "variation pattern designation command" that makes it possible to specify the content, and transmits this to the effect control unit 24. The information included in the variation pattern specification command is used when determining various effects (notice effect during change, setting suggestion effect during change) that should appear during the current symbol change display game. In addition, the fluctuation time of the special symbol corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is set in the "special symbol accessory operation timer" which is the timer management area of the RAM in the area, and the execution time of the symbol variation display game this time is determined.

Next, the changing flag corresponding to the current fluctuation start side is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S414). The above-mentioned "changing flag" is a flag indicating which of the special symbols 1 and 2 is changing, and when the flag is in the ON state (= 5AH), it indicates that the special symbol is changing. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the special symbol is stopped. In this embodiment, the "special symbol 1 changing flag" corresponding to the special figure 1 and the "special symbol 2 changing flag" corresponding to the special figure 2 are dealt with. For example, if the special symbol 1 side is the processing target (variation start side) this time, the special symbol 1 changing flag is set to ON, and the special symbol 2 changing flag is set to OFF.

Next, a decorative symbol designation command corresponding to the symbol lottery result obtained in the special stop symbol creation process in step S411 is acquired and transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S415). The decorative symbol designation command is composed of two bytes, a high-order byte (MODE) that specifies a special symbol type on the variable side and a low-order byte (event) that specifies a winning type. Therefore, the decorative symbol designation command includes information regarding the special symbol type on the variable side and the winning type (symbol lottery result). The decorative symbol designation command is mainly a combination of decorative symbols when forming a reach state (a symbol type whose component is a reach symbol), a combination of decorative symbols (decorative stop symbol) to be finally stopped and displayed, and a symbol. It is also used when performing a notice effect corresponding to a winning type in a variable display game and a setting suggestion effect (a notice of a tenpai symbol: FIG. 48) by a tenpai symbol described later. When the effect control unit 24 receives the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command, the effect control unit 24 controls the appearance of the effect of the current symbol variation display game based on the information included in these commands.

Then, as the setting process at the start of fluctuation, the special symbol operation status is switched to "changing (02H)" (02H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and 00H is stored in the random number storage area for determination (zero clear) (step S416). ).

As described above, when the special symbol variation start process is exited, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) of FIG. 19 is performed, and thus the variation display of the special symbol is started. As a result, the process exits the special symbol management process (step S093) and proceeds to the special electric accessory management process (step S095) of FIG.

(About the case where a setting error occurs: Processing route from S409 to S411)
Returning to the description of the determination process in step S409, the processing content when it is determined in step S409 that the setting error flag is in the ON state (5AH), that is, when it is determined that a setting error has occurred will be described. do.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined in the determination process of step S409 that the setting error flag is in the ON state, the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory (winning lottery) is skipped, and the special stop of step S411 is performed. It is designed to proceed to the pattern creation process. That is, when a setting abnormality error occurs, the winning lottery at the start of the fluctuation is not executed, and the winning lottery result this time is always regarded as "missing" (forced losing control).

Therefore, in the case of a setting abnormality error, in the special stop symbol creation process in step S411, the symbol lottery is executed based on the winning lottery result being "missing". Here, even in the case of a setting abnormality error, the loss type (in the case of this embodiment, any of the losses A to C) may be determined using the loss symbol table as usual, but at the time of the setting error error. A loss type (for example, loss D) that is selected only (normally not selected) may be provided and configured to determine this. In this case, when a setting abnormality error occurs, the special symbol determination data corresponding to the loss D and the special stop symbol number are determined as the symbol lottery result, and are displayed on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b during normal operation. No special stop symbol will be displayed as a stop. In addition, the error-dedicated loss D may be used in both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, or the error-dedicated loss D according to the special symbol type (the loss D1 corresponding to the special figure 1 and the loss D2 corresponding to the special figure 2). ) May be provided. Further, when the error-dedicated loss is not provided, a specific loss (for example, loss A) may be selected from the losses A to C normally selected.

(About selection of fluctuation pattern at the time of setting error)
Next, the special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S411) is executed, but during the setting error error, the same variation pattern lottery as in the normal state is not performed, but the "variation for setting error" selected only when the setting error error occurs. "Pattern distribution table (variation pattern distribution table for setting abnormality)" is referred to, and the variation pattern dedicated to the setting error error is selected.

In the present embodiment, in consideration of the fact that "loss" is forcibly determined during the setting abnormality error, a notice effect having a low degree of fanning is selected for the above-mentioned "variation pattern distribution table for setting abnormality". It has a table structure. For example, a table configuration in which the fluctuation patterns shown in the following (W) to (S) can be selected can be used.

Configuration (W): At least no reach fluctuation pattern is selected.
Configuration (f): Do not select a reach variation pattern that at least specifies a specific reach. For example, a variation pattern that specifies normal variation and N reach is selected, but a variation pattern that specifies SP reach with high expectation is not selected.
Configuration (Y): At least the reach fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation pattern with pseudo-ream are not selected. In other words, usually only the variation pattern is selected.
In the case of this configuration (yo), for example, one of a plurality of types of normal fluctuation patterns (normal fluctuation 2s, normal fluctuation 8s, and normal fluctuation 12s in the case of the present embodiment) that can be selected during normal operation can be selected. Can be configured in. Further, only a specific normal fluctuation (for example, normal fluctuation 8s) may be selected. It should be noted that it is preferable to delay the digestion time of the operation-holding ball in consideration of the fact that the player is forced to lose the ball during the setting abnormality error and suffers a disadvantage on the player side. That is, it is preferable to select only the normal fluctuation pattern (normal fluctuation 12s) having the longest fluctuation time. In addition, even if multiple types of normal fluctuation patterns dedicated to setting error errors (hereinafter abbreviated as "normal fluctuation patterns for errors") that are selected only when a setting error occurs are provided and one of these is selected. good. Further, the configuration may be such that only one error normal fluctuation pattern (for example, normal fluctuation 5s) is selected.

(Regarding variable display effects such as decorative patterns and advance notice effects during pattern changes)
Further, when a setting error is in progress, it is preferable to include setting error error information that specifies that a setting error is in progress when the fluctuation pattern specification command is transmitted. However, in the case of a configuration in which the normal variation pattern for error is selected, the variation pattern itself includes the setting error error information, so that it is not necessary to include the setting error error information.

When the effect control unit 24 receives the variation pattern specification command including the setting error error information, the effect control unit 24 grasps that the variation pattern is selected during the setting error error, and makes it a decorative symbol variation display game dedicated to the setting error error. The production control is performed. Here, when a setting abnormality error occurs, a "setting value abnormality command" is transmitted from the main control unit 20 in step S734 during the setting abnormality check process in FIG. 18, so that the effect control unit 24 sends this. In response to this, it is possible to grasp that a setting error has occurred, but since this command is used exclusively for notification of setting error, execute a dedicated decorative symbol variation display game during the setting error. In order to do so, a variation pattern specification command including setting error error information is separately sent.

As a decorative symbol variation display game dedicated to the above setting abnormality error, for example, the following (c) to (ya) can be configured as an effect control system. In either case, when the special symbol variation display game (variation time of the special symbol) ends, the decorative symbol variation display game also ends.
Direction (c): The notice effect itself is not displayed during the setting error. For example, as the image display effect, only the background image display (normal background image corresponding to the effect mode or the background image for error) and the variable display of the decorative pattern, which are not related to the winning expectation degree, are performed.
Direction (ヰ): The decorative pattern is not displayed in a variable manner. In this case, the variable display operation of the special symbol is executed, but the decorative symbol remains stopped.
Direction (No): Performs a dedicated fluctuation display (variation display during RAM error) during a setting error error. For example, "sway fluctuation (temporary stop state)" is performed in which the decorative pattern is swung up and down without starting the normal fluctuation display. In this case, the shaking may be performed with a specific combination of symbols (for example, a decorative symbol corresponding to loss such as "2", "4", "0").
Direction (e): Normal variable display is performed, but when it is stopped and displayed, it is stopped and displayed with a specific combination of symbols (for example, a decorative symbol corresponding to loss such as "2", "4", "0"), or After performing the normal fluctuation display, the shaking fluctuation (temporary stop state) is performed for a predetermined time with a specific combination of symbols, and then the stop display is performed.
Direction (K): Change from a normal decorative pattern to a decorative pattern dedicated during a setting error. For example, a normal decorative symbol is a symbol that displays numbers from 1 to 9, but a decorative symbol dedicated to a setting error error is, for example, a left / middle / right symbol, such as "e", "la", "-", etc. Change to a special pattern that displays the characters. In this case, it is preferable to give the decorative stop pattern a special meaning. In the above-mentioned effects (c) to (c), if the modes "d", "la", and "-" are displayed when the decorative pattern is stopped or temporarily stopped, the player or the surrounding clerk will be notified. It is possible to promptly notify that a RAM error has occurred.
Direction (Ya): At least the sound effect is set to the mute state or the lowest volume in the game setting. In this case, it is effective in giving a sense of discomfort to the player and promptly notifying that the setting error has occurred. Further, the amount of light related to the image display effect may be set as the minimum amount of light in the game setting.
In the above-mentioned effects (c) to (ya), at least an example in which the fluctuation pattern specification command includes the setting abnormality error information has been described, but even if the decorative symbol specification command also includes the setting abnormality error information. good.

<A. Processing during special symbol change ＞
Next, the process during special symbol change (step S307) will be described.

In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the variation time T of the special symbol set in the special symbol accessory operation timer has elapsed. If the fluctuation time T has not elapsed (variation time T ≠ 0), the special symbol is changing, so that the special symbol changing process is exited without doing anything. When the variation time T of the special symbol has elapsed (variation time T = 0), a "variation stop command (BF01H)" indicating that the variation of the special symbol has ended is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command. .. Upon receiving the fluctuation stop command, the effect control unit 24 grasps that the special symbol fluctuation display game has ended after the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, and stops and displays (confirms) the decorative symbol being displayed. As a result, the decorative symbol variation display game is terminated at the same time as the special symbol variation display game is terminated.

Next, as a setting process when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the special symbol confirmation signal output time (for example, 100 ms) and the confirmation display time (for example, 500 ms) are stored in the corresponding area of the RAM in the area, and the special symbol operation status is set. Switch to "Confirming (03H)" (03H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and the OFF state is stored in the special symbol changing flag. Then, when the setting process at the time of stopping the change of the special symbol is completed, the process during the change of the special symbol is exited. The above-mentioned "special symbol confirmation signal output time" is a margin time for securing the output time of the special symbol confirmation signal for notifying the hall computer HC from the frame external terminal board 21 that the special symbol has been confirmed and displayed. Is. Further, the "fixed display time" is a time (stop display time) for holding the stop display when the variable display of the special symbol is completed and the stop display of the special symbol is completed.

After exiting the above special symbol changing process, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) of FIG. 19 is performed, the special symbol management process is exited, and the process proceeds to the special electric accessory management process of step S095 of FIG.

<22. Special symbol confirmation time processing (processing when fluctuation is stopped): Fig. 22A and Fig. 22B>
Next, the process during the special symbol confirmation time (step S308) will be described. 22A and 22B are flowcharts showing the details of the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) of FIG.

In FIGS. 22A and 22B, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero (step S471). A "fixed display time" is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here (see step S307 of the above-mentioned special symbol changing process). Until the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S471: NO), the process is exited during the special symbol confirmation time without doing anything.

If the special symbol operation timer becomes zero (step S471: YES), it is assumed that the special symbol variation display game has ended, and the special symbol operation status is switched to "waiting (01H)" (special symbol operation). 01H is stored in the status) (step S472), and the game state number YJ (value of any of 00H to 03H) corresponding to the current game state is stored in the game state determination area (W_YJTPTN) (step S473).

Next, the jackpot determination flag is acquired, and the state of the jackpot determination flag is determined (step S474).

(When the jackpot judgment flag is ON)
In the determination of step S474, when the jackpot determination flag is in the ON state (= 5AH) (step S474: = 5AH), various setting processes are performed when the jackpot symbol is stopped (step S475). Here, as shown in the figure, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the jackpot judgment flag, the condition device operation flag is turned ON (5AH is stored) assuming that the jackpot is won, and other, low probability during the jackpot game, electric support. Set to the state without state.

(When the jackpot judgment flag is OFF)
In the determination of step S474, when the big hit determination flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S474: ≠ 5AH), then the small hit determination flag is acquired and the state of the small hit determination flag is determined (step S476). .. When the small hit determination flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S476: ≠ 5AH), that is, in the case of "loss" which is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the process proceeds to step S478.

On the other hand, when the small hit determination flag is in the ON state (= 5AH) (step S476: = 5AH), various setting processes are performed when the small hit symbol is stopped (step S477). Here, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the small hit determination flag, and 5AH (ON state) is stored in the small hit medium flag as various setting processes (process before starting the small hit game) when the small hit symbol is stopped. When the various setting processes at the time of stopping the small hit symbol are completed, the process proceeds to the process of step S478.

Proceeding to the process of step S478, it is determined whether or not the special symbol time reduction counter (remaining time reduction counter) is zero (step S478). If the special symbol time reduction counter is zero (step S478: YES), the process proceeds to step S483.

On the other hand, when the special symbol time reduction counter is not zero (step S478: NO), the special symbol time reduction counter is subtracted by 1 (step S479) as the digestion of the fluctuation number of this time, and the special symbol time reduction counter after the subtraction is set. It is determined whether or not it is zero (step S480).

If the special symbol time reduction counter after subtraction is not zero (step S480: NO), the number of terminations of the special symbol time reduction state has not been reached, so the process proceeds to step S483 without doing anything. On the other hand, when the special symbol time reduction counter after subtraction is zero (step S480: YES), it is assumed that the number of ends of the special symbol time reduction state has been reached, and the setting process at the end of the time reduction is performed (step S481). Here, as the setting process at the end of the reduced working hours, the electric chew support function is set to the OFF state, and the transition to the state without electric support, that is, the transition setting process from the reduced working hours state to the normal state is executed. As a result, in the next special symbol variation display game, the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the "normal state" is selected.

After completing the setting process at the end of the reduced working hours in step S481, the game state information transmission process is then executed (step S482). Here, the state command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. The state command here contains information that specifies the end of the time-saving state. By this state command, the effect control unit 24 grasps that the time saving state has ended in this game, and grasps that the normal state is to be transferred from the next game.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol probability variation counter (remaining ST count) is zero (step S483). If the special symbol probability variation counter is zero (step S483: YES), the process proceeds to step S488. On the other hand, when the special symbol probability variation counter is not zero (step S483: NO), the special symbol probability variation counter is subtracted by 1 (step S484) as the number of fluctuations of the special symbol this time, and the special symbol probability variation after the subtraction is performed. It is determined whether or not the number of times counter is zero (step S485).

If the special symbol probability variation counter after subtraction is not zero (step S485: NO), the ST count has not ended, so the process proceeds to step S488 without doing anything.

When the special symbol probability variation counter after subtraction is zero (step S485: YES), it is assumed that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol has reached the specified ST number (65535 in this embodiment), and the setting process at the end of probability variation is performed. Execute (step S486). Here, as a setting process at the end of the probability change, the function related to the probability change state is set to the OFF state as shown in the figure. As a result, in the next special symbol variation display game, the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the "normal state" is selected. In the case of the latent probability state as well, the ST specified number of times is monitored in steps S483 to S485, and the end timing of the latent probability state is managed in the setting process at the end of the probability change.

After completing the setting process at the end of the probability change in step S486, the game state information transmission process is then executed (step S487). Here, as in step S482, the state command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, but the information included in the state command here includes information that specifies the end of the high probability state (probability change state or latent state). included. By this state command, the effect control unit 24 grasps that the high probability state (probability change state or latent state) has ended in this game, and grasps that the normal state is to be transferred from the next game.

After completing the game state information transmission process in step S487, then whether or not the special symbol change count counter is zero, that is, whether or not the game state transition specified number of times (in this embodiment, the remaining CZ number of times) is zero. Is determined (step S488). Here, the number of residual CZs is monitored. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in the "normal state" of the gaming state, "" normal state "and" CZ "", and in the "latent state" of the gaming state, "" "latent state" and "" We are dealing with "CZ"'. That is, the latent state and the normal state have a common "CZ". Therefore, during the "CZ" period, the same variable pattern distribution table (variable pattern distribution table for CZ) can be selected regardless of the internal gaming state, even though they are in different internal gaming states. Whether or not to select the variation pattern distribution table for CZ is managed by a predetermined identifier (variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode)).

When the special symbol change count counter is zero (step S488: YES), the process is exited during the special symbol confirmation time without doing anything. On the other hand, when the special symbol fluctuation count counter is not zero (step S488: NO), the special symbol fluctuation count counter is subtracted by 1 (step S489) as the digestion of the current fluctuation count, and the special symbol fluctuation count counter after the subtraction is subtracted. Is zero (step S490).

If the special symbol change count counter after subtraction is not zero (step S490: NO), it is assumed that the CZ mode has not ended, and the process is exited during this special symbol confirmation time without doing anything.

When the special symbol change number counter after subtraction is zero (step S489: YES), it is assumed that the CZ mode has ended, and the game state transition setting process is executed (step S491). Here, the transition setting process of the game state after the number of remaining CZs is completed is executed. In the present embodiment, the main control unit 20 has a CZ management means for managing the CZ mode, and designates a game state of the transition destination according to whether the jackpot lottery probability state at the end of CZ is low probability or high probability. Specifically, if it is the current CZ (normal), it shifts to the normal state, and if it is CZ (latent probability), it shifts to the latent state. As a result, in the next special symbol variation display game, the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the "normal state" or the "latent state" is selected.

Next, the game state information transmission process is executed (step S492). Here, as in step S482, the state command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, but the information included in the state command here specifies the end of "CZ (normal)" or "CZ (latent)". Contains information. By this state command, the effect control unit 24 grasps that the CZ (“CZ (normal)” or “CZ (latent probability)”) has ended in this game, and from the next game, the “normal state” or “submarine”. Understand that it will be in a "certain state".

As described above, when the special symbol change start process is exited, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) of FIG. 19 is performed, the special symbol management process (step S093) is exited, and the special electric accessory management process of FIG. 16 is performed. (Step S095).

<23. Special electric accessory management process: Fig. 23>
Next, the special electric accessory management process (step S095) in FIG. 16 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the details of the special electric accessory management process in step S095.

In FIG. 23, the CPU 201 first determines the state of the small hit medium flag (step S501). When the small hit middle flag is in the ON state (step S501: = 5AH), the small hit process is performed (step S504), and the special electric accessory management process is exited. In this small hit process, a small hit game control process for controlling a series of operations of the special variable winning device 52 (open / close control of the large winning opening 50) related to the small hit game, and a small hit start command at the start of the small hit game. Command transmission processing including transmission of a small hit end command at the end of a small hit game, transition processing related to CZ mode, and the like are executed.

When the small hit middle flag is in the OFF state (step S501: ≠ 5AH), then the state of the condition device operation flag is determined (step S502). When the condition device operation flag is in the OFF state (step S502: ≠ 5AH), in this case, it is not in the small hit game (step S501: ≠ 5AH), and it is not in the big hit game. Exit the management process.

When the condition device operation flag is ON (step S502: = 5AH), processing is performed according to the special electric accessory operation status (00H to 04H) (step S503: special electric accessory status branch processing). The "special electric accessory operation status" is a status value indicating the behavior of the special variable winning device 52, and this status value is changed according to the processing state, and the special electric accessory operation status storage area of the RAM in the area is stored. Stored in. For the special electric accessory operation status, "start processing (00H)" that specifies that the state is in the standby state before the start of the big hit game, and "in operation start processing" that specifies that the state is in the standby state before the start of the round game ( "01H)", "Operating (02H)" to specify that the round game is being executed, and "Continuing judgment (03H)" to specify that it is being determined whether or not to continue the next round game. , "Big hit end processing (04H)" for designating that the end processing at the end of the big hit game is in progress is included.

In the special electric accessory operation status branch process in step S503, the special electric accessory operation status values are "start processing (00H)", "operation start processing (01H)", "operation in progress (02H)", and "continuation determination" ( The processing of steps S505 to S509 corresponding to each of the status values of "03H)" and "big hit end processing (04H)" is executed. By these processes, a hit game corresponding to various hits will be realized.

<Big hit game control process (steps S505 to S509)>
(9-1. Big hit start processing)
The jackpot start process (step S505) will be described. At the start of the big hit game, the operation status of the special electric accessory is set to the initial value "start processing (00H)". Therefore, in the case of a big hit, this big hit start process is executed first.

Here, first, as a setting process at the start of the big hit game required when starting the big hit game, 5AH (ON state) is stored in the accessory continuous operation device operation flag of the RAM in the area, thereby special electric accessory. Controls continuous operation (round game) to an acceptable state. Then, the operation status of the special electric accessory is switched to "operation start processing (01H)" (01H is stored in the operation status of the special electric accessory), and the 1st R is set to the continuous count counter for managing the number of continuous executions of the round game. Stores the specified 01H. Next, referring to the big hit start setting table (not shown), the "maximum number of rounds (specified number of rounds)" corresponding to this big hit is applied to the corresponding area of the RAM in the area according to the special symbol determination data (big hit type). , "Round display LED number (display data for round number display device 39c)" is stored, and "start interval time" is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer. The "start interval time" is an interval section from the time when the confirmation display time of the special symbol has elapsed and the big hit is confirmed (see step S471 in FIG. 22A) until the special variation winning device 52 is activated, and is an opening effect. Refers to the time width that defines the section.

Next, the "big hit start command" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the big hit start process is exited. In addition to the role of instructing the start of the opening effect, the "big hit start command" includes information that can identify the type of the big hit this time and the game state at the time of winning the big hit. It is also used when deciding a series of hit effects (opening effect, in-round effect, round end effect, ending effect, etc. corresponding to each big hit type) to be developed inside. Thus, the jackpot game is started.

(9-2. Special electric accessory operation start processing)
Next, the special electric accessory operation start process (step S506) will be described.

Here, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. The interval time before the start of the round is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here. As this interval time, in the first round (1st round), the "start interval time" set in the jackpot start processing (step S505) is monitored, but the main processing (step S506) is passed after the 2nd round. When doing so, the "interval time before opening (interval time until the next round game is started)" is monitored. Until this special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, this round game has not ended, so the special electric accessory operation start process is exited without doing anything.

On the other hand, if the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero, that is, the interval time before opening (in the case of the 1st round, the start interval time) has elapsed, the special symbol judgment data (big hit type) and the current number of rounds are matched. The opening / closing operation pattern of the large winning opening 50 is set (large winning opening opening / closing operation setting process). Here, the large winning opening opening / closing operation time (maximum opening time) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and the solenoid control data for controlling the large winning opening solenoid 52c (large executed according to the number of rounds). Set the winning opening opening / closing operation pattern data). Further, along with the operation of starting the opening of the large winning opening, a command for opening the large winning opening is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. This "large winning opening opening command" includes information on the start of a round game and information on the current number of rounds, and is used when the effect control unit 24 displays an effect during a round corresponding to the number of rounds. Then, the operation status of the special electric accessory is switched to "operating (02H)" (02H is stored in the operation status of the special electric accessory), and the special electric accessory management process is exited. As a result, the large winning opening 50 is opened up to the opening / closing operation time of the large winning opening, and this round game is started.

(9-3. Processing during operation of special electric accessory)
Next, the process during operation of the special electric accessory (step S507) will be described.

Here, first, it is monitored whether or not the number of winning balls to the large winning opening 50 has reached the maximum winning number, and when the maximum winning number is reached, the special symbol accessory operation timer is cleared. As a result, the timer value set in the special electric accessory operation start process (step S506) is forcibly set to zero, and when the maximum number of winnings is reached, the large winning opening 50 being opened is closed. Further, here, every time there is a prize in the large prize opening 50, a large winning opening winning command is transmitted. This big winning opening winning command includes information on the fact that it is a big winning opening and the number of prize balls (set value information may also be included), and is used for a winning effect of notifying that the winning opening 50 has been won. In addition, it is also used for appearance control such as "notice of change in winning sound of big winning opening" which is one aspect of setting suggestion effect described later, and the above-mentioned ball ejection ranking display (counting of the total number of ball ejections). In addition, do nothing until the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, that is, until the large winning opening opening operation time (maximum opening time) elapses or the maximum winning number is reached. As it is, exit the processing during operation of the special electric accessory.

If the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero, it is assumed that this round game has ended, and the special electric accessory operation status is switched to "Continuing judgment (03H)" (03H is set to the special electric accessory operation status). Storage), the remaining ball discharge time (1980ms) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer. The above-mentioned "remaining ball discharge time" refers to a margin time for discharging the remaining balls inside the large winning opening after the large winning opening is closed. In addition, with the closing of the big winning opening (end of the round game), the interval command between rounds is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the special electric accessory operation process is exited. This "inter-round interval command" includes information on the end of the round game and information on the current number of rounds, and is used when the effect control unit 24 displays the interval effect between rounds (inter-round interval effect) until the next round. Will be done. Exit the processing during operation of the special electric accessory.

(9-4. Special electric accessory operation continuation determination process)
Next, the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process (step S508) will be described.

Here, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. Since the remaining ball discharge time (1980 ms) after the big winning opening is closed is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here (see step S507), it is determined whether or not the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed. Will be done. Until the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process is exited without doing anything.

On the other hand, if the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (remaining ball discharge time has elapsed), the continuous number counter is acquired to check whether the current number of rounds has reached the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds). judge. If the maximum number of rounds has not been reached, 1 is added (+1) to the continuous number counter and the "interval time before opening" is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer as a process for continuing the round game. The object operation status is switched to "operation start processing (01H)" (01H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status). On the other hand, when the current number of rounds reaches the maximum number of rounds, the "end interval time" is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer as various setting processes at the end of the specified number of rounds, and the special electric accessory operation status. Is switched to "End processing (04H)" (04H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status). The above "end interval time" is an interval section from the end of the round game of the final round to the end of the jackpot game after the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed, and is the time for which the ending effect section is determined. Refers to the width.

Then, a "big hit end command" instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process is exited. The jackpot end command includes information on the current jackpot type and the game state at the time of winning, that is, information that can specify the game state after the jackpot game ends, and the effect control unit 24 performs the effect after the jackpot game. It is also used when determining the mode. As a result, the round game of the specified number of rounds is completed.

(9-5. Big hit end processing)
Next, the jackpot end process (S509) will be described.

Here, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. Since the end interval time is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here, it is determined here whether or not the end interval time has elapsed. Until the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, the jackpot end process is exited without doing anything.

On the other hand, when the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (the end interval time has elapsed), a transition setting process for designating the game state after the big hit game is executed as various setting processes at the end of the big hit. Here, each value of the transition state buffer set in the game state transition preparation process (step S412 in FIG. 21) already described is set in the flag area and the counter corresponding to various functions for specifying the game state. .. As a result, the flags related to various functions for designating the game state are set to ON or OFF, and the game state after the big hit game is specified. For example, when shifting to the probable change state after the big hit game, the general electric accessory open extension state flag ON, the normal symbol time saving state flag ON, the normal symbol probable change state flag ON, the special symbol time saving state flag ON, the special symbol probable change state. The flag is turned on, and 65536 is set in the special symbol probability variation counter.

Next, various setting processes at the end of the big hit are performed. Here, various data (various flags and counters used in steps S505 to S509) used during the jackpot game control process are cleared, and the game status notification LED data (status notification data by the composite display device 38c) is updated. , The special electric accessory operation status is switched to "start processing (00H)" (00H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status).

When the above jackpot end process is completed, a series of control processes related to the jackpot game is completed, and the current jackpot game is terminated.

<30. Processing on the production control unit side: FIGS. 30 to 31>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 30 to 31, the effect control process on the effect control unit 24 side of the present embodiment will be described. The processing on the effect control unit 24 side is mainly a predetermined main process (effect control side main process: FIG. 30) and a timer interrupt process activated by a scheduled interrupt from the CTC (effect control side timer interrupt process: It is mainly composed of FIG. 31).

<30. Production control side main processing: Fig. 30>
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the main process on the effect control unit side (main process on the effect control side). When the power is turned on from the outside to the gaming machine main body, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) starts the main process on the effect control side shown in FIG.

In the main process on the effect control side, the CPU 241 first performs a necessary initial setting process before the start of the game operation (step S1001). Here, as the initial setting processing, for example, command reception interrupt setting, starting point return processing of the movable body accessory, CTC initial setting, timer interrupt permission, initial setting of the register value inside the CPU including each part of the microcomputer, etc. I do.

When the above initial setting process is completed, the main loop process of steps S1003 to S1011 is performed at predetermined time intervals (16 ms) as a process during normal operation, and the effect software random number update process of step S01012 is repeated otherwise.

In the process of step S1002, the CPU 241 refers to the main loop update counter and determines whether or not the main loop update cycle (counter value> 15) that triggers the execution of the main loop process has arrived (step S1002). The main loop update counter is a counter that is incremented during the effect control side timer interrupt process, which is executed every 1 ms (see step S1057 in FIG. 31). In the present embodiment, the main loop process is performed every 16 ms, and the main loop update counter value is determined in the determination process of step S1002, and when the value is larger than "15" (step). S1002: YES), assuming that the execution timing of the main loop process has arrived, the processes of steps S1003 to S1011 are executed, and in other cases, various effects are performed until the main loop update cycle arrives (step S1002: NO). The lottery random number is updated (step S1012).

When the main loop update cycle has arrived (step S1002: YES), the main loop update counter is cleared to zero (step S1003), and then error processing is executed (step S1004). Here, the setting of the effect scenario for error notification during an error and the error cancellation process when the error is canceled are executed. It should be noted that errors related to the effect means (movable body accessory error, voice IC error, etc.) are monitored here.

Next, the demo / power saving mode process is executed (step S1005). In this demo / power saving mode process, processing related to the demo start waiting effect, the customer waiting effect, and the power saving mode is executed. Details of the demo / power saving mode processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 38.

Next, the variable lottery mode management process is executed (step S1006). In this variable lottery mode management process, a lottery mode (variable lottery mode) for changing the lottery probability (appearance rate, setting suggestion degree) related to the setting suggestion effect to a high probability is managed. Details of this variable lottery mode management process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 56, 57, 59, and 60.

Next, the effect switch input process is executed (step S1007). In this effect switch input process, the operation state of the operation means (effect button 13, direction key 75) is monitored, and when an operation is detected, the effect control process corresponding to the operation is executed. The input state of the operating means is monitored by the button input state update process (step S1052) in FIG. 31, which will be described later.

Next, command analysis processing is performed (step S1008). In this command analysis process, whether or not the effect control command is stored in the command reception buffer is monitored, and if the effect control command is stored, this command is read and the effect process corresponding to the read effect control command is executed. do. When an interrupt based on the strobe signal from the main control unit 20 side occurs, a command reception interruption process (not shown) is executed. By this command reception interrupt processing, the effect control command is acquired, and the data is stored in the command reception buffer of the RAM 243.

For example, when at least the variation pattern specification command is received and stored in the receive buffer (in the present embodiment, the variation pattern specification command and the decorative symbol specification command are received and they are stored in the reception buffer. Case), in the command analysis process, one or a plurality of types of effect patterns are determined based on the information (variation pattern information and winning information (or winning type information)) included in the command. The production pattern determined here works as a "parts production" as an element constituting the production scenario. Next, a time schedule is determined as to when and with what production time width the above-determined production pattern (parts production) should appear, and a production scenario is constructed by this, and the production scenario is configured. The production scenario data is stored in the scenario setting area of the RAM 243. By developing various production patterns (parts production) incorporated in this production scenario one after another or at the same time, a "production scenario" in a broad sense is realized. The details of the command analysis process relating to the command closely related to the present invention will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32, 37, 50, 55, and 58.

After completing the command analysis process, the scenario update process is subsequently executed (step S1009). In this scenario update process, the contents of the timer required to execute the effect scenario are updated, and the process of advancing the effect scenario is executed based on the timer value. A typical timer is an effect scenario timer that manages a time schedule related to the occurrence timing of the effect. For example, within the variable period (decorative symbol fluctuation period) in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed, which is substantially the same as the variable period in which the special symbol is variablely displayed (special symbol variable period). This timer manages a temporal schedule of what kind of effect pattern appears on the axis, with what time width, and by what effect means. Such an effect scenario timer is also used in the LED drive data update process (step S1011) and the effect accessory operation update process (step S1053), which will be described later. Here, this effect scenario timer is monitored, and when the occurrence time of one effect arrives, sound data for the speaker 46 and a liquid crystal command for image display control are created and each is stored in the designated area of the RAM 243. .. The LED data for the optical display device is created by the LED drive data update process (step S1011) described later, and the motor control data for the movable body accessory is created by the effect accessory operation update process (step S1053) described later. Ru.

Next, sound output processing is performed (step S1010). In this sound output process, the sound data created in the scenario update process of step S1009 is acquired, and if there is sound data to be reproduced, the phrase, volume, etc. are based on the sound data set for each sound channel. The data is output to the acoustic control unit (sound source LSI), and the sound effect is displayed from the speaker 46 through the acoustic control unit. As a result, the sound production according to the production scenario is realized.

Next, the LED drive data update process is executed (step S1011). In this LED drive data update process, LED data for an optical display device such as a decorative lamp 13 and various LED for directing is created based on the effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer, and the decorative lamp unit 45 and the decorative lamp unit 45 are created through the light display control unit. Turns on and blinks the LED. As a result, a light effect is realized according to the effect scenario.

As described above, when the main loop process is completed, the effect software random number update process of step S1012 is performed until the next main loop update cycle arrives.

<31. Effect control side timer interrupt processing: Fig. 31>
Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the timer interrupt processing on the effect control side will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the effect control side timer interrupt processing. This effect control side timer interrupt process is activated by an interrupt from the CTC at regular time intervals (1 ms), and is interrupted and executed during the effect control side main process execution.

In FIG. 31, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 saves the contents of the register in the stack area (step S1051), and then executes the button input state update process (step S1052). In this button input state update process, the input state of the operation detection signal from the operation means (effect button 13, direction key 75) is monitored, and when it is confirmed that the operation detection signal has been received, the detection information is set to the predetermined value of the RAM 243. Store in the area. This operation detection information is used in the scenario update process (step S1009) of FIG. 30 to display player-participatory effects, menu screens, information related to menu items, and the like. In this embodiment, it is possible to detect a single press, a long press, repeated hits, and the like.

Next, the effect object operation update process is executed (step S1053). In this effect function operation update process, a process of creating motor control data for a movable body accessory is performed based on the effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer.

Next, SOL / MOT output processing is performed (step S1054). In this SOL / MOT output process, the control data for the movable body accessory created by the effect accessory operation update process is output to the drive control unit. The drive control unit outputs a control signal based on the control data to the movable body accessory motor of the movable body accessory to be operated, and controls the operation. As a result, the movable body effect by the movable body accessory (clock-shaped accessory 80, flower-shaped accessory 90, beacon 62, movable body 73) according to the effect scenario is realized.

Next, the liquid crystal command transmission process is performed (step S1055). In this liquid crystal command transmission process, if there is a liquid crystal command created in the scenario update process (step S1009) of FIG. 30, the liquid crystal command is transmitted to the display control unit (liquid crystal control CPU), and an image for the liquid crystal display device 36 is displayed. Execute display control. As a result, the image production according to the production scenario is realized.

Next, the RTC information acquisition process is executed (step S1056). In this RTC information acquisition process, date and time information (RTC information) timed by the RTC is acquired. This RTC information is used when displaying an effect according to the RTC information, or is used for shifting the setting suggestion effect lottery mode in the variable lottery mode management process (step S1006).

Then, the main loop update counter is incremented (step S1057). This main loop update counter is reset in step S1003 during the main process on the effect control side described above, and is incremented in this process. Therefore, when step S1055 is executed, the main loop update counter value is any of 0 to 15.

When the process of step S1057 is completed, the contents of the saved register are restored (step S1058), the timer interrupt process is terminated, and the effect control side main process is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

<Setting change suggestion effect, setting suggestion effect>
(Positioning of Invention 1: Purpose / Problem)
The above set value is determined by the pachinko hall side based on the pachinko hall sales strategy. On the other hand, for the player, what kind of set value is the set value is an important factor for making a profit. Therefore, whether or not the above setting has been changed is directly related to whether or not it is easy to win a big hit, so it is a matter of great concern for the player.

As a measure to meet the desire of the player, on the one hand, whether or not the setting value of the gaming machine has been changed and how many setting values of the gaming machine are set in 1 to 6 stages are played. It is conceivable that the configuration is such that the person is notified. However, if the player is informed of the presence or absence of a setting change and the set value indiscriminately, the superiority or inferiority between the gaming machines in the hall will be clearly clarified, and the pachinko hall side will have a large operating profit. It has an effect, and for the player side, the setting guessing element is lost, and the fun of the game that comes from not knowing whether or not the setting is changed or the setting value is impaired. On the other hand, it is completely hidden from the player whether or not the setting value of the gaming machine has been changed, or it is treated as a secret how many of the 1 to 6 stages the setting value of the gaming machine is. , The configuration that does not notify the player at all (does not notify even the suggestion or suggestion) also arouses the player's anxiety that he may be playing with a low setting gaming machine, and the gaming machine is affected. The result is to discourage the game. Therefore, giving the player a setting estimation element improves the player's willingness to play, and in turn, improves the operating rate of the gaming machine in the pachinko hall, which may lead to profits on the hall side.

(Positioning of Invention 2: Purpose / Problem)
Further, as described above, what kind of set value is set is one of the great concerns of the player. Therefore, it can be said that it is an important element to improve the player's motivation to play and to make the production diverse by suggesting the setting using the production and giving the player a setting estimation element. Therefore, if the player is not provided with any information about the set value without using the effect, the player has no choice but to guess the setting based on his / her own game result or the jackpot probability derived from the data counter DT or the like. It is not interesting, and it causes a decrease in motivation to play. Therefore, it is sufficient to display the effect related to the set value (setting suggestion effect), but in the case of a ball game machine, it is sufficient to simply display the setting suggestion effect. It doesn't become. The reason is as follows.

In the case of a spinning machine such as a so-called "slot machine", a starting lever (starting means for starting a game) and first to third stop buttons (multiple spinning machines are stopped individually, and the game result is played. The player can arbitrarily operate (stop means for deriving) to start and finish one game. The next game can also be started at the player's favorite timing. However, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine, the game is started by winning a prize at the starting port, and the player cannot arbitrarily determine the progress of the game like a slot machine. In addition, if there is an operation hold ball, the hold is automatically digested and the game is started, and the progress of the game of the next game is also controlled by the game machine side. Therefore, even if a production that the player is interested in appears, it cannot be confirmed slowly and is often overlooked. For example, even if you "suggest the setting on the jackpot end screen", the slot machine can be confirmed slowly without starting the next game, but in the case of a pachinko game machine, if there is an operation hold ball, In many cases, the next game will start and disappear in a few seconds at the shortest. In addition, in slot machines, the game results (reach eyes, winning roles such as bonus roles) are derived from the mechanical rotation to enjoy the game, and the image display device etc. has a strong role of supporting the game. In the case of a pachinko gaming machine, an image display device or the like is the main player in order to give notice of a big hit or notify the game result by an image display device or the like. In addition, the information that announces (suggests) the jackpot and its winning expectation and the information that suggests the setting have significantly different purposes of notification, but in terms of production, whether it is a notification effect or a setting suggestion effect is a game. It is possible that people will be confused and will not be able to communicate accurately. For example, even though the content suggests a setting, it may be mistaken for a big hit notice (and vice versa).

Therefore, in view of the above problems, the effects related to the settings are made to appear at an appropriate timing. ・ The variations of the effects related to the settings are enriched to improve the fun of the game. In consideration of the points such as making the setting change, the effect related to various settings (setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting value, setting change suggestion effect suggesting the presence or absence of the setting change) can be displayed.

<Outline of setting change suggestion effect>
When the setting change operation is performed as described above, as described above, the main control unit 20 side sends a "setting changing command" (when shifting to the setting change mode) and a "setting completion command", and the effect control unit. Received (stored) in 24 (see FIGS. 6A, 10 and 29). When the effect control unit 24 receives this "setting changing command" or "setting completion command", it grasps that the setting has been changed (setting has been changed), and the predetermined activation condition is satisfied. It is equipped with a configuration that waits for the setting change suggestion effect (Gakkun notice, background change notice, notice during ball ejection ranking) to appear. It should be noted that the setting change information is included in the spec specification command (see FIGS. 33B and 36) instead of the "setting changing command" or the "setting completion command", and based on this, it is grasped that the setting has been changed. You can also do it. In the following, a case where the effect control unit 24 displays the “Gakkun notice” based on the fact that the “setting completion command” is typically received will be described as an example.

The "setting change suggestion effect" is an effect that informs the player that there is a setting change by visually recognizing that the appearance of the movable body has changed before and after the notice. be. Here, the term "setting change" means, in a narrow sense, to change from the current setting value to another setting value (for example, change from setting 3 to setting 4). In the case of, it is called "setting change" including changing the same setting value as before the change (for example, changing the same setting value from setting 3 to setting 3), and is used in a broad sense. ..

The setting change suggestion effect is an effect that only notifies the player that the setting has been changed, that is, that there has been a change to a different setting value or a change (replacement) to the same setting value. It does not tell you how many "set values" are as a result of the changes. That is, unlike the setting suggestion effect, it does not deterministically notify the current set value or give the player an inferring element of the set value, but is an effect mode that informs the player of "whether or not the setting has been changed". .. In order for the player to grasp the set value, he / she must wait for the appearance of other elements (setting suggestion effect).

The above setting change suggestion effect is activated when the "predetermined activation condition" is satisfied. One of the predetermined triggering conditions to be considered is (A) the timing (trigger) to trigger the setting change suggestion effect has arrived, and the other one is (B) the setting change suggestion effect appears. It means that he won the lottery (hereinafter referred to as "setting change suggestion effect lottery") as to whether or not to let him do it. It is up to you whether to activate the setting change suggestion effect when both of these conditions are satisfied, or to activate the setting change suggestion effect only when the timing to generate the setting change suggestion effect arrives. Is. In this embodiment, both the conditions that there was "the behavior of the game in the morning (Asaichi)" in the gaming machine and that the lottery was won regarding whether or not to show the setting change suggestion effect. The configuration is such that the setting change suggestion effect is triggered by the fact that is satisfied. Once the activation condition is satisfied and the setting change suggestion effect can be displayed, how long will the activation condition be treated effectively so that the setting change suggestion effect can be displayed, that is, the setting change suggestion effect occurs once. Even if it does, it is possible to arbitrarily decide when to set the period (end) that can be revived.

(The best game behavior in the morning)
The "first game behavior in the morning" that triggers the setting change suggestion effect is roughly divided into the following.
(A) The player has started launching a game ball, and the "first winning ball on the day" has occurred, or the "first symbol game on the day (design variation display game)" has started ((Fig. 42). stomach)). If the symbol change is started during the above initialization operation (see step S038 in FIG. 6B) with the power turned on after the setting is changed, it does not correspond to the "first game behavior in the morning" (special). (Common to FIGS. 1 and 2), setting change suggestion effect (such as Gakkun notice) does not occur. (B) During the normal game period in which the player starts launching the game ball and the symbol game is repeated one or more times, the first (first) background effect change (stage change) occurs. What was done ((b) in FIG. 42).
(C) By the operation of the player, the menu item payout ranking display 102f (see FIG. 43) is selected and determined on the menu screen 100, and the menu item is switched to the payout ranking display (FIG. 44) (FIG. 42). (D) (c)).
(D) While waiting for customers (during customer waiting production), a change in the payout ranking display occurred ((e) in FIG. 42). For example, during the demo movie, the ball output ranking display was switched.

In this embodiment, the ball ejection ranking display between the first morning symbol change (Fig. 42 (a)), the first morning background change notice (Fig. 42 (b)), and the first big hit in the morning (Fig. 42 (a)). FIG. 42 (c)) is considered to be the first game behavior in the morning, and this is used as an opportunity to activate the setting change suggestion effect. In the ball ejection ranking display, when there is no operation hold ball (during the demonstration start waiting effect, the customer waiting effect, or the power saving mode), the player interrupts the game and displays the menu screen 100 shown in FIG. 43. Therefore, it is performed by determining the payout ranking display item 102f (“this sunrise ball ranking”) as a menu item. The time t2 in FIG. 42 indicates the time corresponding to this as the time when the customer is waiting, but the ranking display is displayed at a predetermined timing as a part of the demo movie or the like during the customer waiting production. This timing can also be a trigger. In this case, a part of the customer waiting effect functions as a setting change suggestion effect. In addition, when an image display effect such as a demo movie is displayed in the effect in the power saving mode, if the image display effect includes a ranking display, a part of the image display effect functions as a setting change suggestion effect. do.

(Notice of Gakkun in the morning)
There are three types of setting change suggestion effects handled in this embodiment: "Gakkun notice", "Background change notice", and "Notice during ball ejection ranking". Of these, regarding the Gakkun notice and the background change notice, since these were triggered by the fact that the gaming machine had "the behavior of the game in the morning (Asaichi)", each of them was named "Asaichi". , "Asaichi Gakkun Notice", "Asaichi Background Change Notice", "Asaichi Ball Ranking Notice". Although it is called "notice", this is with the wording (notice) for convenience of explanation, and the setting change suggestion effect handled here is a notice effect that especially announces the degree of expectation of winning. It is not an effect mode, but an effect mode that suggests (notifies) whether or not a setting is changed by a predetermined effect mode.

"Gakkun notice" is to move the movable body in a predetermined movement pattern such as pun, that is, to displace (exercise) all or part of the movable body to give the player the appearance of the movable body before and after the notice. It is a production that shows that there has been a change. In the case of the present embodiment, the movable body 73 of the exhilarating button 70 incorporated in the effect button 13 is subjected to a rotational displacement that reciprocates only once or a plurality of times within a predetermined rotation angle range, and this pun motion is used. It is said that there was a notice of Gakkun. The movement of the movable body 73 is an operation mode that does not occur in a normal gaming state as an action of the exhilarating button, and the player can understand that there is a setting change suggestion effect. However, it is also possible to adopt the same movement as a part of the movement of the exhilarating button in the normal game state as the pun movement of the Gakkun notice. In this way, "Gakkun notice" is, to put it simply, a production in which the button device rattles for a moment.

In FIG. 42, (a) shows the case of "Asaichi Gakkun notice". The "first game behavior in the morning" that triggers the activation of this "morning one gakkun notice" is that the first symbol game (first time in the morning) has started. This behavior is grasped by the effect control unit 24 receiving the "command related to the symbol variation" first, that is, receiving one of the hold addition command, the variation pattern specification command, and the decorative symbol specification command. can do. In (a) Asaichi Gakkun notice in FIG. 42, a game ball was launched for a game machine that was waiting for a customer, and the first Gakkun notice occurred when the first prize of the game ball occurred at time t3. It can be done. In the following, when referred to as "waiting for customers", unless otherwise specified, at least one period (all or part of the period) during the demo start waiting production, the customer waiting production, and the power saving mode. It means that there is.

However, if the setting is not changed when the power is turned on, the setting change suggestion effect lottery (lottery for executing the morning one gakkun notice in S2331 in FIG. 35) is not performed, and when the setting is changed, the setting change suggestion effect lottery is performed. The rate at which the first morning notice appears (the rate of confirmed actions) is, for example, about 50% by the lottery. Further, the lottery probability is the same for each set value. Regarding the point that the lottery probability is the same for each set value, the same applies to the morning one background change notice and the notice during the ball ejection ranking display. The lottery probabilities are the same because the setting change suggestion effect exclusively informs (suggests or implies) "whether or not there is a setting change".

Since this morning's notice of Gakkun does not appear except for the first rotation, it will be a'short appearance period production'. In other words, it is a privileged production given only to the players who enjoyed the game at the beginning of the morning. In addition, the "Gakkun notice" is generated when the trigger (first rotation) arrives during any of the productions waiting for the start of the demonstration, the production waiting for customers, and the power saving mode. When the effect of this "Gakkun notice" is generated, if the player participation type effect is combined, the effect button 13 is controlled to be pressed. At this time, an operation instruction effect (pressing instruction lamp operation) for prompting the operation of the effect button 13 is also performed.

(Gakkun notice by exhilarating button 70)
The exhilarating button 70 includes a movable body 73 that can rotate forward, inside the push button type cylinder 72 to be exact. (A) Under the situation where "normal game" is performed, when the push button type cylinder 72 is pressed, or when a predetermined timing before and after the pressing button type cylinder 72 arrives, the movable body 73 has a predetermined normal time. Perform rolling motion (rotational and rocking motion). The motion pattern and momentum of the rolling motion in the normal time differ depending on the content of the effect to be expressed. ), For example, if the momentum (angle θ1) is 2 mm (small movement) in the normal operation (default operation, see S2335 in FIG. 35), the momentum (angle θ2) of the Gakkun notice operation is normal. It is larger than that of, for example, at 5 mm (large movement), and repeats rattling once or multiple times. By setting θ2> θ1, the momentum of the Gakkun notice motion is increased to avoid being mistaken for the pun motion related to the notice effect during normal game, and it is easy to recognize that it is a setting change suggestion effect. For this reason, it may be determined as the same amount of exercise.

(Modified example of the means of embodying the Gakkun notice)
In the present embodiment, a "movable body" is used as an effect means for embodying (expressing) the effect of the Gakkun notice. Specifically, among the functions of the effect button 13 (normal button 13A, rotary light button 66, refreshing button 70), the refreshing button 70 in which the movable body 73 is configured to be rotatable forward is used. However, the normal button 13A of the effect button 13 and the rotary light button 66 can also be used as a means for embodying the Gakkun notice. In addition to the effect button 13, other movable objects such as the clock-shaped accessory 80 and the flower-shaped accessory 90 can also be used as a means of expressing the Gakkun notice. Further, since the cross-shaped direction key 75 also has an operation unit that can be moved up and down, it can be treated as a movable body and used as an expression means for giving notice of Gakkun.

The means for expressing the Gakkun notice (directing means) may be any stimulus transmitting means that can exert a directing effect by appealing to human perception such as sight, hearing, and touch, so it is limited to the above-mentioned physically movable body. I can't. for example,
(A) A pressurizing device or a wind pressure device that is installed inside the operating handle and transmits contact pressure or wind pressure to the palm of the operator holding the operating handle when activated is used.
(B) A sound generator (sound producing means) such as a speaker 46 is used. For example, a sound dedicated to the Gakkun notice (for example, an impact sound) is output.
(C) A light generating means (light producing means) such as a decorative lamp 45 is used. For example, it emits light with a dedicated light for Gakkun notice (for example, a flash effect).
(D) An effect display device (display means) such as a liquid crystal display device 36 is used. For example, an image display dedicated to Gakkun notice (for example, a blackout effect) is displayed.
One or more of the above-mentioned (A) to (D) effect means can be used exclusively or incidentally. In terms of being able to use the display means, the morning one background change notice described below is also a kind of Gakkun notice.

(Notice of background change in the morning)
In FIG. 42, (b) shows the case of “morning one background change notice”. The "first morning game behavior" that triggers this "morning one background change notice" is the first on the LCD screen in the process in which the player starts launching the game ball and the symbol game is performed once or repeatedly. This is the change in the background effect (stage change) of the first time). In (b) morning one background change notice of FIG. 42, the first background change occurs at the change of the symbol game at time t4 during the game, and the morning one background change notice occurs with this as an opportunity. In short, this "morning one background change notice" is the first background change after the power is turned on, and the setting is changed by shifting to the special mode background (setting change notification background) as a setting change suggestion effect. Notify that you are there.

This "morning one background change notice" does not always appear in the first rotation, for example, it appears at about 33% of the background change and does not change until the background is changed again. Therefore, it is a "production with a medium appearance period". However, once the morning one background change notice appears, the opportunity to activate the morning one background change notice will not come again.

The morning one background change notice is a setting change suggestion effect lottery (S2353 morning one background change notice in FIG. 36) that is drawn in a normal game (for example, the first rotation game) only when the power is turned on with the setting changed. It will appear if you win in the lottery). The morning one background change notice is not a short-term production that appears only in the first rotation like the morning one gakkun notice, but once you win the background change lottery, it will not change until the background change is made again It is a medium-term production. Therefore, the privileged meaning of being given to the player who played the game first in the morning, such as the notice of Gakkun in the morning, diminishes, but once it appears, it will be possible to detect whether or not the setting has been changed in a longer game period. There is an advantage in that it can be done. For example, the morning one background change notice can be viewed exclusively by one player who played the first game in the morning, but the morning one background change notice is played by the player who won the morning one background change notice lottery (S2353). Since it may continue to appear even after quitting, there is a possibility that other players can watch it.

If you win the setting change suggestion effect lottery (morning one background change notice lottery) related to the morning one background change notice, you can increase the transition rate to the special mode background (the special background shown in the figure). This special mode background is a background effect in which a background image that does not appear in a normal game is displayed. That is, it is a background image that does not appear unless the setting is changed. The transition to the special mode background is either a non-transition case or a transition case, and the transition rate is the same for each set value (for example, 33%). Although it may appear in a normal game, it may be used as a special mode background in which a background image that appears very rarely is displayed. For example, in the case of a normal game or no setting change, the transition is made at 1/1000, but in the morning one background change notice lottery, the transition may be made with a high probability of 1/3. In addition, it is possible to make a difference in the transition rate as a variation for each setting (setting values 1 to 6). For example, the higher the setting value, the higher the transition rate to the special mode background can be set.

In this example, as a notice of the background change in the morning, the background is shifted to the special mode background by the image display effect. Alternatively, it is also possible to generate sound, light, or the like incidentally to produce a setting change suggestion effect.

(Notice during the ball ejection ranking)
In FIG. 42, (c) shows the case of "notice during the ball ejection ranking". The "first morning game behavior" that triggers this "notice during the ball ejection ranking" is the process in which the player starts launching the game ball and repeats the symbol game one or more times. By the time the first (first) big hit occurs, the game is interrupted and the LCD screen is switched to the payout ranking display.

In (c) notice during the ball ejection ranking of FIG. 42, the game is interrupted at time t5 between the first symbol game and the occurrence of the first big hit (time t3 to t7), and the direction key 75 or the effect button 13 is used. Is operated to select and determine the payout ranking 102f as a menu item from the menu screen 100 (FIG. 43), and in the displayed payout ranking display screen 771 (FIG. 44), "a specific setting change suggestion image (for example, By displaying "Characters 775, 776)", a setting change suggestion is made.

The "specific setting change suggestion image (specific display mode)" is, for example, the image arrangement of the characters 775 (Fujika-chan) and 776 (Fujimaru-kun) in the ball ejection ranking on the liquid crystal screen is shown in FIG. 44 (a). The layout is the opposite of the normal layout (default) (Fig. 44 (b)), or the character, the entire background image, or a part of the background (display of objects such as specific items and characters) is the default. By having a specific display mode different from the normal display mode, it is notified (suggested) that there is a "setting change".

(D) and (e) of FIG. 42 are examples showing that this "notice during the ball ejection ranking" can occur in other sections. In the case of this case (d), the "first morning behavior in the game" is the first time (first time) in the process in which the player starts launching the game ball and repeats the symbol game one or more times. By the time the big hit occurs, the player interrupts the game, the game is interrupted, and the LCD screen is switched to the payout ranking display. Also, in the case of case (e), the "first game behavior in the morning" is that the ball ejection ranking display was switched on the LCD screen during the demonstration while waiting for customers. This "notice during the payout ranking" appears when (about 5%) is won in the setting change suggestion effect lottery (lottery for executing the notice during the payout ranking in S2102 in FIG. 37), that is, it rarely appears. However, once the lottery is won, the setting change suggestion image of the notice during the ball ejection ranking (Fig. 44 (b)) does not change until the first big hit, so'production with a long appearance period' It becomes. In this respect, the notice during the ball-out ranking has a longer average period during which the performance can appear than the above-mentioned morning one gakkun notice and morning one background change notice. Therefore, there is a chance that more players will appreciate the notice during the ball-out ranking than the notice of the background change in the morning.

Regarding the notice during the payout ranking, the period during which the trigger is valid (trigger valid period) is until the first (first) jackpot occurs (until the start of the jackpot game), that is, after the power is turned on. After the first (first) big hit, the trigger for the notice during the ball-out ranking does not come. The details will be described later, but for the above-mentioned payout ranking display, the same character background image as the background image (image due to the change in the end interval screen) determined by the ending effect at the time of the previous big hit (the effect during the big hit end INT). It is updated and displayed (see the ED character background effect lottery process (S2514) in FIG. 58, which will be described later). From this point, the period up to the occurrence of the first big hit is considered to be the effective period of activation trigger.

(Modification example A1)
In this embodiment, the ball ejection ranking display between the first morning symbol change (Fig. 42 (a)), the first morning background change notice (Fig. 42 (b)), and the first big hit in the morning (Fig. 42 (a)). FIG. 42 (d) (c) (e)) is considered to be the first game behavior in the morning, and this is used as an opportunity to activate the setting change suggestion effect. However, regarding the morning one background change notice and the ball ejection ranking display, the activation trigger valid period may be set as follows. Displayed in the first demo movie until a specific event occurs, for example, until a specific notice effect (high expectation notice such as strong SP reach or multiple pseudo-reams (pseudo 4 times)) occurs. It is also possible to consider the period until it is done as the first game behavior in the morning and set it as the activation period. In addition, the "specific game period" can be set as the activation trigger valid period. For example, until the number of game executions reaches a predetermined number (for example, up to 50 rotations) and the number of times of reach (which may be a specific reach) reaches a predetermined number (for example, the number of reach is 10). The period until the number of OUT balls is reached (for example, until the number of OUT balls reaches 1000) is considered to be the first game behavior in the morning, and the activation trigger valid period may be set.

(Modification example A2)
There are three types of setting change suggestion effects handled in this embodiment: "Asaichi Gakkun notice", "Asaichi background change notice", and "Notice during ball ejection ranking", which have different triggers. However, at least one of these setting change suggestion effects may be provided. Further, when a plurality of types of setting change suggestion effects are provided, not all the setting change suggestion effects can be displayed, but some setting change suggestion effects may be displayed. For example, if one setting change suggestion effect (for example, morning one gakkun notice) appears, another setting change suggestion effect (for example, morning one background change notice and notice during ball ejection ranking) should not appear. Can be done. In addition, when a specified number of setting change suggestion effects appear (for example, two types of morning one gakkun notice and morning one background change notice), other (remaining) setting change suggestion effects (for example, notice during ball ejection ranking) Can be configured so as not to appear. Further, it may be determined by a predetermined selection lottery which setting change suggestion effect is to appear. Further, when a plurality of setting change suggestion effects are executed at the same time (overlapping), they may be executed based on the priority of which effect is to be executed with priority. For example, when the morning one gakkun notice and the morning one background change notice appear at the same time in the first rotation, the morning one gakkun notice is preferentially executed. Further, it may be configured so that two or more types of setting change suggestion effects can appear at the same time (overlapping). In addition, there is no particular limitation on the number of types of setting change suggestion effects, and they can be freely set.

<Control example 1: Notice of Gakkun in the morning of Fig. 42>
(Setting completion command reception process: Fig. 32)
With reference to FIG. 32, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) grasps that the setting has been changed when the "setting completion command" is transmitted from the main control unit 20, and the setting change information (replacement information). Is stored in the RAM 243, the setting change completion effect data is set (step S2001), and the setting process for turning on the setting change suggestion effect execution permission flag according to the setting change suggestion effect is performed (step S2002). Here, three types of setting change suggestion effects are dealt with: "Asaichi Gakkun notice", "Asaichi background change notice", and "Notice during ball ejection ranking". The setting change suggestion effect execution permissible flag specifies that the execution of the setting change suggestion effect is in the permissible state. Therefore, when the setting change suggestion effect execution permission flag is ON, the setting change suggestion effect is placed under the execution allowance state, and when the trigger is reached, the setting change suggestion effect is executed. However, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the setting change suggestion effect is executed through the setting change suggestion effect lottery (S2331 in FIG. 35, S2353 in FIG. 36, S2102 in FIG. 37).

In the process of step S2002, as the setting change suggestion effect execution permission flag corresponding to each notice, the morning one gakkun notice flag is turned ON (= 5AH), the morning one background change notice flag is turned ON, and the ball ejection ranking notice flag is turned ON. Set. If the setting has not been changed, none of the setting change suggestion effect execution permission flags is turned ON, and "non-execution" of the setting change suggestion effect is specified.

In the present embodiment, the flag is immediately turned ON without going through a lottery as to whether or not the setting change suggestion effect execution permission flag is turned ON, and that fact is stored in the RAM 243 on the effect control unit side in advance. At this stage, the situation is "Asaichi" where the game ball has never been fired after the power is turned on. Under such a situation in the morning, the effect control unit 24 knows that the setting has been changed.

(Decorative pattern designation command reception processing: Fig. 33)
With reference to FIG. 33, in the decorative symbol designation command reception process, the variable pattern designation command reception confirmation process (S2301) for receiving the variable pattern designation command and confirming that the information has been acquired, and the decorative symbol designation command After sequentially performing the decorative symbol designation command analysis process (S2302) for acquiring information, the advance notice effect lottery process (S2303) and the decorative stop symbol lottery process (S2304) for determining the effect based on the information. Are performed in sequence. This notice effect lottery process (S2303) is to draw lots for all the advance notice effects related to this symbol game, and the decoration stop symbol lottery process (S2304) is a symbol for forming a reach symbol (reach configuration symbol). ) And a process for determining a combination of decorative symbols to be finally stopped, which is a part of the notice effect lottery process (S2303). Further, the decoration stop symbol lottery process includes a process of determining a reach symbol related to the setting suggestion effect 03 (normal reach symbol suggestion) described later.

Next, the continuous advance notice effect management process (S2305), that is, the change start time system look-ahead advance notice execution management process is performed, the customer waiting operation status is set to "00H" (during the game) (S2306), and the decorative symbol change starts. Performs various setting processes (S2307) to exit the decorative symbol designation command reception process. The customer waiting operation status is a status value indicating the behavior of a symbol game (here, a decorative symbol variation display game), and in short, is a status value for identifying whether or not the game is in progress. This status value is changed according to the processing state and is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 243. The customer waiting operation status is "00H" that specifies that the game is being executed, such as during a game, "01H" that specifies that the demo is waiting for the start of the demo (waiting for the start of the demo) before the start of the customer waiting effect, and that the customer is waiting for the customer (waiting for the customer). There are "02H" to specify (during demo mode) and "03H" to specify that it is in power saving mode.

(Notice production lottery process: Fig. 34)
FIG. 34 shows the details of the above-mentioned notice effect lottery process (S2303). With reference to FIG. 34, in this advance notice production lottery process, the morning one-game notice lottery process (S2311), the background change notice lottery process (S2312), and the changing production scenario type lottery process for determining the basic production scenario to be the base. (S2313), various advance notice lottery processing (S2314) for determining a specific production scenario based on the basic production scenario, and production scenario data setting processing (S2315) for setting production scenario data used in this game. It is composed of. As a result, various effects (variable effects (including setting suggestion effects)) appearing in the current symbol game (decorative symbol variation display game) are determined. The setting suggestion effect during the symbol game is determined by the above-mentioned various advance notice lottery processes (S2314).

(Morning Gakkun notice lottery process: Fig. 35)
FIG. 35 shows the details of the morning one-time notice lottery process (S2311). In this morning one gakkun notice lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not the morning one gakkun notice flag = 5AH (ON state) (S2330), and if this judgment is NO (S2330: NO), the morning one gakkun notice is It returns without doing anything, assuming it will not be executed. On the other hand, if the determination is YES (S2330: YES), the process proceeds to step S2331, a morning one-time notice execution lottery is performed (S2331), and the result is determined (S2332). If the lottery result is winning (YES), "Asaichi Gakkun notice effect scenario data" is set (S2333), and if it is not won (NO), "Asaichi default operation effect scenario data" which is a normal (default) operation is set. (S2335). Then, the morning flag for Gakkun notice is returned to "00H (OFF state (non-execution))" (S2334).

In other words, regarding the morning one gakkun notice, after the power is turned on, the morning one gakkun notice execution lottery is performed when the decorative symbol designation command of the first rotation is received, but regardless of whether the result is won or not, in step S2334, for the morning one gakkun notice. Clear the flag. As a result, after that, the morning notice will not be executed until the next setting change.

In the case of this embodiment, the winning probability in the morning one-time notice lottery is 50%. However, it is configured to make the morning one gakkun notice appear only because there was "the first morning (morning Ichi) game behavior" in the gaming machine, or by setting the winning probability in the morning one gakkun notice lottery to 100%. It can also be. Further, in this embodiment, when the morning one-time notice execution lottery is not won, the default operation is performed in step S2335, but in the case of non-winning, the default operation itself may not be performed.

(Background change notice lottery process: Fig. 36)
FIG. 36 shows the details of the background change notice lottery process (S2312). In this background change notice lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not the morning one background change notice flag = 5AH (ON state) (S2351).

If this determination is YES, the process proceeds to step S2352, the morning one background change lottery table (not shown) is acquired, and the morning one background change notice lottery is performed (S2352 to S2353). At least the lottery probability (transition rate) to the special mode background is defined in this morning one background change lottery table, and by the lottery, the transition to the special mode background (setting change suggestion background effect), that is, the morning one background change notice Decide whether or not to make it appear. The winning probability is, for example, about 30%. In this morning one background change notice lottery (S2353), the background effect of the transition destination is drawn based on the above morning one background change lottery table, and if the transition to the special mode background is won (S2354 = YES), the morning one background change notice The flag is returned to 00H (S2355), and the background effect scenario data is set (S2356). As a judgment of step S2354, if the special mode background (setting change suggestion background effect) is not won (S2354 = NO), the process proceeds to step S2356 without returning the morning one background change notice flag to "00H". Set background effect scenario data according to the lottery result. In other words, the morning one background change notice lottery is not always won in the first rotation. After winning, it ends when the next time the normal background change notice lottery is won (see NO processing route in step S2356 and step S2351). To put it simply, this background change notice is an effect mode in which at least a part (for example, all or part of the background display) of the effect mode is sequentially changed each time a predetermined condition is satisfied.

On the other hand, as a determination of step S2351, if the morning one background change notice flag is not 5AH (morning one background change notice production) (S2351: NO), the process proceeds to step S2357, the normal background change lottery table is acquired, and the normal background change is performed. A notice lottery will be held (S2357 to S2358). In this normal background change lottery table, lottery data for deciding which background effect to shift to from among a plurality of background effects other than the special background mode is defined.

Then, the process proceeds to step S2356, and the background effect scenario data according to the lottery result is set. However, if the fluctuation pattern this time is at least a reach fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern with pseudo-reams may be included), the lottery result of the morning one background change notice lottery (S2352) is not executed. Here, in the case of the reach fluctuation pattern, the lottery result of this normal background change notice lottery (S2358) is given priority. In other words, in the case of a pattern other than the reach fluctuation pattern, that is, a normal fluctuation pattern, the morning one background change notice lottery (S2352) is executed, and only after winning this lottery, the "setting change" is notified. This is a game if you make a background change lottery in the morning and shift to the special background mode without any execution conditions, regardless of the fluctuation pattern such as normal fluctuation, reach fluctuation, and fluctuation pattern with pseudo-ream. This is because the person is confused with the advance notice production, saying, "Maybe the expectation of winning is high !?" Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the case of the reach fluctuation pattern, the morning one background change notice lottery is not executed, but in the case of the normal fluctuation pattern, the morning one background change notice lottery is executed. It is preferable not to execute the morning one background change notice lottery even in the case of the normal fluctuation pattern with pseudo-ream. This is because the pseudo-ren is also a kind of advance notice effect, and if the special background mode is switched to when the pseudo-ren occurs, the player's expectation of winning is excessively fueled as described above. As described above, in the present embodiment, a configuration for determining whether or not to execute the morning one background change notice lottery (S2352) according to the content of the fluctuation pattern, that is, a specific fluctuation pattern case is specified as the execution condition. Only in the fluctuation pattern of, the morning one background change notice can appear.

(Modified example of morning one background change notice)
Further, if the following predetermined execution conditions are satisfied, the morning one background change notice lottery may be executed. For example, it can be configured as follows (chi) to (wo). (H) Morning one background change notice The lottery will be executed only for the first rotation after the power is turned on. (I) Execute a morning one background change notice lottery at a specific number of revolutions. For example, the morning one background change notice lottery is executed only at the 10th rotation after the power is turned on (the number of lottery is once), or the 10th rotation and the 15th rotation after the power is turned on (multiple lottery chances are available). However, there is a limit to the number of lottery draws). (N) The morning one background change notice lottery is not executed until the predetermined number of symbol games (number of fluctuations) is reached (when the predetermined number of rotations is reached, the lottery is allowed to be executed). (L) Normally, the background change notice lottery will not be executed in the morning until the background change notice lottery is executed a predetermined number of times. For example, the background change notice lottery is not executed in the morning until the background change notice lottery is normally executed at least once. (Wo) The morning one background change notice lottery will not be executed until the specified number of normal background changes appear. For example, the morning one background change notice lottery is not executed until at least one normal background change notice is given. In the case of (i) to (wo) above, the morning one background change notice does not appear at all during the predetermined game period (the number of symbol games, the number of lottery of the normal background change notice lottery and / or the number of winnings, etc. are the execution conditions). It can be in the form. In this form, since there is a section where the appearance of the background change notice in the morning is prohibited, it is necessary to execute one or more symbol games in order to see the notice. The degree can be increased and the production can be varied.

(Customer waiting command reception process: Fig. 37)
Next, the customer waiting command reception process will be described with reference to FIG. 37. During the period until the first big hit in the morning, if the game is over and there is no operation hold ball, or if the game machine is left for a predetermined time, waiting for customers (during demonstration start waiting production, customer waiting production, or power saving) (In mode). While waiting for the customer, the menu display and menu operation are performed by operating the effect button 13 and the direction key 75. By selecting "this sunrise ball ranking (102f in FIG. 43)" as a desired item from the menu items and pressing the effect button 13, the item is determined and the ranking image (ranking effect) is displayed (for example). , T5 in FIG. 42).

FIG. 37 shows the details of the customer waiting command reception process. In the customer waiting command reception process, first, it is determined whether or not the advance notice flag = 5AH during the ball ejection ranking (S2101). If the determination in S2101 is NO, the process proceeds to step S2106, the demo start timer is set to 180s, and the demo start waiting effect is started (S2106 to S2107). Then, the customer waiting operation status is set to 01H (waiting for the start of the demo), and the customer waiting command reception process is exited (S2108).

If the determination of S2101 is YES, the process proceeds to the process of S2102, the advance notice execution lottery during the payout ranking is performed (S2102), and the result is determined (S2103). If the lottery result of the advance notice execution lottery during this payout ranking is winning (S2103: YES), the "morning one special payout ranking display setting process" is performed to "morning one special background effect (specific image in FIG. 44 (b))". The relevant effect data is set (S2104), and the advance notice flag during the payout ranking is returned to 00H (S2105). On the other hand, if the lottery result of the advance notice execution lottery during the payout ranking is not won (S2103 = NO), the "morning one normal payout ranking display setting process" is performed and the "morning one normal background effect (default image of FIG. 44 (a)) is performed. ) ”(S2109). After that (however, until the start of the big hit game), when the ranking display appears, the morning one special background effect (specific image in FIG. 44 (b)) or the morning one normal background effect (default image in FIG. 44 (a)) is displayed. Is displayed.

After that, the process proceeds from step S2109 to S2106, 180s is set in the demo start timer, and the demo start waiting effect is started (S2106 to S2107). Here, the demo start waiting effect is a standby screen (a screen in which the screen at the end of the fluctuation is continuously displayed and maintained) before the transition to the demo movie (demo screen). Then, the customer waiting operation status is set to 01H (waiting for the start of the demo), and the customer waiting command reception process is exited (S2108).

In the "morning one normal background effect" set in the morning one normal ball ejection ranking display setting process (S2109), for example, as shown in FIG. 44 (a), the character arrangement of the ball ejection ranking on the LCD screen is "Fujika-chan 775: Fujimaru-kun 776 ”(Fujika-chan on the left side of the screen and Fujimaru-kun on the right side). On the other hand, in the "morning one special background effect" set in the morning one special ball ejection ranking display setting process (S2104), as shown in FIG. 44 (b), the character arrangement of the ball ejection ranking on the liquid crystal screen is the same as above. The "reverse relationship" is "Fujimaru-kun 776: Fujika-chan 775" (Fujimaru-kun on the left side of the screen and Fujika-chan on the right side).

The character arrangement of this ball ejection ranking has the opposite relationship to the normal one, that is, a specific display mode (setting change suggestion display) different from the normal display mode (default display) appears, so that the player Can know that the settings have been changed. In the case of this embodiment, when the notice execution lottery (S2102) during the payout ranking is not won, the notice flag for the payout ranking is not cleared (00H), and the customer waiting command is received again. In addition, it is possible to execute the advance notice execution lottery during the ball-out ranking, and multiple lottery chances are given. As a result, many players can be given a chance to appear in advance notice during the ball ejection ranking. However, the following adverse effects are also expected.

If a lottery chance is given indiscriminately, an advanced player who knows this will return the operation hold ball to the state of nothing after playing the game once (for example, the game is interrupted every time one operation hold ball occurs). Then, avoid winning a prize at the start opening), repeat the game act of receiving a lottery to execute a notice during the payout ranking by receiving a command waiting for customers, and wait for the appearance of the notice during the payout ranking. Then, as a result of repeating the act many times, a technical intervention is created in which it can be inferred that "the setting is not changed" if the notice does not appear during the ball ejection ranking, which leads to inequality among the players. In addition, such a time-consuming act can be a factor in lowering the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Therefore, for example, only when the customer waiting command sent at the time of turning on the power is received, or until the number of times the customer waiting command is received reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times), the lottery for executing the advance notice during the payout ranking is performed. Is executed, and the lottery result (if the lottery is allowed up to the predetermined number of times (3 times), the lottery result of the predetermined number of times) is cleared regardless of whether the lottery is won or not. May be good. In this case, the configuration may be such that the clearing process of step S2105 is executed after the processing of step S2109. By doing so, whether or not to execute the notice during the payout ranking will be drawn only when the power is turned on, the above problem will be solved, and as long as the lottery is won, the notice during the payout ranking will be given until the first big hit. There is an advantage that a long-term setting change suggestion effect is possible, and many players have a chance to touch the notice during the ball ejection ranking.

(Demo / Power saving mode processing: Fig. 38)
FIG. 38 shows the details of the demo / power saving mode processing. In this demo / power saving mode process, the customer waiting operation status is first checked (S3001). In step S3001, it is determined whether or not the game is not in progress (00H). If the game is in progress (00H), the demo / power saving mode process is exited without doing anything.

If it is not during the game (00H), the menu management process (S3002) whose details are shown in FIG. 39 is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting operation status is in the power saving mode (03H) (S3003), and if it is in the power saving mode (03H), the demo / power saving mode process is exited.

If it is not in the power saving mode (03H), it is checked whether or not the demo start timer = 0, that is, whether or not it is the timing to shift to the demo mode (during customer waiting effect) (S3004). If the demo start timer is not zero, the demo mode should not be entered yet, so the demo / power saving mode process is exited as it is. On the other hand, if the demo start timer is zero, it is time to shift to the demo mode, so it is checked whether the customer waiting operation status is already in the demo mode (02H) (S3005).

In the determination of step S3005, if it is not in the demo mode (02H), the demo start waiting (demo start waiting effect) has ended, so the process proceeds to step S3006 to perform the demo mode transition setting process. In this demo mode transition setting process, the power saving mode start timer is set to 120 seconds, the customer waiting effect (demo movie, etc.) is started, the customer waiting operation status is set to 02H (during demo mode), and the demo / power saving mode is set. Exit the process.

If it is not in the game or in the power saving mode, that is, in the demo mode (02H), the process proceeds to S3007, and it is determined whether or not the power saving mode start timer should be activated. If the power saving mode start timer is not zero (S3007: NO), the demo / power saving mode process is exited. On the other hand, if the power saving mode start timer is zero (S3007: YES), it is assumed that the timing for shifting to the power saving mode has come, and the power saving mode transition setting process is performed (S3008). In this power saving mode transition setting process, the power saving mode is started, the customer waiting operation status is set to 03H (during power saving mode), and the demo / power saving mode processing is exited.

(Menu management process: Fig. 39)
FIG. 39 shows the details of the menu management process (S3002, FIG. 38). In the present embodiment, when the game is not in progress, that is, when there is no operation holding ball, the menu management process can be immediately entered, and menu items can be selected, for example, the volume and the like can be adjusted. The direction key 75 functions as a selection key for selecting a menu item, and the effect button 13 (configuration of a push button) functions as a decision button.

In the menu management process of FIG. 39, it is determined whether or not the menu is being displayed (S3101). If the menu is not displayed (S3101: NO), that is, if the menu is not displayed yet, the effect button 13 is waited to be pressed (S3102: YES), and the menu display start process is performed (S3103). As a result, when the effect button (decision button) is pressed while the menu is not displayed, the menu screen is displayed. Next, 180 seconds is set in the demo start timer (S3104), 20 seconds is set in the non-operation timer (S3105), and the menu management process is exited. The non-operation timer is a timer for returning to the demo screen (during customer waiting effect) when the button operation is not performed for a predetermined time.

If the menu is being displayed by the above processing (S3101: YES), or if the effect button is not pressed (S3102: NO), the process proceeds to step S3106, and "operation management during menu display" showing details in FIG. 40. Perform "processing". This is the process when a button is pressed during the menu screen.

(Operation management process while menu is displayed: Fig. 40)
FIG. 40 shows the details of the operation management process during menu display. When the effect button 13 is pressed, "process when operating the effect button" is performed (S3201 = YES, S3202), and when the direction key 75 is pressed, "process when operating the direction key" is performed (S3201 = NO, S3207). = YES, S3208), the effect processing is performed according to the operation of the effect button 13 and the direction key 75.

In FIG. 40, when the effect button 13 and the direction key 75 are operated and the effect button operation process or the direction key operation process is completed, the process proceeds to step S3203, the non-operation timer is set to 20 seconds, and the demonstration is started. The timer is set to 180 seconds (S3204), and the process proceeds to step S3205. Then, it is determined whether or not the non-operation timer is zero. If the non-operation timer is not zero (S3205: NO), the operation management process during menu display is exited as it is, and if the non-operation timer is zero (S3205: YES), the menu display end process (S3206) is performed and demo. Start processing the screen (during customer waiting production).

(Outgoing ball ranking display processing: Fig. 41)
The payout ranking display process of FIG. 41 shows a process (ball payout ranking display process) when the menu item “main sunrise ball ranking 102f” shown in FIG. 43 is determined as one of the processes at the time of operating the direction keys (the payout ranking display process). S3301).

The payout ranking display is a payout ranking screen from the time the power is turned on to the first big hit. Here, in the case of the setting change confirmed background image display (S2104), the setting change confirmed character background image is displayed, and in the case of the morning one normal background image display (S2109), the morning one normal character background image is displayed.

However, in this embodiment, the ball output ranking screen after the second big hit (at the time of the second big hit, the character background image determined by the character background image lottery is displayed) is the previous ending effect (during the big hit end INT). The background image displayed in (Production) and the same character background image are displayed. Details of this will be described later in FIG. 58.

In the setting change suggestion effect (notice of morning one gakkun, notice of background change in morning one, notice during ball ejection ranking) explained above, the setting was changed (with setting change) when an unusual effect appeared. It was explained as a definite notification of the existence. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may include a fake effect (gase effect). For example, the movable body operates, and the same operation as the morning notice is generated, but the reliability is less than 100%. In the case of this form, in the above morning one Gakkun notice execution lottery (S2331 in FIG. 35), for example, the winning of the real Gakkun notice is 80%, the winning of the Gakkun notice is 10%, and the loss (default operation) is 10%. do it. In this case, even if a Gakkun notice occurs, it is not a definitive notification, so it is possible to give the player a guessing element that "there is a high possibility that the setting has been changed". In this way, by notifying the player that "the setting may have been changed", a new setting estimation element is created, and the fun of the game can be improved.

<Setting suggestion effect: FIGS. 45 to 47>
In the above, the setting change suggestion effect is displayed when the first effect in the morning is activated, but in the present embodiment, the current setting value (internal setting value) is how many as a result of the setting change. The effect "setting suggestion effect" that makes the element (setting guessing element) that is useful for guessing whether the value is the value of is appear is also configured to be able to appear.

FIG. 45 shows a series of game progresses from the state of "waiting for customers" to the state of "during symbol change" to "during big hit", and the types of setting suggestion effects performed during that period, at the time of appearance of the effects. It is shown separately. FIG. 46 is an enlarged view on the left side thereof, and FIG. 47 is an enlarged view on the right side.

(Upper column of FIG. 45, FIG. 47)
Explaining each period of the game progress, in "waiting for customers", "initialization (timing 01-02)" of the frame accessory and the board accessory → "operation notification (timing 03)" that performs menu notification and volume / light amount notification. ~ 04) "→" Demo (timing 05-07) "that introduces the model, company logo, and alerts you to the immersiveness" → "Menu screen (timing 05-07) that displays the menu screen separately in the first and second layers The period of "" changes.

The "changing" pattern is divided into "before reach", "after reach", and "after reach" periods. In the period before reach, "winning (change start) (timing 10)" at the time when the game ball wins and the symbol change starts → The period when the first symbol stops after the symbol changes at low speed or high speed. Periods such as "low-speed fluctuation, high-speed fluctuation, first symbol stop (timing 11 to 13)", and "pseudo-ream (timing 14 to 16)" in which pseudo fluctuation is performed 1 to 3 times can be changed. In the post-reach period, for example, in the case of "second symbol stop (timing 17)" in which the second symbol for forming the reach state is stopped → "normal reach (timing 18)" that occurs as a hit-and-miss, → SP reach. Has "development fanning (reach title notice)" and "winning fanning" that suggest the development from normal reach to SP reach, and in the case of "SPSP reach" that belongs to the high expectation strong SP reach type, SPSP reach Each staged period (timing 19-21), such as a "development fan" that suggests development into, may be included.

Furthermore, in the case of strong SP reach (SPSP reach), the period of "development fanning (reach title notice)" → "winning fanning" that suggests the development to SPSP reach changes (timing 19-21). In addition, during the period of "after the end of reach", in the case of a specific reach effect, the lost symbol is displayed once, but the decorative symbol changes again and all the symbols stop at the winning symbol. The period (timing 24 to 25) of (so-called "revival production") changes.

As already explained, "during big hit (during big hit game)" has "opening period", "round game period (up to the maximum number of rounds)", and "ending period", which are divided into these periods in the figure. The "ending" includes "A pattern" and "B pattern", and one of them is selectively used. Here, a big hit with a maximum number of rounds of 7R is dealt with.

In the "opening period", the period of "big hit notification, right-handed instruction effect (timing 26 to 27)" changes. Next, in the "round game period", a story-like "battle production (timing 28 to 31)" is developed from 1R to 4R among the round games that continue from 1R to 7R. This battle production is a production that conceals the type of the jackpot this time, and specifically, it conceals whether the jackpot this time is a probabilistic jackpot or a time-saving jackpot. In addition, during the round game of the specific round (here, the 4th round), it is a period during which the "large winning opening winning sound change notice" described later, which is one of the setting suggestion effects, can appear (timing 31). ) ". Then, the period of "character introduction production (timing 33-34)" changes from "result production (timing 32)" that informs 5R of the victory / defeat of the battle production, that is, whether it is a probable change jackpot or a time-saving jackpot. do. Next, in the "Ending A pattern", "Transition mode display (timing 35 to 36)" and "Company logo (company name) display (timing 37)" including mode display and warning display for forgetting to remove the IC card are lined up. Will be. In the "Ending B pattern", "Transition mode display (timing 38-39)" including mode display and IC forgetting warning display, "Momeri included warning (timing 40)", and "Company logo (company name)" ( Timing 41) ”is displayed. The period is changed.

(Type of setting suggestion effect: left column of FIG. 45)
The left column of FIG. 45 shows the types of setting suggestion effects that appear during the game progress, that is, during the symbol game. In the case of this embodiment, the following 14 types of setting suggestion effects are prepared. There is. Some of these setting suggestion effects belong to the "changing effect" that appears during the symbol game. The setting suggestion effect belonging to the changing effect (the setting suggestion effect during change) acts as a notice effect during change, suggests the degree of expectation that a specific notice effect occurs, and does not suggest any of these expectations. , Simply suggest settings. For example, a setting value is suggested by the appearance rate of the changing effect, or a probability that a predetermined event occurs (appears) at a predetermined timing (for example, after the execution of the changing advance notice effect) is determined according to the set value. There are some that suggest the set value by making them different. On the other hand, there are some that belong to the "non-variable effect" that appears during the hit game or while waiting for customers, instead of appearing during the symbol game (non-variable setting suggestion effect). By providing these various setting suggestion effects, the fun of the setting estimation element can be increased, and the game interest of the player can be improved. Hereinafter, the setting suggestion effect will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 45.

(Setting suggestion production 01: "Amidakuji, Omikuji point suggestion")
This setting suggestion effect 01 (effect name: Amidakuji, Omikuji point suggestion) is a specific setting in the period during the change, specifically, the period from the start of the change to the stop of the first symbol (timing 10 to 12). When a suggestion image (for example, an image obtained with a specific number of points), for example, "a production in which 50 or 100P (points) are given by Amidakuji or Omikuji" appears (usually 10P to 50P), expectations for a high setting range increase. That is. This "Amidakuji, Omikuji point suggestion" belongs to the variable production, but belongs to the variable setting suggestion non-notice production in that it does not suggest the winning expectation. In addition, "Amidakuji, Omikuji point suggestion" is a special setting suggestion effect that requires the transition to the menu notification (timing 03) during the period of waiting for customers, that is, during the demonstration (timing 05 to 07). Specifically, when the screen is moved to the menu screen, it appears on the condition that it is won by a predetermined lottery (for example, it is won at 1%). Do not execute the lottery. In addition, although it is shown as the first section of the game progress in FIGS. 45 and 47, this "Amidakuji, Omikuji point suggestion" may appear even during the end interval after the big hit.

(Setting suggestion production 02: "Button rattling notice")
This setting suggestion effect 02 (effect name: button rattling notice) is equivalent to a gackon notice, and does not perform "setting suggestion" as described as "none" for the setting difference, but for comparison. It is listed here. Since this setting suggestion effect 02 corresponds to a gackon notice that can occur only in the morning, a movable body (normally) incorporated in the effect button 13 at the time of the first winning (at the start of fluctuation) (timing 10) after the store opens. The player is told that the setting has been changed (including retouching to the same set value) by vibrating or rocking the pressing part of the button 13A or the movable body 73) of the exhilarating button 70 in small steps and the movement occurring. Notify.

(Setting suggestion effect 03: "Normal reach symbol suggestion (tenpai symbol notice)")
As shown in FIG. 48 (a), this setting suggestion effect 03 (effect name: normal reach symbol suggestion) is the case of "N reach designated reach loss fluctuation pattern" among the reach fluctuation patterns (variation at the time of winning a small hit). It is a setting suggestion effect that can appear in), and it is a setting during change in that it has an effect mode related to reach variation (notice effect), that is, a function as a notice effect and a function as a setting suggestion effect. It belongs to the suggestion notice production. In the normal reach symbol suggestion, when the first symbol is stopped and then the second symbol is stopped and becomes normal reach (timing 17, 18), the tenpai symbol (reach symbol) related to the current set value, or finally stopped. It is an effect that suggests the current set value by making the decorative stop symbol (here, the lost symbol after N reach) appear. For example, "the reach symbol (for example, Arabic numeral) at N reach is larger when it is set high" or "decoration stop symbol" is larger when it is set high. be. In other words, it is a "tenpai symbol notice" that suggests a set value by a tenpai symbol (reach symbol).

In this example, the tenpai symbol lottery table shown in FIG. 49 is provided for each set value. In addition, the lottery table of the tenpai pattern of FIG. 49 is a simplified table structure in order to facilitate the understanding of the present invention. Actually, a lottery table of tenpai symbols corresponding to N reach 1 and 2 is provided, and even if the same N reach is used, the symbol lottery result, the number of pending balls, and a specific set value (for example, setting). 6) is related to the appearance rate of a specific reach symbol according to the N reach type, such as the appearance rate of a specific symbol (for example, 6 symbols) differs between N reach 1 and N reach 2. There are many elements to do.

This tenpai symbol lottery table has a table configuration in which the type of the tenpai symbol can be determined so as to reflect the rank of the current set value. That is, in the case of setting 4, the ratio of 4 symbols is high, in the case of setting 5, the ratio of 5 symbols is high, and in the case of setting 6, the ratio of 6 symbols is high.

In this example, 1 symbol and 7 symbols do not correspond to any set value, that is, in the case of a tenpai with 1 symbol and 7 symbols, or when the tenpai is stopped in the listening state (in the case of the decorative stop symbol "101"). It is a tenpai pattern of "no setting suggestion" without setting suggestion. Therefore, listening to 1 or 7 symbols is not related to the set value. The other tenpai symbols 2 to 6 correspond to the settings 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, and the ratio of 2 symbols, 3 symbols, 4 symbols, 5 symbols, and 6 symbols to be listened to is high, respectively. .. It should be noted that the symbols that can form a reach state, in the case of the present embodiment, the symbols 1 to 7 serve as the above-mentioned "reach constituent symbols".

This rule for the appearance of the normal reach symbol suggestion is a rule only in the normal state (low probability / no electric support state), and this rule does not apply at least in the time saving state or high probability state accompanied by the electric support state. .. That is, the normal reach symbol suggestion can appear only in the normal state. This is because the special figure time saving function is activated while the electric support is present, and the symbol game is digested at a higher speed than in the normal state. Since there is no electric support during the latent state, the normal reach symbol suggestion may appear as in the normal state. On the contrary, it is not necessary to make the normal reach symbol suggestion appear because it is considered to be in a high base state of high probability.

In addition, in the case where the reach symbols are replaced in the middle of the fluctuation, for example, after first listening to 2 symbols (2 symbols reach symbols), then changing to 4 symbols (4 symbols reach symbols), the 4 symbols In the case where the tenpai is lost (for example, "434" is the final stop symbol), the decorative stop symbol (434) stopped by the loss is considered to suggest this normal reach symbol. The above-mentioned "normal reach symbol suggestion" is a special setting suggestion in which whether or not to appear is determined according to the game state, the jackpot lottery probability state, or the game state and the jackpot lottery probability state. It can be said to be a production.

Further, in this embodiment, the N reach type is the target of the tenpai symbol notice, and the reason is as described below. N reach has a higher appearance rate than SP reach, and is therefore a notice effect (reach effect) with a relatively low expectation of winning. Therefore, normally, if N reach occurs, the player does not have a feeling of expectation of winning the big hit, and receives an impression of digestive game like a mere loss fluctuation, and for advanced players, There are many cases where it is bothersome even though it is one of the productions during the fluctuation of the angle. However, in this normal reach symbol suggestion, there is a possibility that a setting suggestion is made at the time of N reach, and when the N reach appears, the player becomes very interested in the reach symbol and the decoration stop symbol. As a result, it is possible to reduce the appearance of the N reach fluctuation as a digestive game, and to improve the player's motivation and interest in the game. It should be noted that one or more types of SP reach types can also be the target of the tenpai symbol notice. When targeting SP reach, it has the following effects. Contrary to N reach, SP reach has a low appearance rate and a relatively high expectation of winning. Therefore, if SP reach occurs, the player will have a great expectation of winning. However, if the result is "missing", the degree of disappointment is high because of the high expectations. However, if the setting is suggested at the time of loss, the player will be interested in the loss at the time of SP reach. As a result, the degree of disappointment at the time of SP reach loss can be reduced, and the player's motivation and interest in playing can be improved.

(Setting suggestion production 04: "Danger pattern title loss")
This setting suggestion effect 04 (effect name: Danger pattern title loss) is, for example, one aspect of a title notice effect (hereinafter referred to as “SP reach title notice”) related to SP reach or SPSP reach (timing 19, 22). ). This SP reach title notice indicates, for example, the degree of expectation of winning by changing the background image related to the title display to blue, green, red, D pattern (danger pattern), and rainbow color (correct). In this respect, "Danger pattern title loss" belongs to the setting suggestion notice effect during change. In particular, the title notice with the Danger pattern background (hereinafter abbreviated as "D pattern notice") suggests the highest expectation of winning during the title notice, except for the rainbow-colored background.

When this D pattern notice appears, as shown in FIG. 48 (b), the set value is referred to, and the set value is high because it is a notice that changes the winning expectation when the D pattern notice appears according to the set value. The more the D pattern notice appears, the lower the expectation of winning. For details, if the D pattern notice appears and the game is lost this time, "setting 2 or more is confirmed", and if it is in the high setting range (settings 5 and 6), the winning expectation of the D pattern notice decreases. ,. In the following, the winning expectation when the D pattern notice appears is referred to as "D pattern expectation".

In general, when a high expectation notice appears, the player has high expectations for the big hit winning. However, in spite of the appearance of the notice, if it becomes "missing", the degree of disappointment is also large due to the high expectation, and the motivation to play is diminished. The impression that "I didn't hit the jackpot" remains strong, and the distrust of the gaming machine increases. However, since this D pattern notice is a notice effect that the higher the set value, the lower the winning expectation, even if the D pattern notice appears and it is lost, "Setting 1 is denied". You can know that "It was done!" And "Setting 2 or more has been confirmed!". If it is found that it is not the minimum set value, the degree of disappointment of the player will be reduced, which will lead to an increase in the motivation for playing. Furthermore, if the D pattern notice appears and it is lost multiple times, the possibility that it is in the higher setting range will increase, so we expect the D pattern notice to appear and win the big hit, but I want it even if it is lost. It is a special setting suggestion production that can generate a contradictory expectation.

Regarding the appearance rate of the above D pattern notice, for example, when the D pattern notice at the time of strong SP reach loss appears, the D pattern notice appearance rate at the time of strong SP reach loss is set to "setting 1 is 0% (does not appear), other setting". 2 is 5%, setting 3 is 10%, setting 4 is 15%, setting 5 is 20%, setting 6 is 50%, and so on. The higher the setting value, the higher the appearance rate of the D pattern notice at the time of loss. In the case of a lottery form in which the appearance rate of the D pattern notice at the time of a strong SP reach big hit is "the same or substantially the same appearance rate at each set value", the result is as follows.
(A) When the D pattern notice appears at the time of strong SP reach, in the case of setting 1, it is correct at that point (because the D pattern notice does not appear at the time of loss). On the other hand, in the case of settings 2 to 6, it is not certain, but the higher the setting, the lower the expectation of winning. In this sense, the winning expectation is higher for the set value than for the set value 6. Further, in the case of setting 1, since it is correct, the D pattern notice has both the function of suggesting the setting and the function of the correct effect. It should be noted that the appearance rate at the time of loss may be set to 0% for a plurality of specific set values (for example, settings 1 to 3). In this case, settings 1 to 3 are denied by "D pattern notice appearance->loss" (setting 4 or more is confirmed), but in the case of settings 1 to 3, "D pattern notice is announced at the present time" is correct.
(B) In the case of "strong SP reach D pattern notice appearance → loss", setting 1 is denied (D pattern notice does not appear when setting 1 is lost), that is, setting 2 or more is confirmed. , Can be given a setting guessing factor that the setting may be high. Then, the more the D pattern notice appears and the loss is repeated, the higher the expectation of the high setting range.

As described above, in the D pattern notice, the higher the loss frequency, the higher the possibility of setting 6, that is, the higher the setting, the lower the D pattern expectation. However, even if it is said that the higher the setting, the lower the expectation of the D pattern, in reality, the expectation of winning when the D pattern notice appears is set to a high expectation of about 65%, so the D pattern notice is given. At the time of appearance, the expectation of winning can be greatly fueled.

In addition, in the D pattern notice according to this embodiment, when the D pattern notice having different appearance timings can be generated in combination in the same symbol game, and the notice effect accompanied by the D pattern appears twice. Is "winning (big hit winning confirmed)" at that time. For example, in the case of "D pattern notice appears at SP reach title notice (first D pattern notice) → D pattern notice appears at SPSP reach title notice (second D pattern notice)", the first D pattern notice The notice works as a setting suggestion effect, but since the second D pattern notice is "correct" at the present time, this second D pattern notice does not function as a setting suggestion effect. In the case of this example, the second D pattern notice functions as a notice effect (here, a correct effect). That is, even if it is the same type of D pattern notice, it is a special setting suggestion effect that does not function as a setting suggestion effect depending on the appearance timing. If the D pattern notice appears during the time saving state or the probability change state, the lottery for the D pattern notice as the setting suggestion effect is not performed because it is correct.

(Setting suggestion production 05: "Winning change")
This setting suggestion effect 05 (effect name: winning change) is a player participation type setting suggestion effect that appears in the winning fan (timing 23) after the SPSP reach, and is usually (default) "try to push it all at once?" A button image (operation instruction effect) that prompts the user to press the effect button 13 is displayed together with the image display of the wording (conversation effect), but if the wording is a specific wording different from the usual one, the type of the specific wording. The setting is suggested according to the above. For example, if the specific wording is "Do you want to hit it repeatedly?", "Set 2 or more is confirmed", if "Do you want to press and hold it once?", "Suggest settings 4, 5, 6", "Ippen refreshing button" If it is "Do you want to press?", It means "Setting 6 is confirmed". In the present embodiment, when this specific wording occurs, a specific jackpot type (for example, probabilistic jackpot) is further determined. In particular, when "Do you want to press the refreshing button at once?" Appears, the movable body 73 rolls and the inside of the empty frame emits rainbow colors, and along with the probable change jackpot, it is a production content that congratulates the confirmation of setting 6. This "winning change" belongs to the setting suggestion notice effect during change, as in the above setting suggestion effect 04 (danger pattern title loss), in that it announces the probability change jackpot.

(Setting suggestion production 06: "Change in the winning sound of the big prize opening")
FIG. 48 (c) shows an outline of this setting suggestion effect 06 (effect name: change in the winning sound of the large winning opening). In the present embodiment, in the round game during the big hit game, when the game ball wins the big winning opening 50, a sound effect (big winning opening winning sound) appears, but the specific Rth (the big winning opening winning sound) during the big hit In the round game (timing 31) of the 4th round (here, the 4th round), the specific count (here, when there is a fifth prize) is different from the normal "default sound (normal grand prize opening prize sound)". When the "specific sound (special grand prize opening prize sound)" sounds, that is, when there is a change in the winning sound from the default sound "Piro ♪" to the specific sound "Pupun ♪", there is a setting suggestion based on that. It is a setting suggestion production (notice of change in the winning sound of the big winning opening). The change in the winning sound of the big prize opening appears during the big hit game, and it does not have the function of the advance notice effect and only suggests the setting, and it is not the changing effect. Non-notice effect (a mode of non-variable setting suggestion effect) ". This concept of "specific sound" includes not only sound without a message, but also voice with a specific meaning. If the change in the winning sound of the large winning opening has, for example, a function of notifying the presence or absence of the secured retention in the operation holding ball, that is, a function as a warning effect, it belongs to the "non-variable setting suggestion advance notice effect". It becomes.

<Control example: Grand prize opening winning command reception processing>
FIG. 50 shows a control example of a change in the winning sound of the large winning opening. When the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) receives the above-mentioned "large prize opening winning command" at the time of winning the large winning opening 50 from the main control unit 20, it analyzes the large winning opening winning command and includes the number of prize balls. Acquire information and the like (S2551). As already described, this prize ball number information is used for counting the "total number of balls to be played at the time of consecutive villas" related to the ranking display (FIG. 44).

Next, it is determined whether or not it is the specific round (4Rth) and whether or not it is the specific count number (fifth prize) (S2552 to S2553), and if it is not the specific round or the specific count number (S2552 to S2553). S2552 = NO, S2553 = NO), setting the effect data of the default sound (normal sound) (S2558). On the other hand, in the case of a specific round and a specific count number (YES for both S2552 and S2553), the set value information is acquired (S2554), and the large winning opening winning sound change notice lottery process is executed (S2555). Here, referring to the large winning opening winning sound selection table shown in FIG. 51 (a), it is determined by lottery whether to use the default sound or the specific sound according to the set value. The numerical values in the illustrated table indicate the distribution value, and the "distribution value / size of the lottery area" is the lottery probability of the default sound or the specific sound.

As shown in the figure, the appearance rate of specific sounds according to the set value is determined in this large winning opening winning sound selection table. As can be seen from FIG. 51 (a), in the case of setting 1, no specific sound is emitted. That is, as long as a specific sound is generated, it is suggested that "setting 2 or more is confirmed". Further, when paying attention to the setting 2 to the setting 6, the higher the setting value, the higher the probability that the specific sound is generated. That is, the higher the number of occurrences of the specific sound, the higher the possibility that the setting range is high.

If you win in the big prize opening winning sound change notice lottery, that is, if you win a specific sound (S2556: YES), set the production data for the specific sound (S2557), and if it is lost, that is, the default sound (S2556: NO), the effect data for the default sound is set (S2558). Then, the process of receiving the prize-winning command is exited. As a result, the winning sound is output. In this way, when the game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening (specific winning opening) during the winning game, the effect control unit 24 produces a plurality of types of sound effects (for example, a normal winning sound and a specific winning sound for suggesting a setting). It is equipped with a functional unit that controls the appearance of either one. Further, it is provided with a setting effect control means capable of controlling the appearance of a setting suggestion effect (change in the winning sound of the large winning opening) that suggests a set value according to the appearance rate of the specific sound.

In this example, if a specific sound "Pupun ♪" is heard at the 5th count of the 4th round, it is confirmed that the setting is 2 or more. However, just because the specific sound "Pupun ♪" did not sound does not deny the possibility that the setting is 2 or higher. For example, setting 1 = normal sound (default) 100%, setting 2 = normal sound (default) 98%, setting 3 = normal sound (default) 96%, setting 4 = normal sound (default) 94%. That is, a lottery that differs depending on the set value is performed. The setting suggestion effect (specific sound) due to the change in the winning sound does not appear in setting 1, but appears in settings 2 to 6. And this setting suggestion effect (specific sound) is targeted at all big hits, and there is a possibility that it occurs at the 5th count of 4R in each big hit. Further, when a plurality of large winning openings are provided, the setting suggestion effect (specific sound) may be common to or different from the plurality of large winning openings. In this example, the 4th R (round immediately before the result production of the battle effect) is targeted for the change in the winning sound of the large winning opening, but it is preferable to target the 5R result effect (timing 32). The reason is as follows. In the case where a defeat production (a production that appears at the time of a short-time big hit and notifies the time-saving transition) appears in the result production, the player's probable change rush expectation that faces the battle production result with a probable change expectation. Is scraped off, causing a decline in playing motivation. Therefore, even if the result effect is a defeat effect, if a change in the winning sound of the big winning opening occurs, a setting suggestion is made and the player's motivation to play can be improved. In addition, it may be determined whether or not the change in the winning sound of the large winning opening can be executed according to the effect result. For example, it is not executed in the case of a victory effect, but is executed in the case of a defeat effect. In this case, a special setting suggestion that a setting suggestion effect appears depending on whether or not a specific effect (here, an effect other than the advance notice effect and one of the hitting effects) is executed. It will be a production. In other words, it is a special setting suggestion effect that whether or not it appears is determined according to the hit type (here, depending on whether it is a probabilistic jackpot or a time-saving jackpot).

(Variation example of change in winning sound of big winning mouth C1)
As a modification C1, a configuration may be configured in which the large winning opening winning sound change notice lottery process (S2555) is executed every time there is a winning in a specific round. That is, in the case of the modified example C1, each time a prize is won in the big winning opening, a chance of sounding a specific sound is created, and a chance of guessing a setting suggestion increases. FIG. 51 (b) is a large winning opening winning sound selection table of the modified example C1, and as shown in the figure, the probability of occurrence of a specific sound according to the set value is determined as in FIG. 51 (a). In the case of this modification C1, the process of S2553 may be excluded. The specific round may not be one round, but may be all rounds (timing 28 to 34) or a plurality of rounds (either continuous or intermittent). For example, between 5 and 7R (timing 32 to 34), even rounds (2, 4, 6R (timing 29, 31, 33)) and the like.

(Variation example of change in winning sound of big winning mouth C2)
Further, as a modification C2, when there is a prize (over prize) exceeding the maximum number of prizes (10 pieces) in the specific round (after the 11th prize), the large prize opening prize sound change notice lottery process is executed. It may be configured. That is, when a specific sound (a sound different from the normal over-winning sound) is heard at the time of over-winning, the setting is suggested. The large winning opening winning sound selection table of this modification C2 is shown in FIG. 51 (c). Similarly to FIG. 51 (a), the lottery table of FIG. 51 (c) also defines the probability of occurrence of a specific sound according to the set value. In the case of this modification C2, the process of S2553 may be replaced with a process of determining whether or not an over-winning is achieved. It should be noted that over-winning does not occur frequently due to the design. Therefore, not only in the specific round, the large winning opening winning sound change notice lottery may be executed in all rounds (for example, 1 to 7R) or some plurality of rounds (for example, 5R to 7R).

(Variation example of change in winning sound of big winning mouth C3)
Further, in the above, the notice of change in the winning sound of the big winning opening is executed for all the big hits, but it may be configured to execute only one or a plurality of specific big hits. For example, the jackpot (probability change) that triggers the transition to the state with electric support, which is executed only by the probability variation jackpot, is executed only by the time-saving jackpot, or is executed only by the jackpot with a specific maximum number of rounds (for example, 16R). It is executed by a big hit (a big hit and / or a short-time big hit), or by a big hit (probability variable big hit and / or a latent big hit) that triggers a transition to a high probability.

(Variation example of change in winning sound of big winning mouth C4)
The specific sound of the present embodiment or the above-mentioned modification C1 may be, for example, an over-winning sound at the time of over-winning. Further, the specific sound in the above modification C3 may be a normal sound. In this case, despite the over-winning, the normal sound appears and the player can feel a sense of discomfort, so that it is possible to "suggest a setting by producing a sense of discomfort". Further, in the present embodiment and the modified examples C1 to C4, the setting suggestion by the specific sound has been described, but the setting suggestion by the silent sound may be used instead of emitting the specific sound. In this case as well, it is possible to make the setting suggestion effect function as a discomfort effect that the winning sound is not produced even though the prize is won. In addition, in the big prize opening winning sound change, the winning sound (sound effect) is targeted, but the setting is suggested by using other effects (at least one of light effect, movable body effect, and image display effect). It can be performed. Further, in addition to the normal sound, at least one of a light effect dedicated to setting suggestion, a movable body effect, and an image display effect may be configured to appear.

(Setting suggestion effect 07: "End interval screen change")
This setting suggestion effect 07 (effect name: end interval screen change) is a big hit at the "transition mode display (timing 35 or 38)" of the end interval section of the big hit, specifically, at a predetermined timing during the ending effect. In the "air combat entry screen (probability change state transition screen)"("air combat entry" screen in FIG. 53) displayed as the end screen (end interval screen), a character image (for example, a specific object display) and / or a suggestion. It is a setting suggestion effect (ending screen change notice) that makes a color image (for example, a background image color) appear and suggests a setting according to the content. The change in the end interval screen also belongs to the non-variable setting suggestion effect, like the change in the winning sound of the big winning opening. In the case of this example, the above "air combat entry screen" is displayed in the case of a probabilistic jackpot (specific jackpot), but it is not limited to this, and the jackpot (probability change) that triggers the transition to the state with electric support. In the case of big hits and / or short-time big hits, or in the case of big hits with a specific maximum number of rounds (for example, 16R), or in the case of big hits (probability variable big hits and / or latent big hits) that trigger the transition to high probability. It may be displayed in.

In this setting suggestion effect 07 (end interval screen change), if the character image and / or the suggestion color image appearing on the air battle entry screen is a "specific image" different from the normal "default image", that is, the jackpot ends. When the screen changes from the "default jackpot end screen" to the "specific jackpot end screen", it is assumed that there is a setting suggestion based on that. The content of the setting suggestion is to suggest the setting according to the type of the specific image on the air combat entry screen.

Images such as characters and suggested colors that appear on the air battle entry screen are replaced every time a big hit is made, and by default it changes according to the number of consecutive villas, but the types or combinations of images that appear are the same as the basic pattern. .. If the lottery for activating the setting suggestion effect (for example, the ED character background effect lottery process (S2514) of FIG. 58 described later) is won, a specific character image different from the default character image is obtained. The characters displayed on the jackpot end interval screen are displayed in the same variation (for example, combination) on the ball ejection ranking display (FIG. 44) on the demo screen, and the character images on the ball ejection ranking display ((A) to (A) to FIG. 53). (See (F)) is also rewritten. Therefore, when the above-mentioned notice during the payout ranking (FIG. 44 (b)) is executed, the payout ranking display related to the notice during the first payout ranking in the morning is updated after the first big hit game, and the big hit game starts. At the same time, the notice will be terminated during the morning one-ball ranking.

FIG. 52 shows the combinations of character images appearing on the air combat entry screen (“air combat entry” screen of FIG. 53), / or the types of suggested color images, and the content of the setting suggestion by them. FIG. 53 shows the corresponding parts of these. In this embodiment, both the character image and the suggested color image are treated as specific images, but only one of them may be treated. The above-mentioned air combat entry screen related to the change in the end interval screen will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53.

First, an outline of the setting suggestion contents due to the change of the end interval screen will be described. For example, it is possible to use the following production modes (a) to (shi) to suggest settings.
(A) "Low setting suggestion effect" that suggests a low setting range (settings 1 to 3, 1 to 2, 2 to 3, etc.).
(Sa) "High setting suggestion effect" that suggests a high setting range (settings 4 to 6, 4 to 5, 5 to 6, etc.).
(G) "Even-numbered setting suggestion effect" that suggests even-numbered settings (settings 2, 4, and 6).
(Y) "Odd number setting suggestion effect" that suggests odd number settings (settings 1, 3, 5).
(M) "Specific setting confirmation effect" that deterministically notifies a specific setting value (any of settings 1 to 6 may be used). For example, "setting N confirmation effect" that deterministically notifies "setting N". However, it is not preferable to inform the internal set value deterministically. The reason is that anything that definitively suggests a low setting area, such as setting 1 and setting 2 confirmation, reduces the player's willingness to play. Therefore, it is preferable to deterministically notify any one of the settings 4 to 6 in the high setting region. In particular, if a specific setting confirmation effect such as setting 5 confirmation or setting 6 confirmation appears, the player's willingness to play can be improved.
(M) A "specific setting denial effect" that deterministically notifies that the value is not a specific setting value (any of settings 1 to 6 may be used).
(S) "Specific range suggestion effect" that suggests the set value of a specific range. For example, it suggests settings 3 to 5 (α ≤ set value ≤ β), suggests settings 4 or more (α ≤ set values), and suggests a plurality of specific values of “settings 1, 3, 5, 6”. .. Also, by making the appearance rate different according to the set value, it is suggested that the possibility of a certain set value is high / low, for example, it is difficult to appear in setting 1, moderately appears in setting 4, and easy to appear in setting 6. do.
As can be seen from FIG. 52, in the "air combat entry screen (change in end interval screen)", setting suggestion effects belonging to all types (a) to (shi) above can be displayed. These contents are not limited to the end interval screen change (setting suggestion effect 07). In other setting suggestion effects (setting suggestion effects 01 to 06, 08 to 14), the effect mode is such that at least one (all or a part thereof) of the above (a) to (shi) is reported. Can be done.

In FIG. 52, in the basic pattern, two main characters are displayed on the left and right on the screen. For example, FIG. 53 (A) shows that the combination of the left character and the right character of the ED effect number 2 is "fighter C, no character + blue background", which is one of the default images. In this default image, any of settings 1 to 6 may appear (see ED effect numbers 1 and 2), and the selection rate is the same for each setting value. That is, the appearance of the default image does not suggest any setting (setting is not suggested). In FIG. 52, the selection rates in settings 1 to 6 are as shown on the right side.

Further, FIGS. 53 (B) to (F) show a part of the specific image in FIG. 52 picked up. for example,
The "fighter D, fighter G + green background" of the ED effect number 6 shown in FIG. 53 (B) suggests the settings 2, 4, and 6 of the above (ki), and the "even number setting" of the above (ki). It belongs to "suggestion production".
The “no character, no character + rainbow-colored background” of the ED effect number 10 shown in FIG. 53 (C) deterministically notifies the setting 6, and is used in the “specific setting confirmation effect” of the above (me). Belongs.
The “fighter E, fighter C + black background” of the ED effect number 13 shown in FIG. 53 (D) suggests the denial of the setting 3 and belongs to the “specific setting denial effect” of the above (mi).
The “fighter G, fighter E + golden background” of the ED effect number 17 shown in FIG. 53 (E) suggests the setting 3 or higher and belongs to the “specific range suggestion effect” of the above (s).
“Fujimaru-kun, no character + golden background” of the ED production number 11 shown in FIG. 53 (F) suggests setting 4 or more (settings 4, 5, and 6 are confirmed), and is “specific” in (shi) above. It belongs to "range suggestion production".

Further, in the present embodiment, the following supportive support is provided when giving a setting suggestion to a player who does not know the character used for the setting suggestion or a game beginner who does not know much about the content of the setting suggestion effect itself. It is possible to make various setting suggestion effects (quasi-setting suggestion effects) appear. This will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 52.

In FIG. 52, the supportive setting suggestion contents from the viewpoint of the character image / background color are as follows (d) to (c).
(D) In principle, one character appears = nothing is suggested (non-setting suggestion: default system). However, even if only one character appears, a character image with a high appearance rate (weapon image of a fighter, tank, etc.) has no idea (meaning content recalled or associated with that image). If a different character image (animation character image such as Fujimaru-kun or Fujika-chan) appears, there is some suggestion or confirmation of the setting (for example, "there is a high possibility of a high setting range").
(H) Two characters appear = There is some suggestion or confirmation of setting.
(M) Character does not appear = setting N is confirmed (in the example shown in the figure, the maximum setting is 6 confirmed).
(C) The background color has the following suggestions. "Blue background" = "No suggestion (non-setting suggestion)", "Green background" = "Even setting value" or "Odd setting value" or "Specific setting value including setting 1" (Suggesting some setting), "Black background" = "Not a specific setting value", "Golden background" = "More than a specific setting value other than setting 1", "Iridescent background" = "The highest setting is 6."
The above (d) is intended for players and beginners who do not know the names of weapons. In addition, the "background color" makes it easy to understand its role, and this also uses a background color that is easy to see and understand, rather than setting estimation (high degree of difficulty in discrimination) that includes complicated character combinations. Depending on the color type, it informs the beginners of the game that there is some kind of setting suggestion (low discrimination difficulty). These contents are not limited to the end interval screen change (setting suggestion effect 07), but also in other setting suggestion effects (setting suggestion effects 01 to 06, 08 to 14), at least one of the above (d) to (c). It can be an effect mode that informs the suggestion content of (all or a part thereof). Further, the combination of the above (a) to (c) can be appropriately determined.

(Setting suggestion production 08: "Blessing Ai Voice")
This setting suggestion effect 08 (effect name: blessing ai voice) is the "logo display time (timing 35 to 37, or timing 38 to 41)" in the end interval section of the jackpot, specifically, the ending effect related to the probability variation jackpot. It appears at a predetermined timing (after the above transition mode is displayed), and is one of the player participation type setting suggestion effects using the exhilarating button 70, and rarely appears (for example, the appearance rate is 1%). ) It is a setting suggestion effect. This blessing voice also belongs to the non-variable setting suggestion effect, like the above-mentioned large winning opening winning sound change and end interval change. In the blessing Ai voice, as a sound production, a voice (voice) of a specific character that congratulates the probability change transition is played (probability change rush blessing production), but it suggests that the voice is different from the default. For example, voice 1 is "setting 2 or more confirmed", voice 2 is "even number setting", voice 3 is "odd setting", voice 4 is "setting 3 or more", voice 5 is "setting 6 confirmed" and the like. As for which voice is to be output, that is, what kind of suggestion content is to be notified as the setting suggestion effect mode, as in the lottery form shown in FIG. 52, the effect mode related to the set value is determined by a predetermined lottery. It may be determined (the same applies to the setting suggestion effects 09 to 11 and 14 described later, and the description thereof will be omitted below). The blessing voice (sound effect) can appear simultaneously and in duplicate with the end interval change (image display effect), and it is possible to make a clearer setting guess from the setting suggestion contents of both.

(Setting suggestion effect 09: "Conversation notice suggestion")
This setting suggestion effect 09 (effect name: "conversation notice suggestion") is one of the so-called "step-up notice effects" that can appear during the period from the start of winning before the reach to the stop of the first symbol (timing 10 to 13). It is provided. This step-up notice production changes step by step from the first stage (SU1) production to the multiple stage production, and when it develops to a higher stage, the winning expectation increases (developed to the final stage). In this case, the expectation of winning is the highest). Conversation notice suggestion is one of the conversation effects, but it is not a player participation type like the above-mentioned winning change (setting suggestion effect 05), but a normal conversation effect in which the effect scenario progresses step up with the passage of time. be. This conversation notice suggestion is a setting suggestion based on the difference in the dialogue of the character displayed at a specific stage (for example, SU1), and is similar to the same event as the above-mentioned blessing voice (setting suggestion effect 08) (here). In the image display effect), the setting suggestion is performed according to the type of one or a plurality of types of specific dialogue images.

(Setting suggestion effect 10: "Constant rotation speed lamp setting suggestion")
This setting suggestion effect 10 (effect name: constant rotation speed lamp setting suggestion) can appear when the number of times the symbol game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times, and belongs to the changing setting suggestion non-notice effect. The suggestion of setting the constant rotation speed lamp is, for example, the predetermined timing during the symbol game when the symbol game is executed a predetermined number of times, such as the XX rotation speed from the time when the power is turned on and the XX rotation speed from the previous jackpot. (Timing 10 to 25), the effect LED such as the decorative lamp 45 is made to emit light in a predetermined color, and the setting is suggested by the difference in the emission color. For example, blue emission is "setting 2 or more confirmed", yellow emission is "even setting", green emission is "odd setting", red emission is "setting 4 or more confirmed", rainbow color is "setting 6 confirmed" and the like. It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to the light effect, but may be configured to suggest the setting by using another effect (at least one of the sound effect, the image display effect, and the movable body effect).

(Setting suggestion effect 11: "Specific symbol suggestion")
This setting suggestion effect 11 (effect name: specific symbol suggestion) can appear at the first symbol stop to the second symbol stop (timing 13 to 15, 17) before the reach, and is, for example, when executing a pseudo-ream. Pseudo-continuous symbols displayed in, the decorative symbol type at the time of the first stop (first stop symbol), and the symbol combination type of the decorative symbol at the first stop and the decorative symbol at the second stop (hereinafter, "first"). (Abbreviated as "second stop"), the setting is suggested by providing a setting difference in the appearance rate. The specific symbol suggestion is related to the changing effect related to the pseudo-ream, the normal variation, and the reach variation, and belongs to the changing setting suggestion notice effect. As a specific example of the specific symbol suggestion, for example, in the normal fluctuation, "when even symbols (2, 4, 6) are likely to appear in the first stop, there is a high possibility that an even number is set, and odd symbols (1, 3) are likely to be set. If 5) is likely to appear in the first stop, there is a high possibility of an odd number setting. "," If one symbol is likely to appear in the first stop symbol, setting 2 or more will be rich. "," Special When a certain symbol is stopped, setting 6 is confirmed "," the first and second stop is a specific stop ", and the like. The specific stop stitch includes a continuous stitch (for example, "12", "34", "56", etc.), a pinch stitch (for example, "13", "24", "35", etc.), and a specific stitch (for example, a minimum symbol). The maximum symbol combination "17", "71", etc.). Also, in the case of the pseudo-ream, as in the same event, the setting is suggested depending on what kind of symbol the pseudo-variation is executed. For example, when the appearance rate of the temporary stop stitch including "1 symbol" is high at the time of temporary stop, "setting 2 or more becomes rich", and when the pseudo change is executed at the temporary stop stitch including "7 symbols". "The high setting range becomes rich", and "Setting 6 is confirmed" when the pseudo fluctuation is executed with a specific symbol that is not the default. It should be noted that no specific symbol suggestion is made in the pseudo-ream with a high number of pseudo-variations. In the case of a high number of pseudo-reams (here, 3 times), the expectation of winning is high, suggesting the occurrence of SPSP reach, and other notice effects are compounded, and it is lively as a fanning effect. This is because it becomes difficult to determine whether the setting is suggested or the winning expectation is suggested, and the players may be confused and the production may be rather annoying.

(Setting suggestion effect 12: "Change in reach appearance rate")
This setting suggestion effect 12 (effect name: change in reach appearance rate) is to perform setting suggestion according to the appearance rate of a specific reach, and belongs to the setting suggestion notice effect during fluctuation. In the reach appearance rate change, the setting is suggested by the difference in the appearance rate of a specific fluctuation pattern. For example, if a specific SP reach appears, "setting 2 or more is confirmed", and if the appearance rate of a specific SP reach has a high probability or a low probability, "setting N is likely (low)". ) ”And so on. The reach appearance rate change is realized by making the selection rate of a specific fluctuation pattern different according to the set value in the fluctuation pattern distribution table, that is, by providing a setting difference in the selection rate of the specific fluctuation pattern. (See S413 in FIG. 21). How the appearance rate of a specific fluctuation pattern should be determined can be appropriately determined according to the content of the setting suggestion. For example, as the set value increases, the selectivity of the reach fluctuation pattern specified by a specific SP reach is relatively increased, or vice versa, or conversely, the selectivity is relatively decreased, or in the case of a specific set value. For example, the appearance rate is set to 0%. In the case of this embodiment, one or a plurality of types of specific SP reach are targeted for the reach appearance rate change (timing 19 to 23).

(Setting suggestion effect 13: "Stop sound lamp setting suggestion")
This setting suggestion effect 13 (effect name: stop sound lamp setting suggestion) is displayed when the decorative symbol after the end of reach is temporarily stopped (during shaking fluctuation before confirmation display) or when the decorative stop symbol is displayed (timing 25). It is a setting change suggestion effect using the "effect when the symbol is stopped". This stop sound lamp setting suggestion does not particularly suggest the winning expectation, and in this respect, it belongs to the variable setting suggestion non-notice effect. This suggestion of setting the sound lamp at the time of stop is when the display of the decorative symbol is stopped (either during the temporary stop state or at the time of the confirmed display), and the effect mode at the time of stop is a specific effect mode different from the usual one. In addition, setting suggestion is performed (at least one of sound effect, light effect, image display effect, and movable body effect can be used as the effect mode). For example, normally, a sound effect that the stop sound at the fixed constant time is "Pon ♪" (may be silent) appears, but when the sound effect is a specific stop sound that is different from the usual one, for example, "Dokan!" Suggests "setting 2 or more confirmed", and in the case of "daddy! (Machine gun sound)", "setting 4 or more confirmed". It should be noted that the stop sound lamp setting suggestion may be configured so that it can appear only during a specific period. For example, when the number of times the symbol game is executed after the power is turned on reaches a predetermined number of rotations (for example, a cumulative total of 2000 rotations), or a game period until a specific number of times after the predetermined number of rotations is reached (for example, a cumulative total of 2001 rotations or later). , Or every 20 rotations after the 2001th rotation in total), on a specific day or within a specific time based on RTC information.

(Setting suggestion effect 14: "Re-lottery suggestion")
This setting suggestion effect 14 (effect name: re-lottery suggestion) is a setting suggestion effect that can appear at the time of re-lottery (timing 24) after the end of reach. This "re-lottery" means that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped by the jackpot symbol at the end of the reach, then re-variably displayed from the temporarily stopped state (the symbol may be converted and displayed), and the jackpot symbol (provisional) is displayed again. This is an effect mode using a so-called "re-lottery effect" in which the same or different jackpot symbol as when stopped) is confirmed and displayed. The re-lottery suggestion is to suggest the setting while notifying the correct state, but to be precise, the big hit is not confirmed until the end of the symbol game, so in this respect, it belongs to the setting suggestion notice effect during fluctuation. I can say. However, the above-mentioned re-lottery effect is accompanied by a re-variable display of the decorative symbol, but it is an effect after the game result is derived and the result is found. Pseudo-variation) ”is different in nature. In the re-lottery suggestion, for example, the appearance rate of the jackpot symbol displayed at the time of temporary stop differs depending on the set value, or the jackpot symbol at the time of confirmed display after the re-lottery differs depending on the set value. conduct. For example, as in the same event as the above-mentioned normal reach symbol (setting suggestion effect 03), a setting difference is added to the displayed decorative symbol (here, the jackpot symbol at the time of temporary stop or after re-lottery). However, if the jackpot type is notified according to the jackpot symbol, such as when the odd-numbered symbols are the probabilistic jackpot (probability variation symbol) and the even-numbered symbol is the time-saving jackpot (time-saving symbol), the player will fall. In order not to provoke a feeling, if the temporary stop is a probabilistic symbol, the re-lottery suggestion is not executed, or, for example, "probable stop with the probabilistic symbol" 111 "→ the probabilistic symbol with a larger number than" 111 "(333, 555). It is preferable to suggest the setting that "setting 2 or more is confirmed" in the case of "confirmed display".

<Variation of lottery rate of setting suggestion effect: Fig. 54>
In the above setting suggestion effect, the appearance rate (also referred to as appearance rate, appearance rate, execution rate) is not always constant, and as shown in FIG. 54, the appearance rate, that is, the lottery probability (setting suggestion) at a predetermined change timing. There is a feature that (the basis of the appearance rate of the production) is changed (variable) (setting guessing element variable lottery form). In short, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the appearance rate is variable, that is, it is variable (variable) from a predetermined low probability to a high probability or from a high probability to a low probability. The change conditions include the arrival (start) / elapse (end) of a predetermined game period, the occurrence or number of occurrences of a specific event, and time information.

(About change timing (change opportunity))
The outline of the change timing is shown in FIG. 54. The change timing includes, for example, the following (A) to (E).
(A) A mode in which the time (including the date and time, day or hour) or the elapsed time from turning on the power is changed by using an RTC or a soft counter (see FIG. 54 (a)).
(B) A form that changes according to the game performance information. Specifically, the form is variable according to the number of out balls (so-called “driving amount”) (see FIG. 54 (b)).
(C) A form that changes according to the number of big hits (the number of big hit wins or the number of big hit game executions) For example, a form that changes between XX times and △△ times or XX times or more.
(D) A form that varies according to the number of rotations from the previous jackpot (the number of times the symbol game is executed from the previous jackpot). For example, a form that changes between XX rotations and △△ rotations from the previous big hit, or XX rotations or more. In other words, it is a form that can be changed by using the number of hits between big hits. The number of times the symbol game is executed can be grasped by receiving the variable pattern designation command and / or the decorative symbol designation command.
(E) There is a form in which two or more of the above (A) to (D) are combined.

(Changes)
As the content of the change, the appearance rate is variable only for the specific setting suggestion effect among the above setting suggestion effects 01 to 08, for example, only for the end interval screen change (setting suggestion effect 07) in FIG. 53, and other than that. There is a non-variable form for the setting suggestion effect. In this state, a dedicated table for changing the appearance rate (variation) (for example, FIGS. 61 to 62 described later) is prepared, the probability change jackpot is won, and the "air combat entry screen" related to the end interval screen change is prepared. (The "air combat entry" screen in FIG. 53) is displayed, and when a specific condition is satisfied, this dedicated table is referred to, and the appearance rate is changed accordingly. It should be noted that not only a specific setting suggestion effect may be targeted, but a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects may be targeted. For example, the end interval screen change (setting suggestion effect 07) and the large winning opening winning sound change (setting suggestion effect 06) may be targeted.

There are two ways to change the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect, for example, the following change pattern 1 and change pattern 2.
(Change pattern 1)
Create a tendency to increase the appearance rate (appearance ratio) of the setting suggestion effect in multiple lottery tables. For example, the following normal table TBL1 and dedicated table TBL2 are prepared, and the appearance rate (lottery probability) is determined as follows.
TBL1: Setting 1 (20%) to Setting 6 (40%)
TBL2: Setting 1 (40%) to Setting 6 (60%)
Setting suggestion effect by switching from the normal table TBL1 to the dedicated table TBL2 based on a predetermined change opportunity, for example, information on a specific period or a specific event (arrival or elapse of a specific period, occurrence of a specific event or the number of occurrences thereof, etc.) The appearance rate of the game will increase, and the chances for the player to encounter the setting suggestion effect will increase.

(Change pattern 2)
It is created in a plurality of lottery tables that the disparity between the settings of the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect becomes remarkable. For example, the following normal table TBL1 and dedicated table TBL2 are prepared, and the appearance rate is determined as follows.
TBL1: Setting 1 (20%) to Setting 6 (40%)
TBL2: Setting 1 (0%) to Setting 6 (99%)

By switching from the normal table TBL1 to the dedicated table TBL2, a specific setting range (for example, even setting (2, 4, 6), high setting range (setting 5, 6)) or a specific setting value (for example, setting 6) Increases the appearance rate of setting suggestion effects. In the case of the change pattern 2, the difference between the setting 1 and the setting 6 becomes remarkable. Therefore, for the player who tries to guess the setting, reliable information is increased, which is advantageous in determining the setting 6. For example, in the case where the special table TBL2 is referred to at a jackpot interval of 500 rotations or more, if a setting suggestion effect relating to a variable appearance rate target appears after the 500 rotations of the hamari, the setting 1 is denied. If it does not appear, setting 6 is almost denied.

Hereinafter, as a predetermined change trigger, as a process on the production control unit 24 side related to the amount of driving, the number of big hits, the time or the time from turning on the power, etc.
(I) Out ball number command reception process (one of the above command analysis processes (S1008)) and lottery mode management process 1 (FIGS. 55 to 56),
(II) Jackpot start command reception process (one of the above command analysis processes (S1008)) and lottery mode management process 2 (FIGS. 57 to 58),
(III) Lottery mode management process 3 based on RTC information (Fig. 59),
(IV) The lottery mode management process 4 (FIG. 60) based on the above-mentioned “out ball number information and big hit number information” will be described. The lottery mode management processes 1 to 4 are one form of the variable lottery mode management process (S1006) of FIG. 50, and when a predetermined change opportunity arrives, the lottery mode (current appearance rate) related to the setting suggestion effect is determined. It is a process to perform switching control (transition control) of the lottery state).

(Variation of lottery probability depending on the number of out balls: FIGS. 55 to 56)
FIGS. 55 to 56 are flowcharts of the out ball number command reception process and the lottery mode management process 1, and here, a case where the appearance rate is changed (changed) based on the out ball number (cumulative out ball number) information. show. In this example, since the change trigger depends on the number of out balls, it is necessary to grasp the out ball number information. Therefore, regarding the number of out balls, when the "out ball number command" sent from the main control unit 20 is received, the counting process (S2401 described later) is executed. Then, in the variable lottery mode management process 1 of FIG. 56, which will be described later, the lottery mode is changed and controlled based on the count value.

In the out-ball number command reception process of FIG. 55, when the above-mentioned "out-ball number command" sent from the main control unit 20 at a predetermined timing is received, the cumulative out-ball number count process is performed (S2401). Here, the result of adding the out-ball number Pout obtained by the command information to the current cumulative out-ball number Tout is stored and held in a predetermined area of the RAM 243 as the current cumulative out-ball number Tout. The "cumulative number of out balls Tout" here is the cumulative number of out balls since the power was turned on. Therefore, when the power is turned on, the cumulative number of out balls Tout is zero (Tout = 0). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the cumulative number of out-balls from the previous day may be inherited as it is without clearing the cumulative number of out-balls Tout when the power is turned off or the power is turned on. In this case, if the RAM 243 is never cleared from the time of shipment, or if the backup power of the RAM 243 is not turned off, the value of the cumulative number of out-balls Tout will be from the first operation of the game machine 1 at the pachinko hall store to the present. It is the total number of out balls up to.

There are several control methods for counting the number of out balls by a control command from the main control unit 20. One of them is a method of transmitting an out ball number command every time the OUT monitoring switch 49a detects a game ball. That is, every time one out ball is generated, a command for the number of out balls is transmitted, and the effect control unit 24 manages each ball. This method is effective when the change trigger is set to one ball unit, but the command is transmitted every time one out ball is generated, which may increase the control load. Therefore, as another method, for example, the above-mentioned out-ball number command is sequentially transmitted every predetermined number (1000 balls), and the effect control unit 24 manages each 1000 balls. According to this method. , Command transmission timing is also reduced, and control processing is simplified. In addition, it can be made versatile when changing models. Another method is to send a control command for each change trigger at irregular long-term intervals such as 1000, 15000, 16000, etc., which is more transmitted than the method of sending a sequential control command for every 1000 balls. Since the timing is also reduced, it is possible to reduce the control load. Further, the out ball number information used for the performance information may be acquired and a command based on the information may be transmitted. Which method should be adopted may be appropriately adopted depending on what kind of trigger the change trigger is.

In the lottery mode management process 1 of FIG. 56, the cumulative number of out-balls Tout is acquired (S4001), and it is determined whether or not it is a trigger for changing the lottery mode (S4002). If it is not an opportunity to change the lottery mode (S4002: NO), the lottery mode management process 1 is exited without doing anything. On the other hand, if it is an opportunity to change the lottery mode (S4002: YES), a variable lottery mode transition process for changing the lottery mode is performed (S4003). Here, in order to facilitate the understanding of the present invention, there are three types of lottery modes, "default (normal)", "high accuracy 1", and "high accuracy 2", as a plurality of lottery modes having different appearance rates. (Variable lottery mode; hereinafter abbreviated as "lottery mode") is handled (the same applies to the variable lottery mode management processes 2, 3 (some examples) and 4 of FIG. 57, which will be described later). The relationship between the high and low of the overall appearance rate in these lottery modes is the relationship of "normal (default) <high probability 1 <high probability 2". The term "overall" refers to the case where the appearance rate of a specific set value decreases but the appearance rate of other set values increases (for example, the setting of the change patterns 2A (B) (C) in FIG. 62). (Case 2), or the case where the sum of the appearance rates does not change at each set value, but the appearance rate of a specific suggested color that is a setting guessing factor increases, and the appearance rate of other suggested colors decreases accordingly (case 2). For example, the change pattern 2 (B) in FIG. 62, which will be described later, exists (see FIGS. 61 to 62, which will be described later). Therefore, in the high lottery mode according to the present embodiment, there is a case where the appearance rate of the entire setting suggestion effect is simply increased (varies with a high probability) at least as compared with the default (normal) time ((A) in FIG. 61). ~ (E)), the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect itself does not change, but the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect (for example, a specific setting suggestion color) with a specific setting suggestion element increases. The case where the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect having other setting suggestion elements decreases (the case where the degree of suggestion changes) is included.

The illustrated "MODE0 (variable lottery mode 0)", "MODE1 (variable lottery mode 1)", and "MODE2 (variable lottery mode 2)" are "default (normal)", "high accuracy 1", and "high accuracy", respectively. It corresponds to the lottery mode of "2". These lottery modes are managed by the "variable lottery mode status". This variable lottery mode status is updated every time a change trigger arrives, and the current variable lottery mode can be grasped by referring to the value of the status. The variable lottery mode status value is used when executing a lottery related to the appearance of the setting suggestion effect (for example, the ED character background effect lottery process shown in FIG. 58 described later), and the lottery shown in FIGS. 61 to 62 described later. Used when selecting a table.

In the case of this embodiment, regarding the variable lottery mode status, "01H" is set when shifting to high accuracy 1, and "02H" is set when shifting to high accuracy 2. In other cases, "00H (normal)" is set in the variable lottery mode status.

Here, if the cumulative out balls are 0 to 6000 balls, the accuracy is 1, if the cumulative out balls are 24,000 or more, the accuracy is 2, and in other cases, the default (normal) is set. Thereby, the appearance rate (base of the lottery) of the setting suggestion effect can be changed (variable) in a specific period. Here, as an opportunity to change, if the cumulative out balls are 0 to 6000 balls, set the variable lottery mode status to "01H (high probability 1)" as "MODE1", and if the cumulative out balls are 24,000 balls or more. Sets "02H (high probability 2)" to the variable lottery mode status as "MODE2" (shifts to the high probability lottery state). In the case of the total number of out balls other than that, "00H (normal)" is set in the variable lottery mode status, and the appearance rate (base of the lottery) of the setting suggestion effect is returned to normal (shift to the low probability lottery state). Thereby, the appearance ratio (appearance rate) of the setting suggestion effect can be changed.

(Variation of lottery probability depending on the number of big hits: FIGS. 57 to 58)
FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the lottery mode management process 2 and FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the jackpot start command reception process. Here, a case is shown in which the appearance rate is changed based on the jackpot count information (today's cumulative jackpot count). In this example, since the trigger of activation depends on the number of big hits, it is necessary to count the number of big hits. Therefore, regarding the counting of the number of big hits, the counting process (S2516 described later) is executed when the big hit start command is received. Then, in the variable lottery mode management process 2 of FIG. 57, the lottery mode is changed based on the count value.

The lottery mode management process 2 of FIG. 57 will be described. In this lottery mode management process 2, first, the jackpot count information is acquired from the jackpot count counter (S4011), and it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is changed (S4012). If it is an opportunity to change the lottery mode (S4013: YES), the variable lottery mode transition process is performed (S4013).

The basic content of this variable lottery mode transition process is basically the same as the process content of S4003 in FIG. 56. Here, as a change opportunity, if the cumulative number of big hits is 5 to 10 times, it is set as "MODE1" and the variable lottery mode status is set to "01H (high accuracy 1)", and if it is 20 times or more, it is set as "MODE2". Set "02H (high accuracy 2)" to the variable lottery mode status. As a result, the appearance rate (base of the lottery) of the setting suggestion effect becomes high. For other big hits, set the variable lottery mode status to "00H (normal)" and return the lottery mode to normal.

(Big hit start command reception process: Fig. 58)
Next, the jackpot start command reception process will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 shows the details of the jackpot start command reception process.

In this jackpot start command reception process, when the jackpot start command is received, the CPU 241 first performs a jackpot effect scenario lottery process (S2511). In this process, a hit-in-time effect scenario is selected based on the jackpot type (special symbol determination data). In the case of this example, it is characterized in that it is not a mere hitting effect but a hitting effect scenario including a setting suggestion effect (change in the end interval screen of the setting suggestion effect 07). Next, the variable lottery mode is acquired (S2512). In this variable lottery mode acquisition process, a lottery table corresponding to the current variable lottery mode (see S4013 in FIG. 57) is prepared. Next, the set value information is acquired (S2513), and the process proceeds to the ED character background effect lottery process (S2514).

In the ED character background effect lottery process (S2514), based on the "ending character background lottery table" shown in FIG. A combination of character images including the character background image (setting suggestion object display), background color (setting suggestion background color), etc. will be drawn by lottery. The ending character background lottery table in FIG. 52 is shown as an example of a dedicated table for changing (variating) the appearance rate, and here, the lottery mode corresponds to the default (lottery mode 0 (normal)). The lottery table (lottery table for variable lottery mode 0) is illustrated. The lottery tables corresponding to the other lottery modes 1 and 2 (high accuracy 1, 2) are not shown, but for convenience of explanation, the outline thereof will be described in the variable lottery of FIGS. 61 to 62, which will be described later. This will be described using a mode table.

Here, if the setting suggestion effect (combination of character images) is not displayed, (i) the lottery itself is executed, but the winning probability may be set to 0% (lottery execution form), or (ii). ) The lottery itself may not be executed (prohibition processing that bypasses the lottery is performed) (no lottery form). In this example, it is in the form of (i).

Including the combination of the character images determined in the above-mentioned ED character background effect lottery process, the hitting effect scenario data this time is set (S2515). As a result, the production that appears during this series of hit games is determined. Therefore, even if the jackpot is the same, the determined display image may be different, and the setting suggestion is realized by the difference.

After that, the jackpot count counter that counts the jackpot count is incremented by 1, and the jackpot start command reception process is exited (S2516). Therefore, each time the jackpot start command transmitted at the start of the jackpot game is received (every time the jackpot start command reception process is performed), the value of the jackpot count counter increases, and the jackpot count is cumulatively counted. The value of the jackpot count counter is used when determining the change trigger in the variable lottery mode management process 2 described above (see S4012 in FIG. 57).

(Change of lottery probability based on specific date and / or specific time information: Fig. 59)
FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the lottery mode management process 3 based on the RTC information, and here shows a case where the appearance rate is changed based on the RTC information. In this example, the lottery mode is changed based on the RTC information acquired in the RTC information acquisition process (S1056) of FIG. 31.

In the lottery mode management process 3 of FIG. 59, RTC information is first acquired (S4031), and it is determined whether or not it is a trigger for changing the lottery mode (S4032). If it is an opportunity to change the lottery mode (S4033: YES), the variable lottery mode transition process is performed (S4033). The basic content of this variable lottery mode transition process is basically the same as the process content of S4003 in FIG. 56.

The types of variable lottery mode statuses in this example include those related to a specific time (RTC1) (FIG. 59 (a)) and those related to a specific date (RTC2) (FIG. 59 (b)). There is a form (FIG. 59 (c)).

In the division related to the specific time (RTC1) in FIG. 59 (a), "09: 00-11: 00" is used as an opportunity to change to the lottery modes 0, 1, 2 (high accuracy 1, high accuracy 2, normal). It is divided into "18: 00-20: 00" and other times.
In the classification related to the specific date and time (RTC2) in FIG. 59 (b), the change to the lottery modes 0, 1 and 2 (high accuracy 1, high accuracy 2, normal) is triggered by "specific day 1 (for example, April 29). It is divided into "day", "specific day 2 (for example, December 8)", and other days.
FIG. 59 (c) is a combination of both a specific time and a specific day (RTC1 + RTC2), and the types of lottery modes are "high accuracy 1", "high accuracy 2", "high accuracy 3", "high accuracy 4", and "normal". 5 types of lottery modes 0 to 4 are handled, respectively, "09: 00-11: 00", "18: 00-20: 00", "Specific day 1 (April 29)", " Specific day 2 (December 8th) ”, which is divided into other dates and times. The relationship between high and low appearance rates is "normal <high accuracy 1 <high accuracy 2 <high accuracy 3 <high accuracy 4". However, in the case of specific days 1 and 2, the change trigger of "high accuracy 1 and 2" and the change trigger of "high accuracy 3 and 4" may overlap. Therefore, the lottery mode of the migration destination is determined based on the priority order (see "lottery mode priority order" described later) as to which lottery mode is prioritized. In this example, the order is "normal <high accuracy 1 <high accuracy 2 <high accuracy 3 <high accuracy 4". Therefore, in the case of the specific days 1 and 2, the lottery modes 3 and 4 (high accuracy 3 and 4) are prioritized, and the other lottery modes 0 to 3 (usually high accuracy 1 and 2) are not shifted.

Further, FIG. 59 (d) defines the change trigger according to the elapsed time from the time when the power is turned on (RTC4), and as the change trigger to the lottery modes 0, 1, 2 (high accuracy 1, high accuracy 2, normal). , "Until 2 hours have passed since the power was turned on", "Until 9 hours have passed since the power was turned on, and until 11 hours have passed", and the other periods are divided.

(Lottery probability fluctuation based on out ball number information + jackpot count information: Fig. 60)
FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a lottery mode management process 4 based on “out ball number information + big hit number information”. Here, a case where the appearance rate is changed based on a plurality of information of the number of out balls and the number of big hits is shown. In this example, the out-ball number information is the cumulative out-ball number information from the time when the power is turned on today, and the jackpot count information is the cumulative jackpot count information from the time when the power is turned on today.

In this lottery mode management process 4, first, the cumulative out-ball information and the cumulative jackpot count information are acquired, and it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is changed (S4101 to S4103). If it is an opportunity to change the lottery mode (S4103: YES), the variable lottery mode transition process is performed (S4104).

The basic content of this variable lottery mode transition process is basically the same as the process content of S4003 in FIG. 56. Here, as a change opportunity, in the case of "cumulative number of big hits less than 20 times and cumulative number of out balls 0 to 6000 balls", "MODE1" is set and "01H (high accuracy 1)" is set in the variable lottery mode status. In the case of "cumulative number of big hits 20 times or more, or cumulative number of out balls 24000 balls or more", "02H (high accuracy 2)" is set in the variable lottery mode status as "MODE2". As a result, the appearance rate (base of the lottery) of the setting suggestion effect becomes high. In other cases, the variable lottery mode status is set to "00H (normal)" and the lottery mode is returned to normal.

(Lottery mode priority)
By the way, when the appearance rate is changed based on two or more types of information such as RTC information, cumulative number of out balls, cumulative number of big hits, and elapsed time when the power is turned on, the timing of the change occurs at the same time. There is a problem of which lottery mode should be shifted to. More specifically, for example, when the RTC information is on the specific day 1 (April 29), the game shifts to the lottery mode 2 (high accuracy 2), but when the cumulative number of out balls is 0 to 6000, the game shifts to the lottery mode 2. When shifting to lottery mode 1 (high accuracy 1), if no conditions are applied, if today is April 29, the power will be turned on even though you will always stay in lottery mode 2 (high accuracy 2). Sometimes, since the cumulative number of out balls is 0, there arises a problem that the lottery mode 1 (high accuracy 1) is entered. Therefore, the priority order regarding which information is used as the priority change trigger and which lottery mode is prioritized is determined by one of the following methods (A) and (B).
(A) A form in which priorities are given among a plurality of pieces of information. For example, in the case of adopting RTC information, the number of out balls, and the number of big hits, priorities are given in the order of "number of out balls <number of big hits <RTC information". In this example, RTC information has the highest priority.
(B) A mode in which a mode advantageous to the player is prioritized with reference to the current lottery mode.
In the above case, it shifts to high accuracy 2 based on RTC information, but since it is in the game period to shift to high accuracy 1 based on the cumulative number of out balls, it shifts to high accuracy 2 which is advantageous to the player. ..

(Change pattern example 1: FIG. 61)
FIGS. 61 to 62 show examples of lottery probability fluctuations under specific conditions as described above. The change pattern 1 of FIG. 61 has seven types of variable lottery tables (A) to (G) corresponding to the lottery modes 0 to 6. In FIG. 61, the change opportunity is shown in the remarks column of (A) to (G), and in the figure, it is described as “variable lottery mode ○ lottery table” for convenience of explanation. Here, a variable lottery table used in a configuration for managing a lottery mode based on the above-mentioned "out ball number information + big hit number information" is illustrated, and here, a form of handling seven types of lottery modes is illustrated. There is. For example, the lottery mode 0 to 7 = usually high accuracy 1 to 6.

Each table shows the content suggesting the setting value by the appearance ratio (appearance rate) of the setting suggestion color (copper, silver, gold, D pattern, rainbow) for each of the settings 1 to 6. The values in this table are not always constant, and as described above, when the cumulative number of out balls or the cumulative number of big hits changes, the lottery mode is changed accordingly, and the appearance ratio changes.

As can be seen from the figure, the number of big hits is fixed to less than 20 up to the lottery table corresponding to the lottery modes 0 to 4 (usually high accuracy 1 to high accuracy 4) shown in FIGS. 61 (A) to 61 (E). , When the cumulative number of out balls is gradually increased from 1 to 1000, 1001 to 6000, 6001 to 12000, 12001 to 24000, 24001 or more, and so on, the setting is 2 to 6 (settings 2 to 6). In this example, it is shown that the ratio of the setting suggestion colors (copper, silver, gold, D pattern, rainbow) in the setting 1 (only the default color appears) gradually increases. Further, the lottery table corresponding to the lottery modes 5 to 6 (high accuracy 5 to high accuracy 6) shown in FIGS. 61 (E) to 61 (F) does not care about the number of out balls, and the number of big hits is 21 to 30 times and 31 times. When the number increases as above, the ratio of appearance of setting suggestion colors (copper, silver, gold, D pattern, rainbow) in settings 2 to 6 increases. In the case of this change pattern example 1, in short, the rate at which the setting suggestion effect appears increases as the lottery mode becomes higher.

Here, when the lottery mode 4 (high accuracy 4) and the lottery mode 5 (high accuracy 5) are compared, the relationship of the appearance rate is "high accuracy 5 <high accuracy 4", but this has been changed. As an opportunity, the transition of lottery mode 0 to 5 (normal to high accuracy 5) is performed by the change opportunity based on two types of information, the cumulative number of out balls and the cumulative number of big hits, and the lottery mode 5 to 6 (high accuracy 5 to 5). High accuracy 6) is performed by a change opportunity based on one type of information, that is, the total number of big hits, regardless of the total number of out balls. Therefore, in consideration of the fact that the factors that determine the change trigger are significantly different, the appearance rate is reversed between the lottery mode 4 (high probability 4) and the lottery mode 5 (high probability 5). In any case, each of the lottery modes 1 to 6 (high accuracy 1 to high accuracy 6) has a tendency to have a higher appearance rate than at least the lottery mode 0 (normal). The position of total 0 (appearance rate 0%) does not change through the lottery modes 0 to 6.

(Change pattern example 2: Left side of FIG. 62)
As shown on the left side of FIG. 62, the change pattern 2A of FIG. 62 has a variable lottery table (a lottery table for variable lottery modes 0 to 3) corresponding to lottery modes 0 to 3 (normal to high accuracy 2). For lottery mode 0, it corresponds to the default (normal), for lottery mode 1, it corresponds to the period of "less than 20 big hits and 6000 out balls", and for lottery mode 2 it corresponds to the period of "20 big hits or more and 24000 out balls or more". It is a lottery table to do. The arrangement of 0% ("-" column) is increasing in the order of lottery mode 0 (normal), 1 (high accuracy 1), and 2 (high accuracy 2), making it easy to guess the set value. There is. For example, while staying in the lottery mode 2 (high accuracy 2), setting 3 or more is confirmed only by the appearance of the setting suggestion effect (silver or higher) for the main lottery table (settings 1 and 2 have an appearance rate of 0%). If the setting suggestion effect does not appear, setting 5 is almost denied (because the ratio of any color appearing is 90%), and setting 6 is completely denied (because the ratio of any color appearing is 100%). Will be.

(Change pattern example 3: Right side of FIG. 62)
As shown on the right side of FIG. 62, the change pattern 2B of FIG. 62 has a variable lottery table (a lottery table for variable lottery modes 0 to 3) corresponding to lottery modes 0 to 3 (normal to high accuracy 2). Each table has the same change trigger as the change pattern 2A in FIG. 62, but the total value increases in the order of lottery mode 0 (normal), 1 (high accuracy 1), and 2 (high accuracy 2). There is. The characteristic point is that the higher the lottery mode, the more "suggestion colors that are easy to guess the setting may appear (the degree of suggestion increases)".

As can be seen from FIG. 62, in the lottery mode 1 (high accuracy 1), setting 2 is copper color, setting 3 is silver color, setting 4 is gold color, setting 5 is D pattern, and setting 6 is rainbow color. I have it. For example, regarding the copper color, in the lottery mode 0 (normal), the appearance rate of the copper color is uniformly 3.2% in the settings 2 to 6, but in the lottery mode 1 (high accuracy 1), the appearance rate of the copper color is 3 in the setting 2. At .2% and settings 2 to 6, the appearance rate drops significantly to 0.1% to 0.2%, and at settings 3 and above, the mode is such that the copper color does not appear. In particular, the rate of decrease in the high setting range (setting 6 in this example) becomes remarkable. Also, the characteristic point is that in the lottery mode 1 (high accuracy 1) and the lottery mode 0 (normal), "the total appearance rate itself does not change" at each set value (the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect itself does not change). However, the default value) is "the point is that the appearance rate of a specific suggestion color that is a setting guessing factor is high, and the other suggestion colors are lower by that amount. That is, the" suggestion "of the setting value by the setting suggestion effect. By changing the "degree", it becomes a special lottery mode that "it is easy to guess the setting". For example, in the case of setting 3, the appearance rate of silver color increases by the amount that the appearance rate of copper color decreases and "silver color" tends to appear, and in the case of setting 4, the appearance rate of gold color increases. , The appearance rate of copper color decreases (in this example, the appearance rate of silver color does not change), "golden color" is more likely to appear, and in the case of setting 2, the appearance rate of "copper color" does not change, but other The appearance rate of "copper color" of the set value of is lowered, and in the case of setting 2, "copper color" is more likely to appear than other set values. , Can be created according to the lottery mode.

Further, in the lottery mode 2 (high accuracy 2), settings 1 and 2 have a tendency to have a default color, setting 3 has a silver color, setting 4 has a gold color, setting 5 has a D pattern color, and setting 6 has a tendency for a rainbow pattern to appear easily. .. Further, if the setting suggestion effect (silver or higher) for the main lottery table appears while staying in the lottery mode 2 (high accuracy 2), the setting 3 or higher (intermediate setting range or higher) is confirmed.

(Specific example of setting suggestion effect: FIG. 63)
FIG. 63 shows an example of the setting suggestion effect when the lottery tables of FIGS. 61 to 62 are applied. FIGS. 63 (A) to (C) exemplify setting suggestion effects that can appear in the pre-reach period (for example, timings 10 to 16 in FIG. 45), and FIGS. 63 (D) to (F) show reach. It is an example of a setting suggestion effect that can appear in a later period (for example, timings 17 to 25 in FIG. 45). In this example, all of them are setting suggestion effects (during change effects) during the symbol game.

In the setting suggestion effect illustrated here, the setting suggestion is made by the color type (the body color type of the alien character) attached to the specific object display (alien character). However, in the case of setting 6 confirmation suggestion, another object display (unidentified flying object character) colored in rainbow color is displayed in a blessing sense. Of course, it may be the same alien character with a rainbow color instead of an unidentified flying object character. This setting suggestion effect is an effect mode including a setting suggestion element image (alien body color) capable of notifying the difference of the set value by the display mode type with different colors and / or patterns. Here, the case where the body color is gray is the default (no setting suggestion), the copper color is set to 2 or more, the setting 3 to 5, the silver color is set to 3 or more, the gold color is set to 4 or more, and the rainbow color is set to 6. It suggests confirmation. Although FIG. 63 has described an example of the setting suggestion effect that appears during the symbol game, the setting suggestion effect that appears at a timing other than during the symbol game, for example, the setting suggestion effect that can appear during the big hit game. It can be applied to any of 06 to 08 (notice of change in winning sound of big prize opening, change of end interval screen, voice of blessing, etc.) and setting suggestion effect (character image of ranking display, etc.) that can appear while waiting for customers.

(Confirmation of setting suggestion effect: FIGS. 64 to 68)
So far, we have explained various setting suggestion effects, but basically, we have explained the setting suggestion effects that are performed for those who are currently playing the platform (game machine). In the following, we will change the point of view and give consideration to those who are currently playing the platform, those who are going to play the platform, and those who are wondering whether to play on the platform. I will explain about.

(Task)
As already explained in detail, most of the timings when the setting suggestion effect is executed are during the game (during the symbol variation display game or the hit game), and when the setting suggestion effect appears, it is confirmed first (). Of course, it is the player who is playing the game on the platform. However, the following problems may occur if only the setting suggestion effects appear during the game.
(1) As the first problem, unlike slot machines, pachinko gaming machines do not proceed at their own pace, but are left to the gaming machine side in the form of "selection of fluctuation patterns". ing. That is, unlike a slot machine, the game cannot be ended due to the convenience of the player, and the time schedule related to the progress of the game is controlled by the game machine side. What this means is that most of the setting suggestion effects are controlled by the gaming machine side at the start and end of their appearance (execution). Therefore, for example, it is quite possible that the setting suggestion effect ends while the player is distracted by the effect of the next table and makes extra observations, or while playing with the mobile phone.
(2) As a second problem, a person who starts the game after the execution of the setting suggestion effect, for example, a predecessor who was playing at the time of executing the setting suggestion effect, finishes the game and then takes turns playing the game. Of course, the starting player (successor) has no way of knowing the content of the setting suggestion effect issued by the predecessor.

(Solution)
Two solutions to the above problems (problems) will be described. The first is the appearance of the setting suggestion effect (information about the set value), which is a means for "extending (adding) the appearance period of advantageous information", and the second is "reducing the man-hours when confirming the advantageous information". ". This will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 64 to 68.

(A) to (C) of FIGS. 64 are examples of effects in a certain symbol variation display game (hereinafter, abbreviated as "symbol variation display" or "symbol variation" in some cases), (D) to (F). Is an example of the effect during the next symbol variation display game, and (G) to (K) are waiting after the end of the symbol variation display game (“demo start waiting effect”, “customer waiting effect (demo effect (demo effect)). This is an example of the production of the demo screen))) ”). In FIG. 64, a background effect and a plurality of advance notice effects related to the effect mode actually appear, but the illustration is omitted for convenience of explanation.

With reference to FIG. 64, after the symbol variation display of this time (first time) is started (FIG. (A)), the specific character (Fujimaru-kun) 901 performs a halo effect (halo display) during the symbol variation display. ) 902 (Fig. (B): "Aureola effect 902 + Specific character 901"). Here, this effect will be described as "setting 6 (highest setting) final effect" that belongs to the above "setting N final effect". After that, the symbol variation display game execution period (variation time) has elapsed, and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at "357" indicating a lost symbol (FIG. (C)).

Subsequently, the operation holding ball is digested, and the next (second) symbol variation display is started (Fig. (D)). In this example, at the start of the next symbol variation display, the "halo effect 902" that appeared in the previous symbol variation and the small specific character 901a are displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The specific character 901a is, for example, a reduced version of the specific character 901 that appeared in the previous symbol variation display game (so-called chibi character conversion, super deformation (registered trademark), etc.), and is used as the specific character 901. It is displayed as a related image (an effect display that appears in response to the appearance of a specific setting suggestion effect). Such a halo effect 902 and the specific character 901a work as a "specific effect (execution confirmation effect)" capable of recognizing (confirming) the execution of the setting suggestion effect. Here, as shown in FIGS. (E) to (F), the halo effect 902 ends immediately, but the display of the specific character 901a on the upper right of the screen is displayed both during the subsequent symbol variation display and when the symbol variation is stopped. continuing. That is, when the setting suggestion effect is executed during the symbol variation display, the display mode is such that the execution of the setting suggestion effect can be recognized (confirmed) after the symbol variation display is completed. Further, when the setting suggestion effect is executed during the symbol variation display, the display mode is such that the execution of the setting suggestion effect can be recognized after the symbol variation display is completed and while the symbol variation is stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. (F), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the random number of "634", and the result of the symbol variation display game is "missing". In this example, in this (second) symbol variation display game, all the existing operation hold balls are digested and the operation hold balls become zero (FIGS. (A), (E) to (F). (Refer to the hold icon in the hold display area 76), it is assumed that the stand is vacant as it is.

(About the display of a specific character in the menu screen: FIGS. 64 (G) (H) (I))
With the decorative symbol being lost with "634", the symbol remains stopped (while waiting for the demo to start), and the game console is left unattended for a while (for example, 30 seconds have passed since the symbol was stopped). And / or when a predetermined time has elapsed in a state where the game ball is not fired (touch sensor non-detection state) while the symbol is stopped, as shown in Fig. (G), "Menu screen display →" The menu displayable notification effect 905 including the character display and the button image appears, and when the effect button 13 is operated, the notification that the menu screen (game setting screen) can be opened is started. When the player operates the effect button 13 in this state, a "menu screen" as shown in FIG. (H) is displayed, and various game environment settings can be selected. At this time, the specific character 901a is not. It becomes a display. That is, when a predetermined operation is performed by the operating means by the player under predetermined conditions (for example, during the period before the start of waiting for customers or during the effect of waiting for customers), the specific effect is not executed. (Hidden, non-notification), and the execution of the setting suggestion effect becomes unrecognizable (unconfirmable). In short, when the execution of the setting suggestion effect is recognizable while the symbol fluctuation is stopped, the operation means. When the predetermined operation is performed by, the execution of the setting suggestion effect is made unrecognizable. This means that if the specific effect is displayed indiscriminately, the display becomes an obstacle. This is because it is taken into consideration that there are cases. Since the period during which the execution of the setting suggestion effect cannot be confirmed (the specific effect is temporarily not executed) and the game situation often differ depending on the game playability, it is appropriate. You just have to decide.

The "menu screen" shown in FIG. (H) corresponds to the "menu screen 100" shown in FIG. 43, which has already been described. Here, as an example of a menu item, a character selection (for example, a current effect) is used. Items such as selection of enemy characters to appear in the mode: alien 903 shown in the figure (I) described later), volume adjustment, light intensity adjustment, BGM selection, and return (end of menu screen) are displayed. The player operates the cursor (arrow, index) 907 with the direction keys 75 to select a menu item, and when the effect button 13 is pressed with the cursor 905 pointing to the menu item, the menu item is determined. Can be done.

When the item "character selection" in the menu screen shown in FIG. (H) is selected, the "character selection screen" as shown in FIG. (I) is displayed. On this character selection screen, a plurality of aliens 903 (characters unrelated to the setting suggestion effect) and an icon image 901b related to the specific character 901 or 901a (specific image related to the executed setting suggestion effect (specific effect). One)) is displayed, and the player who opens the menu screen can also know the execution of the setting suggestion effect, the type of the executed setting suggestion effect, the set value information, and the like. Here, the specific character 901a, which was displayed in a small size at the upper right of the screen, is displayed as an "icon", which is "a small picture to make it easy to specify and distinguish the target". By seeing this icon image 901b, the player can know the fact that the setting suggestion effect, which is the "setting 6 (highest setting) final effect", has appeared, that is, the set value of the game console is set. It can be known that the setting is the highest setting of 6.

Further, by moving the cursor 907 to the icon image 901b while the menu screen is being displayed (here, the character selection screen), specific game information related to the appearance status of the setting suggestion effect can be notified. May be good. As this "specific game information", for example, "numerical information (appearance number information)" such as how many times the setting suggestion effect has appeared, counting from today's power on, and what the icon image means. Information related to the setting suggestion effect, that is, "set value information (suggestion information)" and the like may be configured to be identifiable. For example, a game can be played by displaying a balloon on the right side of the LCD screen, or by selecting and deciding an icon image by an operation means and displaying another screen (setting suggestion effect information screen) in the same way as selecting and deciding a menu item. It can be configured so that a person can display the above-mentioned numerical information and suggestive information. In addition, the display and non-display of the icon image (continuation of display / end of display) may be selectably configured by operating the operation means in a predetermined procedure in the menu screen. As for the suggestion information to be displayed (notified), the suggestion content itself of "setting 6 is confirmed" suggested by the setting suggestion effect (here, setting 6 confirmed effect) may be displayed, but the information is ambiguous. For example, information such as easy to select (easy to appear) with setting 4 or more, confirmation of setting 4 or more, and the like may be displayed. Further, in the illustration, as an image (icon image 901b) related to the setting suggestion effect, only the specific character is iconified and displayed emphasized, but the alien character 903 may also be iconified and displayed.

Further, FIG. (I) shows an example in which only one icon image 901b as a specific effect is displayed on the liquid crystal screen, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of setting suggestion effect that has appeared is shown. It is possible to configure so that "multiple types of specific effects (specific images)" can be displayed according to the above. In other words, "multiple setting suggestion effects that appeared in the past appear at the same time" (to be exact, specific effects related to the setting suggestion effects that appeared in the past appear at the same time), (The same applies to FIGS. 65 to 68 described later). Such a display can be said to be a display mode useful for the player to guess the setting or select the game table. However, since the display area is limited, when many display types are provided, a specific image (in a non-display state) that cannot be displayed on the screen by a display method such as a scroll display using an operation means is used. A specific image) may be displayed, or a sub liquid crystal display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device for displaying a menu screen) may be provided and displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device (the display method is not particularly limited). Further, although the specific character 901b is displayed as an icon, the display mode thereof is not particularly limited, and for example, the same or similar character as the specific character 901a may be displayed. Further, in this example, the specific character is displayed in the character selection screen, but it may be configured to be displayed in another one or a plurality of other menu items. Further, the display of a plurality of types of specific images (specific effects) is not limited to the specific menu items (character selection screen) shown in FIG. It is also possible during the period such as K)). Also in this case, a plurality of types of specific effects can be displayed by using a scroll display, a sub liquid crystal display device, or the like (the same applies to FIGS. 65 to 68 described later).

Further, FIG. (G) shows an example in which the specific character 901a is continuously displayed even after the second symbol variation display is completed, but when the operation holding ball is zero, the symbol variation display is terminated. After that, the specific character 901a may be temporarily erased from the screen. As the erasing timing, for example, at the end of the symbol variation display, at a predetermined timing before the start of the customer waiting effect (during the demo start waiting effect) (for example, at the start of the menu displayable notification effect 905), the customer waiting effect starts. For example, after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the previous state. In this case, the specific character 901a has a customer waiting effect shown in the above menu screen (FIG. (H)), when a specific menu item is selected and determined (FIG. (I)), or in FIGS. (J) (K) described later. It can be displayed (redisplayed) in the middle (during the demo screen).

(About the display of a specific character on the demo screen (during customer waiting production): Fig. 64 (G) (J) (K))
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 64 (G), if it is left as it is in the symbol stop state (after the symbol variation display game ends), as already explained, a predetermined condition (for example, "a predetermined time (for example, 180 seconds) from the symbol stop)". The "demo screen (demo movie)" is started on the assumption that "is elapsed" and / or "the symbol is stopped and the non-detection state by the touch sensor has elapsed for a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds)". Figure (J) exemplifies a part of the first half of the demo movie, and Figure (K) exemplifies a part of the second half of the demo movie. During the demo screen period, figures (J) to (K) are shown. A series of demo movies of is repeatedly played and displayed to effectively appeal the appeal of the game console. In the figure (J), the name of the gaming machine (“CR Fujimaru-kun Senki”) and the effect of multiple fighters (characters for the demo screen) flying around in the sky are displayed, and the specific character 901a is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. Is displayed. Further, in FIG. (K), the name of the gaming machine is displayed in a large size in the center of the screen, and the specific character 901a is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. That is, it is possible to recognize the execution of the setting suggestion effect during the execution of the customer waiting demo effect (demo effect).

Here, the characteristic point is that the character for the demo screen (for example, the production in which a plurality of fighters fly around in the sky) appears on the demo screen display while the display of the specific character 901a is continued even if the demo screen display is started. For example, it is a point that does not interfere with the display of the fighter group shown in FIG. (J) as much as possible (specific image save display means). It is preferable that the specific effect appears on the demo screen in this way because the player who is selecting the game table is informed of useful information (advantageous information) when selecting the game table. Is. Here, as the specific image save display, the priority display shown in FIG. 68 (D-1) described later (priority display of the specific character 901a over the demo movie) or the transmittance control display shown in FIG. The transmittance of the specific character 901a may be increased and displayed).

As a part of the demo screen (demo movie), the ranking display of FIG. 44 (which can include the change of the end interval screen of FIG. 53) can also be displayed. In this case, the specific character 901a can be displayed in the ranking display screen. As described above, the ranking display of FIG. 44 can be used as one of the setting suggestion effects (acting as a specific effect having the same character as the specific character 901a), so that the specific character 901a is displayed on the ranking display screen. In the display mode of displaying, the above-mentioned "multiple setting suggestion effects appearing in the past appear at the same time" (to be exact, specific effects related to the setting suggestion effects appearing in the past appear at the same time). This is a display mode that is useful for the player to guess the setting and select the game table.

In the previous example (FIGS. 64 (D) to (F)), "character display + halo display (specific character A)" is performed during the symbol variation display, and "character display only (specific effect A) is performed during the demo screen display. ) ”Was to be performed. However, it is not necessarily limited to this display mode. For example, when "specific character A" or "specific character B (character display + character display)" is displayed as a setting suggestion effect during the symbol variation display, the next symbol variation is started or the next symbol variation is being displayed. Individual specific effects (specific effect A for specific character A, specific effect B for specific character B) may be executed at predetermined timings of the above, and in either case, "common specific effect" may be executed. You may execute "effect" (common specific effect C for both specific character A and specific character B).

In the case of the above-mentioned "common specific effect", it is preferable that the content suggested by the setting suggestion effect is similar to a certain level or higher. For example, if there is a "setting suggestion effect A" that is likely to be setting 1 (minimum setting) and a "setting suggestion effect B" that is likely to be setting 6 (highest setting), either setting suggestion is made. If a common specific effect (specific character) is executed after the effect is executed, it is not known at all whether the set value is "high or low", that is, the fact that the setting suggestion effect has appeared is notified. However, it means that information that is not useful as a setting guessing factor can be notified. Then, there is no point in performing a specific effect (execution confirmation effect). Therefore, for example, the setting suggestion effect of "setting 6 confirmed" (setting N confirmed effect) and the setting suggestion effect of "setting 4 or more confirmed" (specific range suggestion effect) are narrowed down to "determined setting suggestion effect", and then. A specific effect (execution confirmation effect) may be executed. Specifically, among the setting suggestion effects of the definite system, the setting suggestion effects in which the intermediate setting range (setting values 3 and 4) or higher is fixed may be narrowed down, and preferably, the setting suggestion effects in which the high setting range is fixed may be narrowed down. (For example, setting N or more is confirmed (N = 4, 5) or setting N is confirmed (N = 4, 5, 6)), and then a specific effect is executed. More preferably, a high setting range is confirmed. Of the setting suggestion effects to be performed, the setting suggestion effects in which the setting 5 or higher is confirmed are narrowed down, and then the specific effects are executed. Further, paying attention to the viewpoint of the machine discount, the set value exceeding 100% of the machine discount may be determined.

When narrowing down to a specific setting suggestion effect as described above, there are two effects. The first effect is the simplification of the displayed contents by aggregating information. If a specific image is displayed indiscriminately according to the type of the executed setting suggestion effect and the appearance of many setting suggestion effects is individually shown, the display area will be insufficient, and the displayed object will be complicated and more understandable. It becomes difficult. However, by appropriately aggregating and displaying the information, not only the appearance is refreshed, but also the setting suggestion effects of the same level are aggregated, which has the effect of increasing the accuracy of the information.

The second effect is the ambiguity of the setting suggestion content by aggregating information. This "ambiguity of setting suggestion content" seems to go against the first effect of the former (increasing the accuracy of information), but it is not so. It will be described in detail below.

For example, in the first setting suggestion effect, "the effect of confirming setting 4 or more" appears, in the second setting suggestion effect, "the effect with high possibility of setting 5" appears, and in the third setting suggestion effect, "setting 1 is set". It is assumed that "a production to deny (setting 2 or more confirmed production)" has appeared. In this case, as a specific effect that aggregates the appearance of the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect as the same level effect, the "icon (specific effect) indicating that an effect with a high possibility of setting 4 or higher has appeared" is displayed. It is displayed, and it is possible to know that it has appeared twice on the menu screen. However, since the "effect of denying setting 1" of the third setting suggestion effect is not at the same level, it is not aggregated. The first effect of "increasing the accuracy of information" is that the effect with a high possibility of setting 4 or higher "appears twice". As a matter of course, the credibility as a setting guessing factor increases when it appears twice rather than once. The second effect, "ambiguous setting suggestion content," is that "setting 4 or more is confirmed" as a specific effect, even though "setting 4 or more is confirmed" is shown in the first setting suggestion effect. This is the part where the icon is displayed. As a result, the player (predecessor) who actually confirmed the first setting suggestion effect can recognize that "setting 4 or more is confirmed", while the player who has not confirmed the first setting suggestion effect (successor). Person) can make a difference in the amount of information, such as being able to grasp only that "there is a high possibility that the setting is 4 or more". In other words, the player who was able to confirm the setting suggestion effect (first advantageous information) with a high setting estimation element (in the above case, the predecessor who confirmed the confirmation of setting 4 or more) was able to clearly confirm the setting value. This allows you to carry the game to your advantage. On the other hand, a player who does not (in the above case, although the confirmation of the setting 4 or more has not been confirmed, the possibility of the setting 4 or more is high (the second advantage, which is less valuable as the game information than the first advantage information). The successor) who can confirm that the information) may be more anxious than the predecessor in the game. This means that a player who can confirm a setting suggestion effect with a high setting guessing element can have useful information that only he / she can know, and a player who does not can actually confirm the setting suggestion effect. The above has the meaning of "equalizing the provision of information" by giving some useful information without giving information of equivalent value. By such "ambiguity of setting suggestion content", it is possible to provide a difference in the amount of information between the former and the latter so as not to give a feeling of inequality or dissatisfaction.

If the above-mentioned "setting 6 confirmed effect" that deterministically notifies the maximum setting 6 appears even once, the "icon indicating the setting 6 confirmed" is displayed as a specific effect, and other icons are displayed thereafter. You may choose not to (count but not display, or not count in the first place). This is because when the maximum setting 6 is confirmed, there is no point in making other specific effects appear. Further, from the viewpoint of the above-mentioned "ambiguity of the setting suggestion content", for the "setting 6 confirmation effect", for example, "the possibility of setting 5 is high" or "there is a high possibility of setting 5" without displaying the "icon indicating the setting 6 confirmation". An icon indicating "setting 4 (or 5) or more confirmed" is displayed so that only the player who can actually confirm the setting 6 confirmed effect can know that the setting 6 is set as a privilege. May be good.

Further, it is not necessary to execute the corresponding specific effect (execution confirmation effect) after executing all the setting suggestion effects. As mentioned above, if an ambiguous setting suggestion or a setting suggestion effect that is easier to select with a lower setting appears, if a specific effect is performed after that, it will have the opposite effect (decrease in motivation for playing). In addition, in a gaming machine in which the setting suggestion effect is executed at a plurality of timings, preparing a specific effect for all of them leads to a control burden. It can be said that it is preferable to execute a specific effect for the setting suggestion effect of.

Further, the start timing (specific effect start condition) of the specific effect (execution confirmation effect) can be appropriately determined according to the game characteristics and the like. Typically, it is during the symbol variation display game, the menu screen, the demo screen, etc. from the next time onward as described with reference to FIG. The meaning of this "design variation display game from the next time onward" includes displaying in the next game of the game in which the setting suggestion effect appears (at the start of the fluctuation, at a predetermined timing during the fluctuation, at the end of the fluctuation, etc.). It is a concept including displaying after a plurality of games without displaying in the next game and not appearing in the next game in which the setting suggestion effect appears. Also, what is the period during which the specific effect can be confirmed (specific effect end condition)? It can be determined as appropriate. Typically, for example, one or more periods of the following (A) to (K) can be adopted. (Α) Until the next or multiple big hit wins (big hit start or end) (a specific big hit may be counted), (Β) The number of times the symbol variation display game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times N (1 ≦ N). Until (Γ-1) until a predetermined time elapses (RTC manages the end timing), (Δ) until a specific time arrives (RTC manages the end timing), (Ε) the number of times the menu screen is displayed The (Η) demo screen (demo movie) is displayed until the predetermined number of times M (1 ≦ M) is reached, and the number of times the (Ζ) demo screen (demo movie) is displayed reaches the predetermined number X (1 ≦ X). From to the time when a predetermined time (for example, 1 to 3 hours) elapses, until the number of (Ι) out balls (normal number of outs and / or total number of outs) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1000 shots) (number of hit balls). (Manage display end timing with), (Κ) until the power of the game machine is turned off, (Λ) until the set value is changed (including replacement of the same setting), etc. The same applies to the production example of FIG. 68).

As for the specific effect, not only the image display effect is used, but also the light effect (LED is made to emit light with a specific light emission pattern) and the sound effect (output a specific sound effect, not a normal BGM, but a specific effect). One or a plurality of effect means may be used among the movable body accessory (operated in a specific motion pattern) such as changing to BGM. For example, when using a light effect, a specific LED (which may be a dedicated LED) may emit light in blue, yellow, green, red, rainbow colors, etc., depending on the type of setting suggestion effect that appears. It can be done (the same applies to the production examples of FIGS. 65 to 67 described later).

In addition, for the specific effect (execution confirmation effect), the player can understand what kind of effect the setting suggestion effect that appeared in the past is, what kind of content the set value information (suggestion information) is, and so on. It is preferable to use an easy production mode. For example, when a setting suggestion effect including "specific character 901 (Fujimaru-kun)" shown in FIG. (B) appears as a setting suggestion effect, the specific character may be reduced or made into an icon as a corresponding specific effect. It is preferable to display the ones (those that are easily recognized if they are Fujimaru-kun) (see FIGS. (D) to (G), (I) (J) (K), etc.). Further, the character information related to the displayed setting suggestion effect may be displayed as a specific effect. For example, if the displayed setting suggestion effect suggests "setting 4 or more is confirmed", the character information of "setting 4 or more is confirmed!" Can be displayed as the corresponding specific effect (described later). The same applies to the specific effects of FIGS. 65 to 67).

Of course, it does not necessarily have to be an easy-to-understand production mode, and characters that have some relationship (for example, conceptual relevance, design relevance, etc.) with Fujimaru-kun (for example, Fujika-chan 775 in Fig. 44, Fujimaru in different colors). You may display (Kun, etc.), or you may display other characters (for example, aliens and disks) and item images that are completely different from Fujimaru-kun (also for the specific effects shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, which will be described later). Similarly). Further, the display mode may be set according to the type of the setting suggestion effect or the suggestion content thereof (for example, the display mode having different colors and / or shapes) (the same applies to the specific effects of FIGS. 65 to 67 described later). For example, an item image (blue magatama) attached to blue when a confirmation effect of setting 2 or more appears, a yellow magatama when a confirmation effect of setting 3 or more appears, and a green magatama when a confirmation effect of setting 4 or more appears. If a magatama or a setting 6 final effect appears, it is a rainbow-colored magatama (the same applies to other setting suggestion effects (even number setting suggestion effect, odd number setting suggestion effect, low setting suggestion effect, high setting suggestion effect, etc.).

Further, the setting suggestion effect that appears during the symbol variation display may belong to the change-in-change setting suggestion non-notice effect or the change-in-change setting suggestion advance notice effect. (The same applies to the setting suggestion effect of FIGS. 65 and 67 described later).

(Production example 2: Fig. 65)
FIG. 65 shows a case where the setting suggestion effect appears during a specific advance notice effect (for example, during the reach effect) as another effect example in which the setting suggestion effect appears during the symbol variation display.

In the effect example of FIG. 65, the symbol variation display is started (FIG. (A)), the reach state is formed at a predetermined timing during the variation display (FIG. (B)), and the reach effect appears. .. In the reach production here, as shown in Fig. (C), the mobile turret 911 appears as an ally character and the disk 913 appears as an enemy character, and a battle type in which a battle is fought between the mobile turret 911 and the disk 913. If you can shoot down the disk 913 with the attack of the mobile turret 911, it will be "mission success" and the jackpot symbol (symbol matching) will be displayed, notifying that the result of this game is a jackpot. Will be done. However, if the disk 913 cannot be shot down, it will be a "mission failure" and a lost symbol will be displayed to notify that the result of this game is lost.

The place where the effect after FIG. (C) is branched indicates that this reach effect scenario has a plurality of types of scenarios. In this example, two scenarios are typically shown: an effect scenario in which the effect on the figure (D1) side is developed, and an effect scenario in which the effect on the figure (E1) side is developed. Which scenario is executed is determined by a predetermined effect lottery based on the fluctuation pattern information and the set value information.

In the production scenario on the side of the above figure (D1), "fighter 917 (normal support character)" appears as a reinforcement on the ally character side during the battle, and the fighter 917 supports and attacks with the mobile battery 911. It is the production content that is performed. In the production scenario on the other side of the figure (E1), "Specific character 919 (special support character)" appears as a reinforcement on the ally character side, and the specific character 919 (hereinafter referred to as "Fujimaru-kun 919") supports it. In the form, it is a production content in which an attack is performed by the mobile battery 911.

Here, the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot differs depending on the characters appearing in the reinforcements. In this example, "fighter 917 (normal character) <Fujimaru-kun 919 (specific character)", but in this example, both are games. The result is "missing" (see Figure (D2) or Figure (E2)). The fighter 917 may be selected in all settings 1 to 6, but Fujimaru-kun 919 is selected only in settings 4 or higher, that is, it is a setting suggestion effect of "setting 4 or higher confirmed". Therefore, in the production scenario on the side of Fig. (E1), although the result of this game was "missing", it was found that "setting 4 or more" was set when Fujimaru-kun 919 appeared.

In the example of FIG. 65, as shown in FIG. (E2), the four sides of the liquid crystal display device 36 are specific images in response to the appearance of the setting suggestion effect (Fujimaru-kun 919) of "setting 4 or more confirmed". Appears to be bordered by. In this example, the rainbow-colored effect image 920 is displayed in a frame shape as a specific image, and four sides are highlighted. The rainbow-colored effect image 920 works as a specific effect (execution confirmation effect) in the same manner as the specific character 901 described with reference to FIGS. 64 (D) (G) to (K).

FIG. (E3) shows an example in which the effect image 920 is continuously displayed even after the current symbol variation display game is completed (for example, during the next and subsequent symbol variation display games (not shown)). Here, the display of the "menu screen display ⇒ + button image" shown in FIGS. (D3) or (E3) is an effect corresponding to the menu displayable notification effect 905 of FIG. 64 (G). As the display end condition of the effect image 920, for example, one or a plurality of the above (A) to (Λ) described in FIG. 64 can be adopted.

Therefore, even if the player misses the appearance of Fujimaru-kun 919 for some reason, it can be noticed by the effect image 920, and even if he quits due to time constraints, etc. , The subsequent player (successor) can quickly recognize this situation (the situation where it is found that the setting is 4 or higher). The above-mentioned specific image (effect image 920) is only an example, and the specific image (specific effect) can be confirmed (recognized) by the fact that the setting suggestion effect has appeared. Can be determined as appropriate.

(Production example 3: Fig. 66)
FIG. 66 shows, as another example of the effect, a case where the setting suggestion effect appears during the big hit game. Here, an example in which the above-mentioned "V probability variation type" is adopted will be typically described. FIGS. 66 (B1) and 66 (C1) exemplify the V-winning effect (blessing effect) that appears when the V-winning is performed during the big hit.

FIG. (A1) shows the production during the round during the big hit. Here, the specific area (V winning area) in the big winning opening is opened in the 6th round, and the game ball wins in the V winning area. Explain as a thing.

When a V prize is won, normally, "V display (V image 931) only" (normal V prize effect (effect without setting suggestion effect)) shown in FIG. (B1) is displayed, but a predetermined condition is satisfied. If it is satisfied (for example, if the lottery for the setting suggestion effect is won), for example, as "high setting (setting 4 or more) confirmed effect", "V display (V image 931) + specific character (disk 932)" ) ”(V prize-winning effect with setting suggestion (effect accompanied by setting suggestion effect)) is displayed. When this "V display + specific character" appears, as shown in Fig. (C2), even after the big hit ends and the next game starts, the specific character related to the setting suggestion effect is displayed in the upper right corner of the LCD screen. (Disc 932) is displayed in a reduced form (disc 932a in the figure). The display of this specific character may be displayed only in the next game (that is, the first rotation after the end of the big hit), or may be displayed until the next big hit. Alternatively, time management such as 3 minutes may be performed, or the number of hit balls may be managed such that the total number of out balls is 300. In addition, as the display end condition, for example, the above (A) to (A) described in FIG. One or more conditions of Λ) can be adopted.

In this example, a V-probability type gaming machine has been described as an example, but the model is not particularly limited as long as it is a gaming machine capable of displaying a setting suggestion effect during a big hit. For example, it may be a so-called "1 type 2 type mixed type" in which the accessory continuous operation device operates when a specific area is passed during a small hit (when a V prize is won), or a special figure 1 and a special figure. It may be a so-called "simultaneous fluctuation type" in which 2 and 2 can be variablely displayed in parallel. Further, it may be a gaming machine such as the above-mentioned "ST type", "fall lottery type", or "general probability variation type" described above. Further, the setting suggestion effect that appears during the big hit game may belong to the non-variable setting suggestion non-notice effect, or may belong to the non-variable setting suggestion advance notice effect.

(Production example 4: FIG. 67A, FIG. 67B)
FIG. 68 shows, as another example of the effect, a case where a setting suggestion effect appears in connection with the transition to the gaming state.

As already explained, there are various types of gaming machines, but for example, the internal gaming state after the end of the big hit game is concealed (in terms of production, it is concealed whether it is a time-saving state or a probable change state). , There is a "game state concealment type" gaming machine that reveals the current internal gaming state at a predetermined timing. For example, after the big hit game is completed, the player shifts to a time-saving state (for example, continuous up to 100 rotations of symbol fluctuation) or a probable change state (for example, continues until the next big hit), and until a predetermined symbol change (100th rotation). For the purpose of production, the internal game state is kept secret. Further, in the fall lottery type gaming machine, the state shifts to the probable change state after the big hit game is completed, but when the fall lottery is won, there is a method of notifying the fall transition to the normal state by the production during the fall lottery game.

FIG. 67A shows an example of an effect dealing with the above-mentioned “game state concealment type” gaming machine. Here, after the big hit game, the game state is concealed by shifting to either a probable change state (until the next big hit) or a time saving state (time reduction number of 100 times) and concealing the internal game state until the symbol change number of 100 times is completed. It will be explained as a gaming machine.

In this example, a specific player-participation-type production "treasure box production" always appears at the 101st rotation of the symbol fluctuation (the first game in which the time reduction state ends and the normal state shifts to the normal state). Explain as to be done. In this treasure box effect, a treasure box image 961 and a button image 963 for prompting repeated hits appear on the liquid crystal screen, and after performing an effect of causing the player to repeatedly hit the effect button 13, the treasure box (treasure box image) is produced as a result of the effect. If the lid of 961) opens and a pile of jewels appears (success production), it is notified that the hidden game state was in a probable change state, while if the lid of the treasure box does not open (failure production), it is normal. It is notified that the state has been restored, that is, that the hidden game state was in a time-saving state. Even if the player does not perform the continuous striking operation, the success effect or the failure effect appears as the effect result, and the internal game state is notified. The true purpose of the player participation type production is that the game state shifts to the state without electric support, and the launch guidance notification effect (arrow images 951a, 951b described later) that encourages right-handed / left-handed is left from the right-handed notification. When switching to the hit notification or when the right-handed notification disappears, the player's attention is directed to another from the event (display or non-display of the arrow image) that notifies the switching of the guidance information, and the launch guidance notification. This is to prevent people from realizing that they have switched to left-handed guidance notification. Therefore, the "treasure box production" is a "skeptical production" that makes you smell or suspect that the game state has shifted to the state without electric support, and fuels the tension of whether or not to shift to the state without electric support. However, from the viewpoint of the purpose or action of use, it also works as a production (attention distraction effect) aimed at distracting the player's attention from the launch guidance notification. However, it is not always necessary to make the effect distracting attention, and it is sufficient if the effect can notify whether or not the state shifts to the state without electric support.

The production example of FIG. 67A shows a case where the treasure box has returned to the normal state without opening, that is, a case where the time saving state has ended after being transferred to the time saving state after the big hit game. FIG. (A) shows the 100th rotation of the time reduction, and here, it is described as being in the state of having electric support (internally, the time reduction state), so that the arrow image 951a as the launch guidance notification is shown. It is displayed in a display mode indicating "right-handed". The arrow image 951a is displayed at a position that does not interfere with the decorative design or the advance notice effect.

In this example, the right-handed arrow image 951a is displayed when there is electric support, and the right-handed arrow image 951a is not displayed when there is no electric support, as shown in FIGS. (F) to (H). It is said that. The details will be described later, but the left-pointing arrow images 951b (left-pointing arrow images) shown in FIGS. It is a launch guidance notification effect with a working setting suggestion.

Returning to the description of FIG. 67A, FIG. (B) shows the 100th rotation at which the time reduction ends, and at the 100th rotation, the time reduction state ends and the normal state is shifted.

FIGS. (C) to (D) and FIGS. (F) to (G) show the treasure chest effect executed at the 101st rotation. FIGS. (F) to (G) show a normal treasure box effect (normal treasure box effect) when the setting suggestion effect does not appear, and FIGS. (C) to (D) show the setting suggestion effect when the setting suggestion effect appears. Shows a special treasure chest production (special treasure chest production). Here, since the case where the box has returned to the normal state is described, a failure effect (see FIGS. (D) and (G)) in which the lid of the box does not open appears in either case.

(When the setting suggestion effect appears: FIGS. 67A (C) to (E), FIG. 68B)
Here, attention is paid to the "treasure box effect when the setting suggestion effect appears" in the above-mentioned figures (C) to (D). FIG. 64B shows an enlarged view of FIG. (C). With reference to (C) of FIG. 64B, "left-pointing arrow image 951b + left-handed character image 953" (hereinafter referred to as "arrow advance notice") appears here, but other points are shown in FIG. (F). )-(G) is the same as the normal treasure chest production.

This "arrow advance notification" notifies the effect result (that the time was shortened) in advance before the time limit for repeated hits has arrived, that is, before the effect result shown in FIG. (D) is derived and displayed. (Advance notice). That is, FIG. (C) is a state in which the transition to the normal state is notified before the production result of the treasure box effect is derived, and in this respect, it is referred to as "advance notification". .. However, this arrow advance notice works as a setting suggestion effect, and when this arrow advance notice appears, it is notified that, for example, "setting 4 or more is confirmed". Therefore, the arrow advance notice will give advance notice of the unfortunate result (disadvantageous information) that "it was not in a probable change state", but the information (advantageous information) that is happy for the player that "setting 4 or more is confirmed". It is a production content that informs. The arrow advance notice according to this example is a peculiar production mode in which contradictory information is reported, that is, not only information that is disadvantageous to the player is notified, but also information that is advantageous to the player, such as setting suggestion, is notified. Such an effect can have the effect of alleviating the decline in the motivation to play due to disadvantageous information, and rather improving the motivation to play.

By the way, the treasure chest production has a function as a "distraction effect" as already explained. For this reason, if the player is absorbed in the repeated hitting operation in the treasure box production and does not notice this even though the forward arrow notification is displayed, whether or not the probable change state continues depending on the production result of the treasure box production. You can tell if (whether or not the time saving state has ended), while if you notice that the forward arrow notification is displayed, the player will say, "Normally (default) nothing should be displayed, but something. You can feel the discomfort that "the production is appearing" and know the fact that the setting suggestion production is appearing.

Subsequently, in (E) of FIGS. 67A and 67B, it is a while (at least a plurality of symbol fluctuations) even after the 101st rotation is completed and the next game (in this example, the symbol variation at the 102nd rotation) is started. , Arrow indicates that the display of the advance notice (or a specific image related thereto (not shown)) continues. This is one of the setting suggestion effects, "notification after arrow", and is a special setting suggestion effect that can occur only when there is "notification after arrow". When this notice after the arrow appears, for example, setting 6 is confirmed. Therefore, the role of this arrow post-notification has a role as a setting suggestion effect and a specific effect described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66 (such as the specific character 901a in FIG. 64, the effect image 920 in FIG. 65, and the disk 932a in FIG. 66). Has a role as.

By performing the setting suggestion effect (“setting suggestion effect + setting suggestion effect” or “setting suggestion effect + specific effect”) that spans multiple rotations in this way, the period during which the setting suggestion effect appears is simply lengthened. However, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the setting suggestion effect will continue after this.

In particular, the above-mentioned "setting suggestion effect (arrow advance notification) + setting suggestion effect (arrow post-notification)" is, in short, a second setting suggestion effect on condition that the first setting suggestion effect appears (executes). Is an effect mode in which the first setting suggestion effect is "main" and the second setting suggestion effect (specific effect (execution confirmation effect)) is "subordinate". It can be said that. When such a "linked setting suggestion effect" is to appear, for example, (I) a first lottery for determining whether or not to display the first setting suggestion effect is executed, and the first lottery is won. In that case, that is, when the first setting suggestion effect is displayed, the second lottery for determining whether or not to display the second setting suggestion effect is executed. Then, when the second lottery is won, the second setting suggestion effect can be displayed. In addition, for example, (II) as an effect scenario for setting suggestion, "do not show the setting suggestion effect", "appear only the first setting suggestion effect", "first setting suggestion effect + second setting suggestion effect". "Appear" and "Do not show setting suggestion effect" are provided, and one of these can be determined by lottery.

Further, when the "linked setting suggestion effect" is to appear, the set value information suggested by the second setting suggestion effect is more useful than the set value information (suggestion information) suggested by the first setting suggestion effect. It is preferable to establish a prohibition rule regarding suggestive information so that it becomes information. This is because the first setting suggestion effect that appears in advance suggests, for example, "setting 4 or more confirmed", and the second setting suggestion effect that appears later suggests "setting 2 or more confirmed". This is because, if it is a thing, useless setting value information is provided to the player. Of course, it is not necessary to provide the above-mentioned prohibition rule. This is because the accuracy of the information as the setting estimation element can be increased as the number of appearances of the setting suggestion effect increases. For example, when the first setting suggestion effect suggests "even number setting" and the second setting suggestion effect suggests "even number setting" (when the same level setting suggestion effect appears), the linked setting It is possible to obtain the information that "the possibility of even-numbered setting has increased" by the appearance of the suggestion effect once. Further, even if the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are at least partially different from each other, the set value information corresponding to the later second setting suggestion effect can be notified. good. For example, four arrows are displayed in the arrow image 951b of the arrow advance notice shown in FIGS. (C) and (D), but the arrow image 951b of the arrow follow-up notice shown in FIG. Is displayed so that the suggestion information "setting 2 or more confirmed-setting 6 confirmed" can be notified according to the number of arrows 2 to 6, respectively. Further, the linked setting suggestion effect is not limited to the one that appears in two stages of the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect as described above, but the first to third setting suggestion effects and the first to fourth settings suggestive effects. It may appear in three or more stages, such as a setting suggestion effect. In the case of this example, after the first setting suggestion effect appears in the treasure box effect at the 101st rotation, the second setting suggestion effect appears at the 102nd rotation, and the third setting suggestion effect appears at the 103rd rotation. It can be a three-stage linked setting suggestion effect, such as making it appear. Further, the effect mode of each stage may be the same effect mode as in the relationship between FIGS. (C) (D) and FIG. (E), or may be a different effect mode in each stage. A part of the stage may be a different production mode.

(Modification example)
In this example, as the launch guidance notification effect, the "right-handed arrow image 951a (first right-handed notification)" is displayed when the electric support is present (in the probable change state or the time saving state). Then, when the state without electric support (during the normal state) is not displayed (default case), the "right-handed arrow image 951a (first right-handed notification)" is hidden (in the case of the default). Switch to (Nothing is displayed) (see (F) in FIG. 66A), and when the setting suggestion effect is displayed, change from "Right-handed arrow image 951a (first right-handed notification)" to "Left-pointing arrow image 951b + left-handed character". Image 953 (first left-handed notification) ”(see FIGS. 66A (C) and 66B (C)), that is, when the setting suggestion effect is displayed, what is the default case? An example of expressing a completely different production mode has been described. However, not limited to this, in the default case, "only the left-pointing arrow image 951b" is displayed (second left-handed notification), and when the setting suggestion effect is displayed, "left-pointing arrow image 951b + left-handed character" is displayed. Image 953 (first left-handed notification) ”can be displayed. That is, when the setting suggestion effect is displayed, at least a part of the default effect mode (launch guidance notification effect) is displayed with a different display mode (effect mode). In this case, the treasure chest effect can more effectively exert the function as a distraction effect.

Further, in this example, the treasure box effect is displayed at the 101st rotation after the end of working hours, and the setting suggestion effect, that is, the setting suggestion effect that works as "advance notice" is displayed prior to the effect result. However, it does not necessarily have to work as a "advance notice". Specifically, even if the setting suggestion effect (hereinafter referred to as "arrow non-advance notice") appears in the 100th rotation, which is the game that ends in a short time, that is, in the game before the transition to the normal state (during the state with electric support). Often, for example, the display modes (1) to (3) below can be used.
(1) A "right-handed" character image (right-handed character image) is displayed up to the 99th rotation game, and a "right-handed character image + right-handed arrow image" is displayed during the 100th rotation game. The arrow non-advance notice in this case is an example of an effect mode in which at least a part of the launch guidance notification effect is different when the setting suggestion effect is not displayed (in the case of the default) (the same applies to (2) described below).
(2) The "first right-handed arrow image" is displayed up to the 99th rotation game, and the "second right-handed arrow image" is displayed during the 100th rotation game. For example, the second right-handed arrow image may be an arrow image whose size is "smaller" or "larger" than the first right-handed arrow image. The second right-handed arrow image is an arrow image whose length is "longer" or "shorter" than the first right-handed arrow image.
(3) The "right-handed arrow image" is displayed up to the 99th rotation game, and the "right-handed character image" is displayed during the 100th rotation game. The arrow non-notification in this case is an example of an effect mode completely different from the launch guidance notification effect when the setting suggestion effect is not displayed (default case), unlike the above-mentioned (1) and (2).
When the setting suggestion effect is not displayed (default case), the same launch guidance notification effect as the 99th rotation guidance notification effect is continuously displayed. For this reason, when the setting suggestion effect (arrow non-advance notice) appears, the player feels a sense of discomfort that "an effect different from the normal (default) has appeared", and the setting suggestion effect appears. You can know the facts that have been done. Further, the set value information suggested by the setting suggestion effect related to the arrow non-advance notice is not particularly limited and can be appropriately determined.

In addition, the above-mentioned linked setting suggestion effect can be configured by using the above-mentioned arrow non-advance notice. Specifically, the "non-arrow advance notice" appears at the 100th rotation (during the state with electric support), and the "arrow advance notice" appears during the treasure box production at the 101st rotation (during the state without electric support). Can be done (in this case, two steps). In addition, the "non-arrow advance notice" appears at the 100th rotation (during the state with electric support), and the "arrow advance notice" appears during the treasure box production at the 101st rotation (during the state without electric support), 102. "Notice after arrow" can be displayed at the rotation (in the state without electric support) (in this case, three stages).

When distinguishing between the setting suggestion effect (the effect determined by referring to the set value) and the effect that does not correspond to the setting suggestion effect (the effect determined without referring to the set value), "setting suggestion effect and non-setting suggestion". In addition to giving a specific name such as "directing", it can be divided by numbers such as "first directing and second directing (which can be the first setting suggestion directing)", or "special directing or normal directing (which is special directing)". However, it may be divided according to terms such as "." In addition, any of alphabets, symbols, hiragana, katakana, kanji, Roman numerals, etc. may be used, and any code may be used as long as it is a code for distinguishing each.

Further, as described above, there may be a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects (it does not mean that there are always a plurality of setting suggestion effects in one gaming machine, but there are a plurality of setting suggestion effects as options that can be mounted on the gaming machine. Therefore, when multiple setting suggestion effects are installed in one gaming machine, one of them is referred to as "first setting suggestion effect", and a different setting suggestion effect is referred to as "second setting suggestion effect". , "Third setting suggestion effect", "Fourth setting suggestion effect" (hereinafter, continued) may be individually referred to. For example, when there are three setting suggestion effects, one of them is ". It may be individually referred to as "first setting suggestion effect", and the others may be collectively referred to as "second setting suggestion effect". Further, any one of them may be individually referred to as "second setting suggestion effect", and the others may be collectively referred to as "first setting suggestion effect".

In addition, the setting suggestion effects having at least one common point in the setting suggestion effects are divided into categories, and each category is divided into "first setting suggestion effects", "second setting suggestion effects", and "third setting suggestion effects" ( Hereinafter, it may be continued). Examples of categories are (1) classified by the effect means (for example, display means, movable object, LED, speaker, etc.) used for setting suggestion, and (2) timing at which setting suggestion is performed (for example, symbol stop). Time / symbol variation display / jackpot, symbol variation display are further subdivided (for example, before reach, during reach, after reach, etc.), and (3) specificity of setting suggestion (for example, selection). Those that are different in rate but can appear in all settings / those that are selected only in setting 4 or higher / those that are selected only in setting 6 etc.), (4) Production time of setting suggestion effect (for example, less than 5 seconds) / 5 seconds or more and less than 15 seconds / 15 seconds or more, etc.).

(Other usage examples)
Further, in the above embodiment, it is possible to confirm that the "setting suggestion effect" has appeared at a timing after the appearance timing of the setting suggestion effect, but it is not limited to the "setting suggestion effect" but the "specific information" is confirmed. It may be possible. This will be described below.

(background)
The display object (game information) displayed on the display means of the gaming machine includes information that is advantageous to the player (specific information: first information) and information that is not (non-specific information: second information). ing. The information advantageous to the player is, for example, a display object indicating that the state is in a probable change state (character display of "probability change in progress", background color "red", specific character is displayed, etc.). The information that is not so is a display object that does not indicate an internal state such as the above-mentioned probabilistic state (background is "mountain", season is "spring", non-specific character is displayed, etc.).

Further, in recent gaming machines, as conditions for obtaining advantageous benefits for the player, (1) points are added according to the progress of the game, and (2) the player operates means (buttons, levers, etc.). The result of operating a switch, etc.), (3) The number of winnings or winnings of a predetermined role (a big hit or a small hit for a pachinko gaming machine, a small winning combination or a replaying combination for a slot machine), etc. As a result of reaching a predetermined number of times, there are some that are given advantageous benefits to the player. This "advantageous privilege" means that the game progresses advantageously from those that are directly or indirectly connected to the jackpot (such as granting a jackpot or a high probability state) (the right to appear the setting suggestion effect or There are various things such as granting the right to execute the actual lottery), and things that do not lead to big hits but expand the range of interests in the game (addition of selectable characters and BGM, etc.). Also, depending on the player, the current number of rotations calculated from the previous jackpot, the number of today's jackpots, today's maximum hamari (the one with the largest number of fluctuations from the previous jackpot to this jackpot), the maximum number of consecutive villas (probability change state and Information such as how many times the big hit has continued in a row with electric support such as a time saving state) is also important.

(Task)
That is, the above-mentioned information that leads to the big hit (first advantageous information), information that can expand the range of playability even if it does not lead to the big hit (second advantageous information), and important by personal observation (rule of thumb) even if it does not lead to the big hit. Information to be played (third advantageous information) is important information for the player. In particular, it is preferable for the player who is selecting the game table to be played from now on to be able to confirm such information as soon as possible. However, when a predetermined step is required to confirm the advantageous information, for example, it is advantageous only after selecting a predetermined menu item on the menu screen (for example, selecting "Today's game history 102d" shown in FIG. 43). It is advantageous if the information cannot be confirmed, or if the demo screen is not temporarily canceled (for example, the demo start waiting effect is displayed) by operating the operation means such as the effect button when the demo screen is in the demo screen (during the demo movie). If the information cannot be confirmed, not only will the player who is selecting the game table be stressed, but also the player who is playing next to the vacant table will be stressed by frequently operating the buttons on the next table. As a result, there is a risk that the motivation to play will decline.

(Solution)
Therefore, by replacing the embodiment described in the above-mentioned "setting suggestion effect" with the display of the above-mentioned "advantageous information", the player can easily confirm the advantageous information. More specifically, even when the demo is waiting for the start of the production or the customer is waiting for the customer (during the demo screen), the advantageous information does not require the operation of the operation means (effect button 13 or direction key 75). The configuration should be identifiable. In addition, if it is stated that "the demo screen is not displayed while the advantageous information is displayed", the chances of the demo screen being displayed may be significantly reduced, but the demo screen is never displayed. Instead, the demo screen is displayed in the non-advantageous information display area (display area other than the advantageous information display area), and the advantageous information can be continuously confirmed.

(How to display advantageous information)
As an example of how to display advantageous information, if one game point is acquired for each rotation (every time the symbol variation display game is executed), one point is obtained. During the symbol variation display, the points are shown. It consists of a "frame (second component)" that displays "numbers (first component)" and points, and a "character (third component)" that displays a predetermined action each time points are earned. (For example, see FIG. 68 (A-2) described later). This is only "numbers" and "frames" while the symbol is stopped (characters are hidden), and only "numbers" are displayed while the demo screen is displayed, and the demo screen display is displayed up to the part where the frame was displayed. Demonstration.

FIG. 68 shows a specific example of the effect of displaying the above-mentioned advantageous information. FIG. 68 (A) is an example of an advantageous information display mode during symbol variation display, FIG. 68 (B) is an example of an advantageous information display mode while the symbol is stopped, and FIG. 68 (C) is an example of an advantageous information display mode in the demo screen. Is.

In the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 68 (A), as an effect for displaying advantageous information (hereinafter referred to as “advantageous information notification effect”), for example, as shown in FIG. "Point image 981 (first component)", a frame-shaped "frame image 983 (second component)" displayed so as to surround the point image 981, and a predetermined action display each time a point is acquired. A "first advantageous information notification effect" including at least three components of the "character 985 (third component)" is performed. Here, when the points that are advantageous information are acquired, the number of the point image 981 is counted up, and when the predetermined number of points is reached, the privilege of the appearance lottery execution right (specific lottery) of the setting suggestion effect is given. I will explain using this as an example. Specifically, when a predetermined number of points (for example, 300 points) is reached, a specific lottery is executed, and if the specific lottery is won, a predetermined timing or during the game period (for example, the next symbol variation display game). In this case, the setting suggestion effect appears during the next big hit game, or during a specific game period (see FIGS. 64 (D) to (K)). Regarding the points, the points return to zero after the above-mentioned specific lottery is executed (after the achievement of 300 points). Further, the timing of earning points may be triggered by the start of the symbol change (at the start of the game) or the end of the symbol change (at the end of the game).

The hatched broken line frame indicating the advantageous information display area 971a clearly indicates that the advantageous information notification effect appears in this area (in the area 971a, the advantageous information notification effect is displayed. It is exaggerated and broader than the above area), and it is not necessarily a rectangular area as shown in the figure. That is, the shape of the display area is not particularly limited as long as it is a display area in which the advantageous information notification effect can appear (the same applies to the advantageous information display areas 971b and 971c described later). For example, a background image corresponding to the current effect mode may be displayed in an area outside the peripheral edge of the frame image 983 shown in FIG. (A-2) or an area outside the peripheral edge of the character 985 (white area in the broken line frame). (For example, refer to the priority display shown in (D-1) or the transmittance control display shown in (D-2) described later), and as shown in the figure, the background image is not displayed in the rectangular area 971a. In addition, a background image dedicated to the advantageous information notification effect may be displayed. The same applies to the advantageous information display areas 971b and 971c described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68 (B), the state where the symbol is stopped will be described. While the symbol is stopped, as an advantageous information notification effect, as shown in FIG. (B-2), the character 985 disappears from the screen, and the "second advantageous information notification effect" including at least the point image 981 and the frame image 983 is performed. It appears in the advantageous information display area 971b. Here, the number of components of the advantageous information notification effect is reduced to two. Therefore, the advantageous information display area 971b related to the symbol stop is a narrower display area than the advantageous information display area 971a. This means that the advantageous information is displayed in a more emphasized form when the symbol variation display game is not executed.

In addition, "during symbol stop" according to this example is not a period within the above-mentioned confirmed display time (500 ms) after the end of the fluctuation time, but the current symbol variation display game is completed and the operation holding ball becomes zero. It is the period of waiting in the case (in this example, waiting for the start of the demo). Therefore, if there is an operation pending ball after the end of the current symbol variation display game, the next symbol variation display game is started as it is without hiding (disappearing) the character 985. This is because when the symbol variation display game is continuously executed and the character 985 is hidden only for a short time of the confirmed display time, the character 985 is hidden and redisplayed repeatedly in a short time. This is because the player feels annoyed. However, if there is no particular problem even if the character 985 disappears until the next symbol change display game starts, for example, when points are acquired (when the point image 981 is updated) is when the symbol change starts (at the start of the game). If it occurs and the character 985 is made to execute a predetermined action display only at this time, and then the role of the character 985 does not arrive for a while until the next symbol variation display game, the character 985 is displayed during the current symbol variation display. May be temporarily hidden, and the character 985 may be redisplayed at the start of the next symbol variation display game to execute the action display. In this case, it is possible to secure a wide effect display area during the symbol variation display while securing the advantageous information display area.

Next, the inside of the demo screen (demo movie) will be described with reference to FIG. 68 (C). In the demo screen, as shown in FIG. (C-2), the third advantageous information notification effect in which the frame image 983 disappears from the screen and only the point image 981 is displayed appears in the advantageous information display area 971c. To. Here, the number of components of the advantageous information notification effect is further reduced to one. Therefore, the advantageous information display area 971c in the demo screen is narrower than the advantageous information display area 971b. That is, the minimum required components for displaying the advantageous information, in other words, the advantageous information (number of points) that the player really needs is displayed. As a result, it is possible to secure the maximum display area for producing an effect that attracts players such as a demo movie, and to confirm advantageous information. In this example, by simultaneously displaying the demo screen and the advantageous information notification effect, the game operation process is such that the operation means (effect button 13, direction key 75, etc.) is not operated (displayed on the menu screen). (Without the need for), it is possible to notify advantageous information.

Here, when displaying only the point image 981, as shown in FIG. (C-2), the size of the display is the point image 981 shown in FIGS. 68 (A-2) and (B-2) described above. Instead of being the same as or substantially the same in size, as shown in FIG. (C-3), an image larger than that may be displayed. In any case, the advantageous information display area is gradually narrowed as compared with the case where the symbol is changing or the symbol is stopped, so that the display area for both the advantageous information and other effects can be sufficiently secured. There is a feature.

(Specific example: FIG. 68 (D))
A specific example of the display mode of the “during the demo screen (demo movie)” of FIG. 68 (C) described above is shown in FIG. In (D-1) and (D-2) in the figure, the point image 981 and the display object (here, the character (fighter 991)) displayed on the demo screen are overlapped and displayed. Is shown.

When displaying the point image 981, it is dedicated to the advantageous information notification effect in the area surrounding the point image 981 (number display unit), such as the rectangular broken line frame in FIGS. (C-2) and (C-3). A background image may be displayed, but in order to further expand the display area of the demo screen (demo movie), for example, as shown in FIG. (D-1) or (D-2), the demo screen side. It is preferable to preferentially display the point image 981 side (advantageous information notification effect priority display control means). That is, the display priority is set to the relationship of "effect display on the demo screen <point image 981". In particular, as shown in Fig. (D-2), during the demo screen, the transmittance of the point image 981 is raised more than when the symbol is changing or the symbol is stopped, and the demo screen (demo movie) can be seen through. (See point image 981a: Advantageous information notification effect transmittance control means) is preferable because the display area of the demo screen is further expanded. In the case of this (D-2), the display area of the demo screen can be secured as much as possible without disturbing the display of advantageous information. In particular, in the case of (D-2), as a result, it is equivalent to being able to use the entire display area of the liquid crystal screen 36. Further, in the case of (D-2), even if the demo movie overlaps with the point image, the demo movie appears transparent, so that there is an advantage that the image flowing in the demo movie does not feel strange. Of course, even when the symbol is changing (Fig. (A-2)) and / or the symbol is stopped (Fig. (B-2)), the display control of the above-mentioned figure (D-1) or (D-2) is performed. It can be carried out. In any case, the relationship between the number of components of the advantageous information notification effect (number of components of advantageous information) in "displaying symbol fluctuation, stopping symbol, and demo screen" is "during demo screen <stopping symbol <demo". It is characterized by satisfying the relationship of "on the screen".

The composition of the advantageous information is not limited to the above three components, and may be composed of two or four or more components. Further, in the above, an example of changing the type of the configuration displayed when the symbol is stopped and when the demo screen is displayed is given, but the present invention is not limited to this. What is important is that the number of components of advantageous information during symbol stop or demo screen display is smaller than the number of components of advantageous information during symbol variation display. As a result, it is a component that the player really needs (the number of points in the above example), and while it can be confirmed without the need for button operation, it creates a production that attracts the player such as a demo screen. The area to be done also has the effect of securing the maximum.

It should be noted that this method of displaying advantageous information (difference in the number of components) can of course be applied to information related to setting suggestion effect as advantageous information. In addition, when displaying advantageous information not limited to the setting suggestion effect, one game state and another game state, or advantageous information is displayed first, not only during the symbol variation display and the symbol stop or the demo screen display. There may be a difference in the number of components to be displayed at different timings such as the timing at which the information is displayed and the timing at which the information can be confirmed thereafter. The above-mentioned "one game state and another game state" are, for example, a game state with electric support (probability change state or time saving state) and a game state with no electric support (normal state or latent state). It may be in a high probability state (probability change state or latent state) and a low probability state (time saving state or normal state), or among "probability changing state, time saving state, latent state, and normal state". At least one may be treated as the "one gaming state" and the remaining gaming states may be treated as the "other gaming state". Further, as in the case of "one gaming state and another gaming state", the number of components to be displayed may be different between "one effect mode and another effect mode".

Further, although the setting suggestion effect and the specific effect have been described in the above example in which "display" is performed in an easy-to-understand manner, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The setting suggestion effect using at least one of the sound effect, the light effect, the movable body effect, and the image display effect is as described above, and the specific effect is also the same at least one of them. It may be the one using two productions. As an example of replacing the icon display (for example, the character 901a of the icon display shown in FIG. 64 (I)), there is a specific sound by a dedicated or dual-purpose speaker, or a specific light emission by a dedicated or dual-purpose lamp (such as an effect LED). You may do it. Then, each effect means (liquid crystal display device 36, speaker 46, decorative lamp (LED) 45, movable body accessory 80, 90, other display means, etc.) is used alone or in combination for both the setting suggestion effect and the specific effect (the liquid crystal display device 36, the speaker 46, the decorative lamp (LED) 45, the other display means, etc.). It may be executed at the same time).

It may be a configuration in which one or a plurality of all the embodiments described above (including all the configurations described in each embodiment and modifications) are combined, and the contents described in each embodiment are limited to individual embodiments. Not limited.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a pachinko gaming machine using a gaming ball as a gaming medium has been described, but the pachinko gaming machine is not particularly limited as long as it can achieve the object of the present invention. For example, a gaming machine that uses a gaming medal as a gaming medium, a gaming machine that uses a gaming medium that uses electromagnetic recording (a gaming machine such as a so-called "enclosed gaming machine (managed gaming machine)"), or a pachinko machine. It may be a pachinko / pachislot machine.

The present invention is useful for gaming machines.

1 Pachinko machine,
2 Front frame (door),
3, 3a game board, game area,
19 Game ball payout device,
20 Main control unit (main control board),
24 Production control unit (Production control board, LCD control board)
28 Launch control board,
29 Payout control board,
34, 34a Upper start port, upper start port sensor 35, 35a Lower start port, lower start port sensor,
37, 37a Normal symbol start port, normal symbol start port sensor,
38a, 38b special symbol display device,
39a Ordinary symbol display device,
50, 52a Large winning opening, large winning opening sensor 41, 41c Ordinary variable winning device, ordinary electric accessory solenoid,
52, 52c Special variable prize device, large prize opening solenoid,
36, 45, 46 LCD display device, decorative lamp, speaker,
49 out mouth,
94 setting key switch,
95 setting change switch,
96 Setting change completion switch,
97 Setting indicator,
98 RAM clear switch,
201, 202, 203 Main control CPU, main control ROM, main control RAM,
241 242, 243 effect control CPU, effect control ROM, effect control RAM

Claims (1)

Operation means that can be operated by the player,
A game setting changing means capable of changing the game setting when the operating means is operated, and a game setting changing means.
Display means that can display effects related to games,
A display control means for controlling the display means and a display control means
A counting means that can count the counting targets that are established according to the progress of the game,
A privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege to a player when the count value by the counting means reaches a predetermined value,
It is provided with a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of types of setting values having different advantages to the player .
In a gaming machine that can grant a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the granting conditions according to the set value are satisfied.
The setting means can change the set value when a predetermined change operation is performed.
The display control means is
Advantageous information display control means capable of displaying advantageous information according to the count value by the counting means, and
A demo effect display control means that can display a demo effect when the judgment condition that the game is stopped is satisfied, and
A change information display control means capable of displaying change information related to a game when the operation means is operated, and a change information display control means.
In the display means, a suggestion display control means capable of individually displaying a first suggestion display that can suggest that the set value has been changed and a second suggestion display that can suggest the set value. , Equipped with
The advantageous information display control means is
When the advantageous information is displayed during the game, the advantageous information can be continuously visually recognized even after the progress of the game is stopped, and further, at least one of the advantageous information even after the demonstration effect is started in that state. Make the part visible ,
The first suggestion display can be displayed at any timing from the time when the power is turned on until the predetermined condition is satisfied.
The second suggestion display can be displayed at a predetermined timing after the power is turned on, and can be redisplayed even after the predetermined condition is satisfied.
When the execution lottery of the first suggestion display is performed, regardless of the result of the execution lottery, the execution lottery is not performed again at least until a power failure occurs and the power is turned on again. ,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images